[RSArchive Icon] Rudolf Steiner Archive Home  Version 2.5.4
 [ [Table of Contents] | Search ]


[Spacing]
Searching Rudolf Steiner Lectures by Date
Matches

You may select a new search term and repeat your search. Searches are not case sensitive, and you can use regular expressions in your queries.


Enter your search term:
by: title, keyword, or context
   


   Query type: 
    Query was: become
  

Here are the matching lines in their respective documents. Select one of the highlighted words in the matching lines below to jump to that point in the document.

  • Title: The Inner Development of Man
    Matching lines:
    • insight into spiritual worlds, becomes an anti-social, inferior member
    • life as if reincarnation and karma were truths and they will become
    • cannot be made in vain, but should become the soul's nature later on.
    • he imprints in himself by constantly holding it in his mind, becomes
    • be so incorporated into one's being that a person becomes enabled to
    • facial expression or some other insignificant habit, if he becomes
    • existence becomes increasingly comprehensible to him. He who
    • In pondering the demands everyday life makes it becomes clear that it
    • impressions. To do so, it becomes necessary, therefore, to set aside a
    • For this brief duration of time he must become blind and deaf to his
    • utterances are formed out of this clarity. Only if this has become the
    • has become proficient in allowing such truths to dwell within his
    • point, which sooner or later becomes available to everybody who has
    • around him lights up in colors never seen before. Something becomes
    • new light. New sounds and words will become audible. This new light
    • crowd the scene today, it has become necessary to present a picture of
    • essential that the truth become known, the guiding spirits of
    • undertakes occult training, his aura becomes increasingly definable.
    • spiral formations become clearly organized. They become increasingly
    • chakrams cannot emerge if a person becomes angry at every opportunity.
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Woman and Society (Die Frauenfrage)
    Matching lines:
    • classes has today become the real women's question has become so
    • culture has become, in the greatest sense, a male culture
    • become something different. It is not so long ago that what today is
    • gradually become the domain of men; and it is from this that a higher
    • that physiology and biology have become deniers of immortality, even
    • the fact that one becomes a completely different human being in the
    • become a different person. His habits and temperament must change;
    • body. One can become master of how the blood circulates; one can gain
    • masculine features. Many facts in life become clearer when we
    • Here it becomes event;
    • the more does the body become an instrument, and the more do they
  • Title: Lecture: Problems of Nutrition
    Matching lines:
    • or not, is left with no alternative but to become a carnivore if
    • it is. Diet, through spiritual development, becomes the personal
    • become an individual and absolute necessity. In spite of the
    • again from those who have become acquainted with spiritual science
    • our lives if we become bound by and dependent upon our bodies
    • freedom and become dependent upon our bodies if we ignore what is
    • We can become even more aware of this
    • can gradually become master over what takes place within him.
    • a man then becomes ill.
    • astral body become master of the physical and etheric bodies. When
    • becomes lord over his body. Otherwise, as a spiritual being he
    • such wise that he remains a passive spectator becomes a heavy
    • all its forces. He must become master of his own inner processes
    • become correspondingly active in the external world. It is
    • diet. This fact that men are to become progressively freer while at
    • Nevertheless, it is not without reason that a mixed diet has become
    • soul will become more externally oriented, more susceptible to, and
    • nourishment from the realm of plants, however, he becomes more
    • independent and more inclined to develop inwardly. He will become
    • concern themselves with both aspects so as not to become
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Etherisation of the Blood
    Matching lines:
    • These two poles become evident when we observe a person placed in two
    • When we penetrate more deeply into this question it becomes evident
    • during the day, that is to say, one can become clairvoyant and see
    • concepts and ideas; or we may become more highly moral, more cultured
    • activity of the will becomes comprehensible when we remember that all
    • can become active and effective. In his ordinary life today man is
    • life of the Earth and will become visible — at first to a small
    • the course of the next three thousand years, He will become visible to
    • through having assimilated Anthroposophy, he may become aware that
    • speak words of consolation to him. The Christ will become a living
    • Earth evolution is magnetism. Yet a third force will become
    • more of this force we employ, the faster the earth will tend to become
    • that man may become free of the Earth and that the Earth's body may
    • it must gradually become known. By understanding the process of
    • for otherwise the spiritual could not become free. We shall also learn
    • intellectual and the moral, will more and more become one; they will
    • next millennia men will become aware of the presence of the Etheric
    • Pandira is he who will one day become the Maitreya Buddha, and who
    • The indications by which the Being who is to become the Maitreya
    • spiritual part of the Earth to become free, leaving the grosser part
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Overcoming Nervousness
    Matching lines:
    • Nervousness becomes manifest in a variety of ways, most obviously
    • perhaps when a person becomes an emotional fidgety-gibbet, that is to
    • weak also become infected.
    • exercise can be quite useful in helping us to become less forgetful.
    • becomes habit to hold such thoughts when things are put aside, it
    • physical body has become dominant and makes movements on its own,
    • Surely, however, the effects of the force, when they become apparent,
    • When you come to think of it, it soon becomes apparent that people do
    • practice such exercises. They also would become aware of the positive
    • involuntary actions, the control of the astral becomes increasingly
    • stronger over the etheric. Thus, he also becomes able, if necessary, to
    • mean that we need become fanatical about the indifferent use of our right
    • procedure in later life, it becomes possible to make good much that has
    • pupil to deny himself the wishes in such a way that the child becomes
    • the child, especially during the first seven years, and it will soon become
    • become an effective truth when it is made a practice in everything that is
    • way that people become less susceptible to illnesses and that they have a
    • less oppressive effect. They will become less oppressive when we
    • self-awareness and enables man to become a free being
  • Title: Jesus and Christ
    Matching lines:
    • has become fundamental
    • our hair turns gray and our skin becomes wrinkled, our external life
    • become severed from the direct impulses of humanity. An earlier
    • What was striven for in the ancient mysteries has now become an
    • humanity, become something no longer human. After the turning point of
    • Only after the Mystery of Golgotha did it become possible to
  • Title: Lecture: Newborn Might and Strength Everlasting
    Matching lines:
    • Actually, today we face another world, a world that will become
    • of the hunting party who see what becomes of the body. When you look
    • willing resembles the changes of the weather, which become manifest in the
  • Title: Lecture: Pre-Earthly Deeds of Christ
    Matching lines:
    • IN our age it has become of ever increasing importance that those
    • into the spiritual Earth-sphere, so that mankind may become more and
    • which enabled him to become an upright harmonious being, permeated and
    • walk, when we realize that his being able to do so has only become
    • with his speech must have become debased through the Luciferic and
    • to stand upright in the Lemurian epoch, and to become a speaking being
    • And the Life shall become the Light of my Ego.
    • become duller and duller in their dark Ego-consciousness if memory
    • The power of Memory shall become Divine;
    • And a Divinity shall the power of Memory become.
    • All that arises within the Ego shall become
    • Comprehend the Light of the Memory which has become Divine!
  • Title: Lecture: The Four Sacrifices of Christ
    Matching lines:
    • unselfishness, and to become acquainted with all those incentives to
    • of selflessness, and what He may become for the conscious development
    • become selfless. This is a duty of our present culture to the future.
    • Mankind must become more and more selfless; therein lies the future of
    • done under Lucifer's influence, would have become self-seeking. With every
    • and find them selfless. If we, understanding this, have become grateful to
    • pain. To be ill means that an organ has become selfish and is leading its
    • element of the atmosphere is related to our organs. If we had become
    • human evolution that thinking, feeling and willing should become
    • What would have become of the human being without this third Christ
    • become disordered through Lucifer; in the first Atlantean period the vital
    • ego and the powers of the cosmos lest it become their plaything. This
    • and intellectual lives in such a way that human beings may become
    • The Christ impulse will become for us the living bridge between earthly
  • Title: Lecture: Anthroposophy and Christianity
    Matching lines:
    • infinitely heightened if we are to become spiritual researchers.
    • mental activity leaves off. Anyone wanting to become a spiritual
    • such concentration is to be fruitful, that person must indeed become
    • in everyday life (but are nevertheless there) so that they become
    • independent of the body. It is just as if hydrogen were to become
    • released so that we become ever richer and more inward as regards our
    • doesn't need to exert himself. However, as soon as we become passive
    • his soul-spiritual being. A reality becomes apparent to his inner
    • already in this life between birth and death. We become familiar with
    • become aware that the seed, the essential part of a new plant, is
    • become a new plant. Looking at things in this way, we arrive at the
    • understood. Thus it becomes clear to us through spiritual science that
    • child has a soul before the soul becomes aware of itself during the
    • depth as they live through successive earth-lives, they become
    • Anyone can become a researcher in the field of the spirit; you can
  • Title: Lecture: Christ in Relation to Lucifer and Ahriman
    Matching lines:
    • Secondly, it must also become apparent how this human body, in every
    • Christ has become a working force, let us visualize — as has been
    • relationships would have become different. But how did this victory
    • the souls of men those conditions by which it can become effective in
    • but becomes saturated with the Christ impulse as if by way of natural
    • 6th day of January. Thus, supernatural forces become active in the
    • development. Michael had become, so to speak, the leading spirit who
    • the twentieth century become clairvoyant to life in the etheric world
    • we are able to suspect. This ether body has become one of the
  • Title: Lecture: Preparing for the Sixth Epoch
    Matching lines:
    • will gradually become more widespread, until by the end of the fifth
    • brothers. What matters most of all is to become conscious of the true
    • and more out of community life, we must in turn become conscious of a
    • prosper. If this attitude, uniting with our work, becomes more and
  • Title: Lecture: Outlooks for the Future
    Matching lines:
    • the physical body and the physical body will become a faithful copy of
    • present fifth post-Atlantean epoch, but it will become a reality in
    • realities, but they have the tendency to become realities.
    • world-conception describes in connection with man, would become true
    • and more become a reality.
  • Title: Lecture: Human Life in the Light of Spiritual Science
    Matching lines:
    • accomplishments in the way of scientific achievement, becomes
    • enmeshed at the present time. These questions become especially evident
    • There are those therefore who have become united within the Anthroposophical
    • at Leipsic about 1870 has become famous. It closed with
    • upon which it is working. This becomes apparent on investigating the ideas
    • which eventually becomes the earth, and as a densifying globe it passes
    • Spiritual Science or Anthroposophy fruitful for his soul need become a
    • is not of this type. It can become an instrument in the soul of each human
    • — that the living ideas contained in it can become a means in the
    • today everyone who earnestly strives can become, up to a certain
    • the spring time, become increasingly clothed in green, later on developing
    • plants physically shoot up out of the earth and become perceptible to the
    • become a living experience we begin to share this alternation of etheric life
    • We become acquainted with etheric life. This etheric life shows that certain
    • lasting until about the fourteenth year, when we become physically mature.
    • that what is expressed in the features becomes more clearly defined. The
    • earth is followed up further, it will become evident that the earth body,
    • In this world, which becomes manifest through spiritual research, we
    • added if it is really to become intelligible to human beings. I should prefer
    • become a disciple of Thomas Aquinas. Spiritual Science does not disturb the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Evil and the Future of Man
    Matching lines:
    • intended to become of those forces whose caricature you see in the
    • another must become ever greater and greater. This interest must grow
    • will happen as we go on into the future; man will, as it were, become
    • indeed become an abstract thing; and all the efforts that are being
    • intimate the social life of man will tend to become! Certainly it will
    • take still longer for this kind of breathing to become a part of the
  • Title: Lecture: Social and Anti-Social Forces in the Human Being
    Matching lines:
    • era, become quite explicable when one knows that the task of our era
    • only when this instinctive nature becomes instead an active element,
    • impulses which seek to become reality. But in so doing we must
    • or Consciousness Soul in which man must become independent. But on
    • Post-Atlantean Period to become self-assertive, to not allow themselves
    • just these anti-social forces did not become ever more powerful; they
    • impulses must become, right on until the 30th century. For men to
    • the “school-bench” of life long after we have become grey. This
    • be nursed, must be consciously cared for. And in our day this becomes
    • Our relationships have become so complicated that we no longer pay
    • relations to others. It is when we try to become more and more
    • wishes by this means to become a politician — then one easily becomes
    • strives for aesthetic form, which can become untrue, an illusion, a
    • become politicians they either dream or they lie. I should add that
    • other hand becomes ill or actually suffers a death if he desires to be
    • people of the earth. This becomes visible in many areas. You have, for
    • Europeans will first become aware of this conflict. The experience of
    • of doubt. One becomes acquainted with all the powers of
    • their minds to become acquainted with the social laws of Spiritual
  • Title: Lecture: Spiritual Emptiness and Social Life
    Matching lines:
    • which can have meaning only when the threefold social order becomes
    • into thinking, so that thinking becomes an act like any other, like
    • loses the spirit. Along this path it is possible to become a truly
    • essential for the whole of mankind to become clairvoyant; but what is
    • West, the dimmer and darker does this radiance become. On the other
  • Title: Lecture: Social Understanding Through Spiritual Scientific Knowledge
    Matching lines:
    • man's organization during the first seven years of his life, become, as it
    • at the age of ten. He re-experiences it. He has become mature now, and he
    • dogmas, but to give them the sort of thing that makes them become
    • teachers and educators in the same way as people become artists or
    • become social if they really meet one another in life, and something
  • Title: Lecture: Soul and Spirit in the Human Physical Constitution
    Matching lines:
    • becomes an integral part of us. In our aeriform organism we actually
    • in the very nature of things water cannot become an organism, is bound
    • imparts what lives within it to the air, and we become aware of what
    • the waking consciousness and as states of consciousness become ever
    • but fluctuating outlines, for consciousness here itself becomes
    • dreamless sleep, in which ideas and thought-pictures become not only
    • attention to states of being where the soul-element becomes a bodily
  • Title: Lecture: The Moral as the Source of World-Creative Power
    Matching lines:
    • everything will eventually become a kind of slag-heap in the universe.
    • alleged, the world becomes a slag-heap, this will also be the
    • but he becomes organically warmer as well — though this is not so
    • but they operate within him nevertheless. They become free when he
    • moral ideas as such become fruitful only in so far as we remain in the
    • our fluid organism, tone was kindled which now becomes part of
    • tone and light into the universe and will become
    • with enthusiasm and become impulses for deeds, work as world-creative
    • universe. But these thoughts are the corpse of the universe. We become
    • way of the warmth all that becomes active which we inwardly experience
    • becomes in itself a source of morality in the higher sense. But what
  • Title: Lecture: The Path to Freedom and Love and their Significance in World Events
    Matching lines:
    • How, in reality, do we become inwardly more and more spiritual? —
    • in pursuit of sensations does not make us more spiritual. We become
    • spiritual we become. When we take in thoughts from the outer material
    • thoughts — we become, as you can easily realize, unfree; for we
    • only when we elaborate the thoughts do we become free in the real
    • thinking becomes what I have called in my Philosophy of Spiritual
    • will, when we become inwardly free; our thinking attains such maturity
    • that has now become thought, or our thinking that has now become will.
    • freedom dawns when we enable the will to become an ever
    • abstract modern thinking has become when it uses abstract words for
    • be irradiated by the will in order to become reality, ancient
    • thought which there is reality, becomes semblance, and he leads over
    • again to become reality of the future.
    • ourselves. They become world-happenings; and if they are permeated by
    • times becomes semblance in man, reality is ever and again dissolved,
    • fact that in man the past dies away, becomes semblance, and the future
  • Title: Lecture: Search for the New Isis, the Divine Sophia: The Quest for the Isis-Sophia
    Matching lines:
    • powers which shine down from the sun, enter the earth and then become part
    • of the world has been created, it is here. It has become increasingly
    • become an empty phrase, And it is just because so many things have become
    • everything which has become mere phrases in the present age, and if these
    • — which have also become a phrase — spoken by the representatives of
    • Isis and then places her body into the infinity of space, which has become
    • knowledge. In place of the heavens that have become dead, this knowledge
    • This anthroposophical community could become a community of human beings
    • Let us become conscious of this most intimate task! Let us go in spirit to
    • within your hearts, so that it may become a power that can help humanity
  • Title: Lecture: The Two Christmas Annunciations
    Matching lines:
    • call to mind something which can become clear to any one who considers
    • not the abstract mechanical thing it has become for modern humanity.
    • The mathematics of the universe, which have become so thoroughly
    • passes through the gates of death and becomes the content of life
    • Magi? It has become our mathematics, with its knowledge of the
    • outer has become the inner, and the inner, outer. And so we have
    • indeed grown remote from the Mystery of Golgotha. We must become aware
    • of this fact. We have become far removed indeed from such
    • The wisdom of the Magi too has become dry mathematics, perceiving the
    • heavens only in designs. It has become an inner thing. But inwardness
    • has become abstract in our mathematics. But the very same forces out
    • Golgotha. The external has become an inner thing, has become
    • out until it becomes a universe around us, until inner vision leads us
  • Title: Lecture: The Threshold In Nature and In Man
    Matching lines:
    • after all, a fact of the life of soul, and one that becomes more and
    • ordinary life, and what he becomes and is confronted with when he
    • fields of higher knowledge, and of how he must have become able to face
    • Strange though it may sound, it becomes clear to us if we are able to
    • not misunderstood) becomes, even in ordinary life, cognition on a
    • will enable him to rise to pure thinking; and on this path he becomes
    • authority in the widest circles and tend more and more to become the
    • part in his conception of the universe. Man becomes filled, that is to
    • becomes, in effect, completely objective.
    • correspondingly. The very fact that we have become materialists, and
    • after most careful preparation has become the common property of all
    • if the soul becomes conscious, in a healthy manner, of its own real
    • consciousness what comes between. How a thought becomes an impulse for
    • have seen, leads a kind of dream life, can become hooded with the same
  • Title: Lecture: The Sun-Mystery in the Course of Human History
    Matching lines:
    • and antipathies in the life of soul. But we become aware of it when
    • our connection with the outer world becomes abnormal, and when the
    • the upper hand in a human being, he becomes a world-hater, and such
    • evil. Evil has its mission — and it is here. If this becomes known to
    • when it surge upwards into mental life, it becomes still clearer but at
    • the same time denuded qualitatively — it becomes abstract. In feeling
    • affirmative judgment becomes experience of light. The same could be
    • must become conscious wisdom, that what has sunk into the
    • and destiny. But in a spiritual sense it had become known to those
    • becomes radiant. And so it will be with the wisdom of the East: dark
    • in itself, it will light up, will become fluorescent when it is
    • that which became Western when the Greeks see Troy on fire, become
  • Title: Lecture: The Alphabet
    Matching lines:
    • has become very abstract. Going back into times of which history tells
    • And only then did the archetypal, underlying reality become an
  • Title: Lecture: The Human Heart
    Matching lines:
    • is there in front of the lens. The human being becomes aware of what
    • becomes the decisive factor between the change of teeth and puberty.
    • become a determining factor for the child only after the change of
    • ether body; but as they do so they become rays, rays with a tendency
    • in the center becomes especially living. And in the midst of this
    • radiance that arises at the time of puberty becomes the true etheric
    • differentiated astral body becomes more and more undifferentiated.
    • inheritance. Moreover, we must know that this inherited astral becomes
    • The astral body becomes more and more indefinite, for it sends into
    • they are imprisoned there; and thereby the astral body itself becomes
    • physical organs. The astral body more and more becomes a cloud of
    • written into the astral body; thus the astral body becomes configurated
    • onwards man's whole activity becomes inserted, via the astral body, in
    • and concentrated there in the human being becomes increasingly cosmic;
  • Title: Lecture: Truth Beauty and Goodness
    Matching lines:
    • This will become clear if we think of the significance of beauty as
  • Title: Lecture: Self Knowledge and the Christ Experience
    Matching lines:
    • repeatedly observed during our historical studies. We have become familiar,
    • become fully human when he has crossed the threshold of death, and pure
    • thinking becomes his; for with pure thinking he can become a free being. It
    • life. We have undertaken to become worthy — worthy of what has been
    • Only after crossing the threshold of death did one become spiritual man
    • a way that, after death, he could become fully man. So, according to
    • My great task is to become aware of my humanity. My task on this earth is to
    • will be clear to him that although he is fully human, as has become clear
    • entered earthly life from the realm of the pre-earthly. You can become man
    • undone; today destruction follows. Then, not to become a candidate for life
  • Title: Lecture: The Invisible Man Within Us
    Matching lines:
    • becomes a body of forces that is active in us but does not come to
    • encroach on the activities in the organism. The human being becomes
    • right way, they can dissolve and again become part of the general
    • vessels, becomes rebellious. It wants to bring about healing, wants
    • body in this direction so that it can become active. It can become
    • astral body and then becomes active. That which comes from above and
    • become too strong. In such pale, lanky individuals we must strive to
    • human being has to become strong enough to be active without the
    • it becomes encapsulated. In this part of his body man's whole
    • wants to become an exudate so that it will make use of the breakdown
    • substance. With belladonna, the fruit becomes especially greedy and
    • The ether becomes
    • becomes similar to that of the metabolic system: B.
  • Title: Lecture: Polarities in Health, Illness and Therapy
    Matching lines:
    • become conscious of all this). The reason for this confusion is that the
    • actually become the most highly developed teaching of the human being. Of
    • and the actual metabolic system, This interconnection becomes
    • natural process becomes an abnormal one. It should remain in the
    • thread-like crystals become even thinner. It orders itself into clusters of
    • get a white smoke which can then condense on the walls and becomes
    • fever. In this illness the astral body becomes weak and is unable to work
    • This force of crystallization, which becomes active in antimony, if it is
    • works with the proper strength. Now if this nerve-sense activity becomes
    • nerve-sense system becomes so strong in the person suffering from
    • becomes incapable of allowing to act in the right way certain forces,
    • become too weak to regulate these organic combustion processes in the
    • entire organism, if the organism has become too weak to inhibit its
    • becomes clear through a more exacting study of the matter — with
    • and treatment. This will become transparently clear if anthroposophical
    • between nature processes and the human being. It can then become
    • If this knowledge becomes widely known, the success of such an
  • Title: Lecture: Man As A Picture of The Living Spirit
    Matching lines:
    • forsake the pulsating forces of our blood. What then becomes of them
    • planet. The Universe then becomes the scene of man's activity and of
    • in the stream of time he looks into the emptiness. He becomes
    • Man should therefore become aware of the deep significance of this
    • in my ordinary consciousness I call ‘I’. But I must now become
  • Title: The Individuality of Elias, John, Raphael, Novalis
    Matching lines:
    • Thought becomes fully alive — four times twelve human beings, that is, who
    • this Michael garment, this garment of Light, shall become the Words of the
  • Title: Lecture: Exoteric and Esoteric Christianity
    Matching lines:
    • had therefore to become entangled in death. He had to become
    • becomes the lord of death and, consequently, of the intellect too, we
    • the whole Earth would have become entirely intellectual, without ever
    • his rule over the earth. In this time even theology becomes
    • materialistic. I have mentioned already that theology has become
    • modern speech, which has already become abstract. For this reason, I
  • Title: The Manicheans
    Matching lines:
    • by Augustine when he had become a member of the Catholic Church. He
    • Root Race the Father withdraws. Then the soul is widowed, becomes the
    • Widow. The soul, which will later on become completely independent, is
    • become independent. Everything that comes from him is a call to the
    • external authority has transmitted to you. Then you must become ripe
    • and Evil. Life becomes form through finding opposition. It does not
    • poured into the old Form. What was formerly Life, later becomes Form
  • Title: Mathematics and Occultism
    Matching lines:
    • truths to become emancipated from sense in order that he may reach,
    • laws, then mayest thou become a student of Occult Science”
    • however, the point becomes alive, the zero becomes an active Cause.
    • Extension itself becomes the creation of the extensionless. Thus did
    • magnitudes has become in recent years a powerful educational means for
    • science teaches the way to become independent of sense-perception, and
    • No one can become an Occultist who is not able to accomplish within
    • from those who wished to become his disciples. But the Occultist who
  • Title: The Dead Are With Us
    Matching lines:
    • have to become acquainted with completely different conceptions.
    • thought with which we must become familiar.
    • mistake, he immediately becomes aware of pain, of suffering, in the
    • environment; if he does something right, he becomes aware of pleasure,
    • Other souls pass him by; they do not come within his ken. He becomes
    • soul-life. When the dead becomes acquainted with a soul, he gets to
    • can become lower when it is within us on Earth. It is very important
    • but really to become accustomed to the total reversal of the familiar
    • knowledge of this, in the remarkable words: “ Time here becomes
    • your knowing it, it becomes a question to the dead. Or you may try to
    • him. In reality it comes from us. This becomes intelligible only when
    • but should become conscious that they are always present. All
  • Title: Lecture: The Origin of Speech and Language
    Matching lines:
    • understanding the external aspect of the mind has become possible
    • becomes ill in any way, we discover that nature herself arranged such
    • I sense the activity through this nerve, but I become aware of it in
    • matter ceases to be superstition and becomes science instead. And
  • Title: Lecture: The Sense-Organs and Aesthetic Experience
    Matching lines:
    • reflection of something which becomes great and significant in the
    • become so personal and really want to let personal feelings cloud
    • that the sense-organs become in a certain way life-regions once
    • to them. The sense-regions become life-regions; the life-processes
    • become soul-processes. A man cannot stay always in that condition, or
    • life-processes become soul-processes.
    • way that they become realms of life, and that the life-processes can
    • medical or half-medical term. Because the life-processes become
    • soul-processes. Life-processes become more ensouled; sense-processes
    • become more alive. That is the real procedure, though given a more
    • the fruits of a spiritual outlook can become.
    • of the blood through life-processes which have now become processes
  • Title: Lecture: A Turning-Point in Modern History
    Matching lines:
    • that man has first to become inwardly free before he can achieve
    • when he becomes poetical, “having nothing that flatters or
    • being, man becomes free.
    • do in the external world becomes such that obedience to duty and to
    • had wanted to become more personal: On Goethe and Myself. For Goethe
    • In conversation about Kant, Goethe would not let himself become really
    • conditions. Schiller says: If men become what they can become at the
    • under the control of the State. The State should become the only
    • This must become a new, fundamental doctrine: that the social
    • the other. This must become the elementary basis for social insight in
  • Title: Lecture: Elemental Beings and Human Destinies
    Matching lines:
    • know well suddenly becomes dejected and out of humour? You have no
    • become involved in all that is going on among the elemental beings
    • ego-consciousness receives then a new form. The child becomes capable
    • Indeed, my dear friends, it will become urgently necessary for the
    • the life of Man. An insight into such things must gradually become
    • these will tend increasingly to become experiences of decline. We find
    • existence. The Earth will become a corpse. We are even now in the
    • are the important things for us; and they must once again become a
  • Title: Lecture: Man, Offspring of the World of Stars
    Matching lines:
    • become aware of the spiritual forces indwelling the rays of the Sun in
    • from the Sun enable the human being to become the bearer of an Ego. We
    • they become inwardly responsive to light and also to warmth. We say,
    • you know, began in the fifteenth century, we have to become free of
    • Sun. He had become a kind of amphibium — a creature who is
    • materialism today man has become an earthworm. He must rise above this
  • Title: Lecture: The Ear
    Matching lines:
    • Through anthroposophical Spiritual Science we become aware, above all,
    • filled with physical, sense-perceptible material, and so becomes the
    • afterwards become the legs and feet, could equally become a kind of
    • ear. They actually have the inner tendency, the potentiality to become
    • strange saying. Nevertheless, it is the truth. Man might become an ear
    • gravity, implying weight — weighs upon that which tends to become
    • the ear, transforms it and re-shapes it. And so it becomes the lower
    • become the legs. The embryonic ear does not enter the domain of
    • world. Your morality becomes a beautiful, your immorality an ugly
    • music. And the harmonious and dissonant sounds become the Words,
    • head-organisation in the Spirit, to become an actual head once more in
    • experiences a condition wherein he becomes altogether one in his inner
    • he is the Hierarchies himself. Nor would he ever become aware of
    • Hierarchies within us. In this way we become aware of ourselves.
    • then become responsible to the Divine. You may not treat it so
    • strives in such a way that it becomes the Heavenly, when man has
    • sense-organs lights up between death and a new birth, and becomes your
    • become an ear downward; and if he remained in this state he certainly
    • spatial ceases altogether. All things become temporal. The temporal
    • only the beginning). He may be quite an old man; he now becomes
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Education for Adolescents
    Matching lines:
    • becomes free at puberty, forces are freed which
    • When such forces become free, and it has not been possible to awaken
    • transform themselves into what they become in most young people today.
    • world must become so all-engrossing to young people that they simply
    • feelings are concerned, pain only becomes greater the more we think
    • to class, and gradually everything in them stagnates, becomes
    • city dwellers, city dwellers who have become teachers and doctors. And
  • Title: Lecture: The Work of Secret Societies in the World
    Matching lines:
    • perish and become dust; not a trace of it will survive. But what you have
    • This has become your soul. The spirit, too, once spread out around you. And
    • what is now around you will become your inner life. You will take into
    • yourselves what is now the mineral kingdom and it will become part of your
    • become your inner being.
    • edifice would one day become the content of his soul.
    • ourselves become in future times. What we do with the plant world, with the
    • animal world and with men, that too, we shall surely become. If you found a
    • what you have contributed will become an integral part of you. If a man
    • build an edifice dedicated to selfless ends. It is easier to become one of
  • Title: Lecture: The Three Stages of Sleep
    Matching lines:
    • dream transforms things in this way. Anxiety becomes terror,
    • does not enter the body immediately, but becomes aware of the
    • sounds, and so on. The person becomes conscious. But there is
    • dream arises. But should that person become conscious before
    • example, you were to become conscious in the middle of the
    • — for it would then be visible — you would become
    • we become conscious in the lightest sleep, we are living in the
    • consciousness, and then we become aware of more than is
    • pictures become distinct; their light is enhanced; they reveal
    • so express it — has become mineral, for in this state the
    • becomes indefinite and forms itself into a kind of sphere or
    • resolved to know death, to descend to Earth, to become man, and
    • become god. This would not, however, be an absolutely good god
    • within earthly conditions becomes a god. Such a man would then
    • to a new birth. A man who had thus become a god would exist on
    • Earth as a man who had unlawfully become god-like. As the
    • Christ is a God Who has lawfully become man, we must seek His
    • antitype in the man who has become god, who, mortal no longer,
    • tradition we have in Christ Jesus the God Who has become man in
    • who has become god in unrighteousness, who has laid aside the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: The Cosmic Word and Individual Man
    Matching lines:
    • the external world changes, inasmuch as the human being becomes
    • body becomes all the more active and inwardly mobile between falling
    • — all these become an organically coherent etheric system. (When
    • in the activity of thought becomes an ever-changing flood and flow. It
    • regions are described it becomes natural to explain a thing by its
    • becomes louder and louder, spreading outwards. But just because it
    • more. As I have often said, Man has become more and more intellectual
    • knows about himself becomes more and more abstract. But behind
    • must be formed in such a way that it can become the organ of thought,
  • Title: Christ and the Twentieth Century
    Matching lines:
    • spiritual form, gradually descended to become the material being we
    • could never become ‘popular.’ Anyone who has even a
    • spiritual Being. What, therefore, has the Christ become to modern
    • research? He has become a poetical image, a figure that has only
    • historical research the Christ has become an imaginary God. To put it
    • man had become mature enough for an epoch when, without external
    • of man had become ripe for ‘Self-Initiation,’ under the
    • inner resistance, it becomes at home with a conception which hitherto
    • portrays a world to him, but its laws will become a means of
    • impulse, in that it will reveal how truly the Christ Impulse becomes
  • Title: Lecture: Richard Wagner and Mysticism
    Matching lines:
    • the universe were not the abstract conceptions they have become
    • outwards and as it becomes articulate is striving to unite that which
    • together or when one becomes dependent on another. But there are also
    • A stone falls from Lucifer's crown and this stone becomes the holy cup
    • would be purified, the substance of his body would become as pure and
    • in the higher calyx and becomes a creator in the Spirit. This
    • becomes “a knower through compassion.” And the
  • Title: Lecture: Spiritual Wisdom in the Early Christian Centuries
    Matching lines:
    • thought which had in a certain respect become estranged from the
  • Title: Lecture: The Crossing of the Threshold and the Social Organism
    Matching lines:
    • themselves; the forces of thought, feeling and of the will become
    • independent. These forces become independent through the fact.
    • the individual human being. But things have become displaced.
    • spheres of thought, feeling and will become separated. This imposes
    • thinking can become sounder; we must moreover create a foundation
    • spirit. In more recent times, the spirit has become very mechanical,
    • night should become fruitful in the course of his day.
  • Title: Lecture: The Weaving and Living Activity of the Human Etheric Bodies
    Matching lines:
    • way as to become a bearer of the Ego. Together with the Ego, the
    • man’s spiritual life we must become broad-minded and we must
    • detaches itself and becomes incorporated with the universal ether and
    • incorporate with it. Of course, what thus becomes incorporated with
    • cosmos. However, this becomes inwoven with the cosmos in a manner
    • etheric body, this becomes inwoven, I might say, with the universal
    • which, the higher Spirits work, becomes quite small, it grows smaller
    • value through, the fact that it becomes the point of departure for
    • we gradually become mature men, who concern themselves with the
    • that the human beings have become, so abandoned by the spirit as
    • then combine the things they see through their intellect, has become
    • become aware of the fact that he is connected, as a whole human
    • whose astral body, that is to say, his sub-consciousness, becomes
    • particular become wonderfully transparent. This reveals the tendency
    • which must become united with the Central European qualities. We can
    • gradually become familiar with them, acquiring an idea of all that
    • detail and that becomes interesting just when it can be substantiated
    • Russian East, people have become aware of this, for a certain
    • something that must become a distinctive mark of humanity: namely,
    • must penetrate into the consciousness of those who wish to become
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: And The Temple Becomes Man
    Matching lines:
    • And The Temple Becomes Man
    • The Temple Is/Becomes — Man!
    • Also known as: The Temple Is/Becomes — Man!
    • BECOMES
    • “And the Building becomes Man”
    • AND THE TEMPLE BECOMES MAN
    • the body can become the outward expression and manifestation of the
    • super-sensible fact ... and yet it must become perceptible in the
    • super-sensible being of man become externally manifest? When does an
    • that becomes flesh within the human being is the Spirit, the
    • modern age become mature enough to understand the nature of such a
  • Title: Lecture: The Migrations of the Races
    Matching lines:
    • already become perverted. In the Atlanteans, memory was the
    • of Dodona, for example, and others. The physical place becomes sacred.
    • it were in the Romans and become life.
    • hold of, and becomes the principle making all men equal before God.
    • could become life through what developed out of the Roman
    • become Christians.
    • The Romans become Christians
    • which this initiation took place were very complicated, as now becomes
    • sublime schooling which enabled them to become the Leaders of mankind,
  • Title: Lecture: The Mystery of Golgotha
    Matching lines:
    • planet to the Earth. Unable to become an earthly man, the Being would
    • Being become an earth Being?
    • can become a free Being in our time because he has to do, not with
    • thoughts into the grave of Nature. For Nature does indeed become a
    • then in our vision of Nature it all becomes alive, and there arises
    • and it becomes for us a living, not a dead, dogmatic knowledge, when
    • If we let Christ become our leader, we may surely say:
  • Title: Lecture: The Recovery of the Living Source of Speech
    Matching lines:
    • become no more than a sign. But it is scarcely more than 1500 years
    • metamorphosed. Words become an expression before all else of sympathy
    • further and become the receivers of Inspiration. And what they
    • speech, but to Imagination. And language becomes the language
    • an element of death, how they tend to become mere empty husks. In
    • become a power in man that can create speech. And among all the facts
    • become alive, become quick with immediate present life.
    • become a festival filled with life and impulse. It has to express how
  • Title: Lecture: Gnostic Doctrines and Supersensible Influences in Europe
    Matching lines:
    • significance of these things in the present age becomes quite
    • highly spiritual form of knowledge has become corrupt; the life of
    • astral sphere which since the Middle Ages has become the Paradise of
    • of the bodily structure of these beings has coarsened and become
    • modern age this astral region has become a veritable Paradise of the
    • of heads, while the other parts of the bodily structure become
  • Title: Lecture: The Influence of the Dead on the Life of Man on Earth
    Matching lines:
    • certain sense, it does become dissolved in the elemental world. It
    • dissolves, it becomes ever more tenuous. But it does not become
    • thus becomes conscious is always there in the subconscious, whenever
    • death and a new birth, and so he becomes able to work upon the world
    • Then comes a later time, when man has become utterly free from the
    • different from what they become the moment we enter fully into the
    • becomes of the major part of that which enters our soul life through
    • without. For us, these things should more and more become no mere
  • Title: Lecture I: Ancient Myths
    Matching lines:
    • they are, but we have developed further and have become weaker.
    • as good as widow. For what did she become? She became what is
  • Title: Lecture II: Ancient Myths
    Matching lines:
    • that which has become the abstract script. This no longer expresses
    • mysteries, but gradually, since it has become abstract, only serves
    • nevertheless it is true: the air has become different. Naturally it
    • nevertheless the air has become different. The air has lost the
    • could say — become coarser. It has actually become different on
    • earth since that ancient time. The air has become coarser. But not
    • only the air, but man himself has become coarser. That which formerly
    • become coarsened in the direction we have discussed. Among other
    • it; one has already become used to abstractions; one does not strive
    • become privileged, that speech becomes monopolized, becomes the
    • someone has learnt a great deal, has become wise — let us say,
    • but this must also become a recognized title from heaven knows where.
    • observation, become comic, frightfully comic in this search! Only
    • Imaginations. One could say in another form: Osiris must become
  • Title: Lecture III: Ancient Myths
    Matching lines:
    • become famous. Beneath this statue, as is well known, stood the
    • cow-horns of ancient Egypt, in spite of having become a new Isis.
    • she had thus become clairvoyant, the power of her clairvoyance
    • age, deeply justified in what this age is meant to become and must
    • become.
    • method, that even the paper crown will become a genuine golden crown.
    • God.’ But the word has become phrase, it has withdrawn from its
    • in life one becomes older. As a matter of fact modern mankind only
    • question: What perhaps do we lose, what becomes different in us
    • demand on our age. Humanity must learn to become older consciously
    • with every day. For if man learns consciously to become older with
  • Title: Lecture IV: Ancient Myths
    Matching lines:
    • one shares the air out-breathed by the other. Modern men have become
    • Fishes) Culture. What the Pisces forces have become in the
    • thoughts can easily become empty phrase in these times.
    • forehead. Man can become great with this earth-culture in this fifth
    • become what they now are. The question in our time is that each for
    • the time must come in which the child learns what it means to become
    • much inclined to take a lively interest in abstractions, to become
  • Title: Lecture V: Ancient Myths
    Matching lines:
    • years go on becomes older. In a certain respect one can say that for
    • by our power of will. We become physically different in our twenties
    • year through his natural forces. It becomes more and more pressing,
    • become unchristian, States have become unchristian, and that
    • Europe have become in the course of the 19th Century! I repeat: it is
    • by the age of materialistic science — which had become stronger
    • than in the Protestant. But he was a free spirit enough not to become
    • occupying us, the problem that will become clear to us in the coming
    • days: men have forgotten how really to become old, and we must learn
    • again to become old. We must learn in a new way how to become old,
    • this can only become clear in the course of our study. Our time is in
    • away from it so strongly that in the meantime he has become an
    • becomes an enthusiastic panegyrist of Freimark, who has written
    • it is to become old! For in the same degree as one became weaker in
    • it becomes ever younger and younger. We can say, therefore, that the
    • first spiritual member in us continually becomes more vigorous and
    • younger, in contrast to the physical-corporeal that becomes weak and
    • to get wrinkled then our etheric body blooms and becomes
    • Hegel followers have in many ways become materialistic, although they
    • evident. But nevertheless, all that in course of time has become the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture VI: Ancient Myths
    Matching lines:
    • would have become in the ordinary course of things perhaps seventy,
    • not understand how to become old — or I could say, to remain
    • humanity were to understand how to become old, or younger in old age
    • as I showed yesterday, this science of today would become really
    • materialistic natural science of today will become spirituality.
    • It will the sooner become spirituality the greater the number of
    • become heart-knowledge. For that we lack two conditions, and only
    • concepts may seem difficult today they will become something that one
    • and such pictures as are needed if they are to become the subject of
    • universe. And these pictures become forms of narrative which we have
    • that it becomes independent in man here upon earth, then this
    • back again into the spiritual world — when this becomes a
    • inasmuch as I become more and more heart-man, inasmuch as I remain
    • becomes something quite different. There is something in me as man
    • has to become familiar in history with divine forces, and together
    • it, it cannot become heart-wisdom.
    • it becomes spiritual science. The older science which is involved in
    • traditional. But head-wisdom has become social theory. That is to
    • played its part for centuries will become different. We are standing
  • Title: Lecture VII: Ancient Myths
    Matching lines:
    • death and rebirth we become familiar with the laws of the cosmos. And
    • man becomes chubby. In this process undergone by the etheric body
    • polarity that prevails in the universe in regard to man. We become
    • whole cultural life becomes imbued with the principle that it should
    • materialism had become general, has a deeper meaning. In recent
    • takes in needs a few years for it to become at home in his organism.
    • more will it become — can one say — ‘un-purified’
    • heart, for he had a small heart in the head that has become shriveled
    • age has become so abstract, has been formed so purely by the head, it
    • thoughts. All has become different, and people are not yet willing to
    • notice that all has become different.
  • Title: Lecture: The Souls Progress through Repeated Earth Lives
    Matching lines:
    • body, which however has now become something different. Indeed there
    • interweaving of the rhythmic with the metabolic processes, we become
    • what has now become reality in European history was formed only as a
    • Orient, although it had already at that time become somewhat tenuous.
    • predilection for the spiritual world, but this has now become
    • living spirituality, which has now become more deadened, more
    • In it the human being becomes a sort of plaything, tossed about by
    • a thing becomes understandable when he is willing to listen to what
    • disheartened by the fact that our opponents are going to become
  • Title: Lecture: The Forming of Destiny in Sleeping and Waking
    Matching lines:
    • evolution, Ego and astral body have no organs wherewith to become
    • perception of world-justice. It does not mean that he becomes
    • become world-creative forces.
    • and understanding that belong to the heart.) becomes free only
    • will becomes free when we have established a true relationship with
    • Man can become free in his life of thought because his thoughts are
    • he has been placed upon the Earth in order that he may become free.
    • human being. For it is the goal of earthly life that man shall become
    • becomes the heart-substance of those who desire to understand it
  • Title: Lecture: Goethe and the Evolution of Consciousness
    Matching lines:
    • become closely acquainted with him, he wrote a characteristic and
    • We know that even to-day, when it has become thoroughly decadent,
  • Title: Lecture: On the Reality of Higher Worlds
    Matching lines:
    • certain guiding lines, how the higher worlds can become a reality.
    • because one becomes aware by degrees that thought is getting free
    • the marvellous organ it eventually becomes in the course of life. It
    • In striving for Imaginative Knowledge we again become aware of this
    • it were in space that has become time, or time that has become space.
    • The essential point, however, is that when a man becomes prone to
    • the course of life. What has long since become the past, has long ago
    • passed into you, as it were, from the external world, has become part
    • of man becomes clearly perceptible. His physical nature is recognised
    • yearning for the physical world. This yearning subsequently becomes
    • through the efforts made and the experiences undergone, we become
    • we become free human beings here on the Earth. And what inheres in
    • confidence inasmuch as the purpose and meaning of earthly life become
    • life becomes insecure if we lose our connection with the
    • freedom may become an integral part of man’s estate. Conscious
  • Title: Lecture: The Dual Form of Cognition During the Middle Ages and the Development of Knowledge in Modern Times
    Matching lines:
    • have now become mere words for him. But on the other hand, he is
    • could be learnt if we would once more become acquainted with what has
    • super-sensible, which could only become accessible to man through
    • the human beings acquired the tendency to become thoroughly absorbed
  • Title: Lecture: The Remedy for Our Diseased Civilisation
    Matching lines:
    • nineteenth and early twentieth century have become great. It was
    • in mind has become evident in a positively radical manner, at least
    • philosophers and those who had become their pupils in popularizing
    • become spiritually inclined, particularly the life of the will.
    • so forth. Particularly the individual side becomes an egoistic
    • Avenarius and of Mach has become the philosophy of the Bolshevik
    • dwells, and so forth. This enables man to become a being of the
    • which becomes just as widely popular as the materialistic
  • Title: Lecture: The Etheric Body as a Reflexion of the Universe
    Matching lines:
    • comparatively short time the etheric body becomes severed from the
    • becomes severed from the human individuality and goes its own
    • question, it will be a good thing to become acquainted first of all
    • birth, then our etheric body, that has become united with our
    • become of his etheric body.
    • beings. Every sleeping human being becomes, as it were, a
    • heavenly light. That is why it becomes a mediator of the forces which
    • now, its etheric body almost becomes a heavenly gift, a gift of
    • human beings should gradually become acquainted with spiritual
    • becomes the spiritual property of an ever growing number of
    • have become accessible to us through that boy, it is far easier to be
    • human beings, they have become, as it were, emancipated from the
    • spirit which can be acquired through spiritual science thus becomes
    • and become his larynx. The lobe of the larynx grows upwards and forms
    • spheres, and this becomes localised in the ear. (In man, all this has
    • human beings of the future to become acquainted above all with the
  • Title: Lecture: Salt, Mercury, Sulphur
    Matching lines:
    • experienced, however, they gradually become vision of man’s
    • begins, directly the breath contacts it, to become indefinite, That
    • become abstract; man was obliged to look, not into his own being but
  • Title: Lecture: It is a Necessity of Our Earnest Times to Find Again the Path Leading to the Spirit
    Matching lines:
    • upon us, if we do not only wish to become acquainted with the forces
    • its spiritual science must become a concern of the great masses of
    • we become materialistic, when we spiritualize matter! And let us
    • Thus man would gradually become an automaton, unless we bear in mind
  • Title: Lecture: Some Conditions for Understanding Supersensible Experiences
    Matching lines:
    • earth-evolution in a certain respect. It would then become possible
    • millennium. They would become much more like animals, while
    • become even more spiritual.
    • Anthroposophical Society should become in the real sense a bearer of
    • of the Ahrimanic Powers to cause the earth to become completely
    • the other senses become aware of surrounding objects. If I limit
    • Threshold is crossed man must become one with the light in his inmost
    • light itself, then for the first time he becomes aware that thinking
    • must become so entirely one with the planet, with the earth, that he
    • Men have become accustomed to think in the one and only way that is
    • physical world, is your body. It becomes a mirror, reflecting back to
    • in the old way, as for four centuries you have become accustomed to
  • Title: Lecture: The Relation of the Movement for Religious Renewal to the Anthroposophical Movement
    Matching lines:
    • have gradually become those of our arts — bodily, plastic
    • Movement will become clear if we take our start from the forms in
    • the world, can be found by men when they become spiritual
    • researchers. And if men do not become spiritual researchers but
    • becomes, let us say, chemical as Chemistry is today, physical as
    • impossible for the blood system to become nervous system, or for the
    • nervous system to become blood system. The several systems have to
  • Title: Lecture: The Ego-consciousness of the So-called Dead
    Matching lines:
    • death. For only in the light of spiritual science, death becomes
    • the light of spiritual science, death becomes an event,
    • life), it becomes a deep and serious event within the whole compass
    • being passes through the portal of death, it becomes all the more
    • in a living and hearty manner, becomes dulled and loses its vitality.
    • earthly life. In this form they become inwoven with our life-tableau;
    • our physical body falls away, for it becomes inwoven with the whole
    • life that frees itself from us and becomes inwoven with the
    • our Ego, upon that which has become inwoven with the universe,
    • what thus becomes inwoven with the universe after our death; we bear
    • it within us, as our etheric body. But now it is spun up and becomes
    • become with lightning speed, also that part of our own experiences
    • which has become inwoven with the universe. That part of our own
    • therefore born to us, through the fact that our etheric part becomes
    • can only cast off little by little what has become of our astral body
    • for we know, of course, that during our life we gradually become used
    • learn to sense this physical part of our being, because it becomes
    • of something that becomes inwoven with us; it is wonderfully woven
    • delicate knowledge becomes inwoven with us, a knowledge of the
    • structure becomes inwoven with us, a knowledge of how the heart is
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Concerning the Origin and Nature of the Finnish Nation
    Matching lines:
    • and becomes, rooted in what is always experienced through the “TAO”
    • body becomes an instrument for that which is to be his particular and
    • And if we become the pupils of the Spirits of Form, we ourselves can
  • Title: Lecture: Awakening to Community - I
    Matching lines:
    • today had not become so particularly intense.
    • growing up, now turns inward and becomes a striving to make one's
    • experience, and it becomes such to a degree determined by the depth
    • where it becomes one's personal destiny. One feels oneself sharing
    • and can escape from it on the soul level only, they become prone to
    • matter itself becomes imbued with spirit as a result of one's having
    • its lowest ebb. Now, however, they have become possible. I don't want
  • Title: Lecture: Perceiving and Remembering
    Matching lines:
    • thus because of its law of continuity [or persistence] he again becomes aware
  • Title: Being of Man/Future Evolution: Lecture 1: Forgetting
    Matching lines:
    • bodies of the human being. Steiner shows how we can become, through our
    • widen and become the hollow bones of the cranium arises through the
    • we shall have to become clear about the fundamental difference
    • Yes it has! The older a man becomes — not so much in his youth
    • included in its development becomes a hindrance to development. If,
    • inwards than it becomes soothing balm for many a thing in man. These
    • carry, and its contents would become more and more extensive, but at
    • the same time it would become more and more dried up. It is thanks to
    • memory picture we have immediately after death. There it becomes
    • life appear, in readiness for the work of Devachan. There they become
    • world. Just as these forgotten memories can become a source of health
    • in man, so can all the experiences of the past life become a source
  • Title: Being of Man/Future Evolution: Lecture 2: Different Types of Illness
    Matching lines:
    • bodies of the human being. Steiner shows how we can become, through our
    • because the nervous system has become incapable of functioning in the
    • arose from spiritual knowledge and has become more and more
  • Title: Being of Man/Future Evolution: Lecture 3: Original Sin
    Matching lines:
    • bodies of the human being. Steiner shows how we can become, through our
    • meaning will become clear to you when you see what we call
    • long as they had a body of soft material they could actually become
    • human individuality would be extinguished, and men would all become
    • these things that occur in the human astral body it has become the
    • substance has become very thinly diffused and has itself acquired the
    • on his finer bodies, he will discover that he has become more or less
  • Title: Being of Man/Future Evolution: Lecture 4: Rhythm in the Bodies of Man
    Matching lines:
    • bodies of the human being. Steiner shows how we can become, through our
    • nothing. These changes become more and more unconscious until a
    • climax is reached, and then the ego becomes slowly more conscious
    • become obliterated, because man has had to become independent of
    • but man has become more free of the cosmic influences around him.
    • then passed on to the physical body. This also becomes defective.
    • become defective through one or other cause. When it is the human
    • becomes defective first and then it passes through the etheric body
    • will only become possible again for the sciences to achieve fruitful
    • become displaced. Man can also sleep in the daytime, and stay awake
    • there today to a certain extent, but it has become independent of
    • that he used to share with the whole cosmos, but it has become
  • Title: Being of Man/Future Evolution: Lecture 5: Rhythms in the Being of Man
    Matching lines:
    • bodies of the human being. Steiner shows how we can become, through our
    • working of his clock will not have changed, it will only have become
    • also been displaced. Man would never have become an independent being
    • severing himself from external rhythm. He has become like a clock
    • circumstances only though, that have become displaced, the times have
    • become displaced as well. Even if we disregard the last-mentioned
    • essential thing. His inner life must become rhythmic. Just as rhythm
    • inner thought rhythm, and humanity would become completely decadent
    • Moon and Earth. In the future it will gradually become completely
  • Title: Being of Man/Future Evolution: Lecture 6: Illness and Karma
    Matching lines:
    • bodies of the human being. Steiner shows how we can become, through our
    • have an exact picture of how the karmic causes of one life become the
    • become as little children, ye shall not enter into the kingdom of
    • make him the strong being he must become by the end of earth
    • of the world allowed man to become evil and gave him the possibility
    • he can become stronger in the course of karmic development than he
    • would have become had he reached his goal without effort. This is how
    • we have mustered, and when they have become mature they make their
    • better it can do this. And if circumstances are such that it becomes
    • whole process in such a way that the person thereby becomes capable
    • become capable of everything that we ourselves have taken through the
    • rebuilding, whereby the soul becomes aware of the forces necessary to
    • and life becomes impossible. A severe illness breaks out, and the
    • into the future, then karma becomes a law of action and of
    • father takes him to the mountains where he can become the pupil of
    • spiritual science will grow into something that will become part of
    • realisation. Spiritual science will become the great impulse for the
  • Title: Being of Man/Future Evolution: Lecture 7: Laughing and Weeping
    Matching lines:
    • bodies of the human being. Steiner shows how we can become, through our
    • brain and the other organs so that they may become its instruments.
    • returns to the group soul and becomes something that only lives on in
    • gradually transforms the organism, so that it becomes not only the
    • to the extent that the ego becomes master of the inner strings that
    • the spiritual point of view if we become clear about the following:
    • nature, pain and joy become forces that can work creatively in him.
    • All the joy and pain we experience in one incarnation become part of
    • that could really become an instrument for an ego and could gradually
    • way too, for its ego has not become so hardened in itself as later on
  • Title: Being of Man/Future Evolution: Lecture 8: The Manifestation of the Ego in the Different Races of Men
    Matching lines:
    • bodies of the human being. Steiner shows how we can become, through our
    • sun and the moon did man become like we know him today. What were the
    • wanted to become teachers of those people who were inferior souls and
    • Equator and the North Pole. The human bodies that could become
    • that it could become the bearer of self-consciousness in a harmonious
    • and so on, in such a way that they could become the expression of an
    • the details of later times you will see how much becomes
  • Title: Being of Man/Future Evolution: Lecture 9: Evolution, Involution and Creation out of Nothingness
    Matching lines:
    • bodies of the human being. Steiner shows how we can become, through our
    • science should take hold of human life, and how it can become life,
    • clairvoyant consciousness a very special fact becomes apparent here.
    • forces. However, these currents and forces gradually become less
    • part that is the instrument for visual perception become connected
    • which first worked from outside become active from within. What was
    • sheaths in the twentieth to the twenty-second year; then it becomes
    • in the animal. The astral body becomes free, and as long as it
    • conception, and it now becomes free. Hence, because there is
    • something within man from the beginning that becomes free at the age
    • been at work, although it only becomes free at his twenty-first year,
    • spiritual become greater and greater.
    • however, it has become for him an experience. Something has arisen in
    • to it the soul experiences from soul relationships. These become the
    • from previous causes will become greater and greater, and his inner
    • being become richer and richer. What he has brought with him from
    • wheel becomes faulty, so you replace it with a new one. Now you have
    • wheel becomes faulty. You replace that, and you now have the old
    • image, so that we may say: The rudiments of what I am to become were
    • more substantial these spirits of personality become. What do these
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Between Death and Rebirth: Lecture One
    Matching lines:
    • of truthfulness and earnestness, and become thoroughly conscious of
    • flow into it. Individual souls will become more and more receptive
    • essential to become accustomed to a great deal that is the exact
    • world, the calmer our soul can become, the more all inner
    • that year it has become necessary to allow the spiritual to come to
    • outer events; since that year they have become more inward.
    • become more and more dependent upon inner exertions, and men will
    • can become, the more will the facts of the spiritual world be able to
    • belong to us. Just as in the physical world we become aware of
    • we shall become ‘sociable’ spirits and enjoy
    • genuine moral quality has been lacking in us; we then become solitary
    • decisive. Individuals with a religious inner life will become
    • religious life, inevitably become spiritual hermits, each one living
    • birth, errors and mistakes on Earth. also our thoughts, become facts.
    • like a mountain. Only in this way can he become aware of the
    • penetrate into our souls and become perception and feelings, and as
  • Title: Between Death and Rebirth: Lecture Two
    Matching lines:
    • point of view will become thoroughly clear only when the whole course
    • that understanding can become more complete. Let us, however, begin
    • become ‘I’-conscious. You can discover for yourselves how
    • often you become conscious of your ‘I’ in later life. You
    • by such contacts with the world outside that the child becomes aware
    • character becomes more marked the longer ago the events in question
    • passed through the gate of death becomes in the real sense a Mercury
    • have the faculty to become thoroughly acclimatised in these other
    • man becomes a hermit, feels excluded from the community of the other
    • to the Sun sphere. In very truth we become, as souls, Sun dwellers
    • becomes a reproach which weighs upon us unceasingly and which we
    • becomes a source of suffering, as if towering mountains were
    • to become the leader of his people, underwent an Initiation at this
    • men had gradually to be prepared to become more and more qualified
    • reality of Christianity. Not until Christians become so truly
    • encounter another human soul we can become companions and not be
    • will be for us a blessing — this will become evident in later
    • lectures. But it has become possible to find that picture only
    • while His dwelling-place was still the Sun sphere become visible. As
    • fails to become conscious of what it is in reality. And when we
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Between Death and Rebirth: Lecture Three
    Matching lines:
    • become reality on the physical plane exist as forces and effects in
    • responsible on Earth. To a certain extent change has become
    • certain time in his life and becomes an anthroposophist. It may
    • find Anthroposophy he might himself have become a very good adherent.
    • rages against Anthroposophy because his friend has become an adherent
    • denounces Anthroposophy because his friend has become an adherent
    • now asserts itself and becomes an intense wish for Anthroposophy.
    • becomes a hindrance only when he has passed into Devachan. Hence the
    • How can we become aware of this spiritual world?
    • All these possibilities which do not become reality on
  • Title: Between Death and Rebirth: Lecture Four
    Matching lines:
    • to his physical body. Nor does he become free from the physical body
    • becomes possible only as we progress patiently in Spiritual Science
    • picture of the Ego when a human being is asleep, actually becomes
    • and becomes dark and more or less opaque while the part streaming up
    • progresses it will become more and more possible for him to picture
    • process of evolution as a whole becomes clear only when all the
    • In this way spiritual teaching actually becomes part of
    • forces he had otherwise always drawn from those worlds would become
  • Title: Between Death and Rebirth: Lecture Five
    Matching lines:
    • Christian form. It may truly be said that when the Buddha had become
    • could not become the common possession of all mankind. It was
    • supersensibly, in the stream that had become part of the process of
    • disposition of Francis of Assisi. They would have become, within
    • the new birth we actually become inhabitants, in succession, of Moon,
    • necessary that the evolution of Mars should become a process of
    • ascent, for the consequences of the phase of descent had become all
    • two categories of human beings would have become more and more
    • could be achieved through the Buddha should become part of the
    • as Christ Jesus had become for the Earth. The Buddha had been
    • any truly effective influence in life on the Earth inevitably becomes
  • Title: Between Death and Rebirth: Lecture Six
    Matching lines:
    • this. He is not immediately the being he is intended to become as a
    • have become Dynamis, Spirits of Movement, but fell behind in their
    • battling with those other Spirits who ought already to have become
    • disappear when he is already in the physical world; but they become
  • Title: Between Death and Rebirth: Lecture Seven
    Matching lines:
    • will be characteristic of those who are to become spiritual leaders
    • course of evolution. If we realise this, it will, become evident that
    • earliest youth the human being becomes dependent upon them and his
    • what impersonal public opinion has become today. Anyone who is
    • after death as a somewhat dim clairvoyant consciousness, had become
    • had not taken place, men would have become progressively empty in
    • than for a purely physical life, and so would have become more and
    • advanced peoples, however, can become conscious after death only to
    • who remained backward and have become Luciferic spirits. What we call
    • course of evolution and become Luciferic in character. It is
    • a quite different dimension because the spirits become more and more
    • strange to many people, that life in Kamaloka becomes very difficult
    • of Golgotha. But the Mystery of Golgotha will become of greater and
    • become better in their own inner nature, therefore the process of
    • to become a match for those spirits who are now exerting their
    • influence of public opinion he becomes more and more dependent upon
    • such a way that they become the foundation of the sense for freedom
    • be evident, which — although they become manifest only
    • he has become a different being! Qualities that were completely
    • in their life becomes evident. For the fact that an individual was a
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Between Death and Rebirth: Lecture Eight
    Matching lines:
    • outside us in life on Earth becomes our inner world. Preparation of
    • sleep, in other words, when we become clairvoyant, having wakened
    • that here, in life on Earth, is outside us becomes in that other life
    • physical body becomes visible. And it is only when we come to deal
    • existence. Thus what is later on to become the body of the human
    • sub-sensory, below the level of the sense-world. This often becomes
  • Title: Between Death and Rebirth: Lecture Nine
    Matching lines:
    • again through birth, he becomes in a certain way the moulder of his
    • in such a way that although he becomes an individual who is,
    • life between birth and death may become more and more intelligible.
    • were obliged again to forego the right guidance and could not become
    • own self made into God! In the case of many pious souls it becomes
    • can become servants of the evil spirits of illness and misfortune, so
    • too we can become the servants of those spiritual beings who promote
    • becomes aware that in physical life on Earth there are two ways in
    • sense. Earth-evolution is such that this aspect of life will become
    • tasks that men will have to carry out will become increasingly
    • devotion — this prepared the soul to become a server of the
    • super-sensible world into our physical world, to become a servant of
    • Everything becomes cause and everything produces
    • falling asleep, is preparing himself to become, after death, a helper
    • Earth — perhaps by having become anthroposophists. Our
    • eventually become aware from the way in which the thoughts which they
    • becomes fuller and more spiritual when everything is influenced by
    • indeed outer life will become increasingly so — but as man
    • become more and more materialistic — that is the Earth's karma
    • goal, souls must become inwardly more and more spiritual. My purpose
  • Title: Between Death and Rebirth: Lecture Ten
    Matching lines:
    • become compared with their former vividness; that will give you some
    • the Light-Spirit, with Lucifer, who on Earth has become the tempter,
    • everything that is earthly. After the soul has become inwardly free
    • evolved to become Earth. What streams to us from the Christ Impulse,
    • become what it is today because behind it there is an infinitely long
  • Title: Christ and the Spiritual World: Lecture One
    Matching lines:
    • memories seriously, then it becomes clear to us that at the same time
    • the light of Anthroposophy. It might become one of those
    • the pupils of Socrates a little earlier; it had become popular in a
    • the Mystery of Golgotha, we become aware of something different. We
    • him by two worlds; and it becomes apparent — so the clairvoyant
    • Achamod had completely become this material world, where men now
    • understand very well how you have become so proud and arrogant, with
    • has become so crude and simple and primitive that you are satisfied
    • this lecture becomes all the sharper. We see on the one hand our own
    • lying like a weight on the soul, becomes even greater if we reflect
  • Title: Christ and the Spiritual World: Lecture Two
    Matching lines:
    • questions and try to answer them, the course of events will become
  • Title: Christ and the Spiritual World: Lecture Three
    Matching lines:
    • solar activity, did not become organs of mere sympathy and antipathy.
    • Lucifer and Ahriman, the vital organs would have become merely organs
    • soul-organs would have become disordered. I mean that willing would
  • Title: Christ and the Spiritual World: Lecture Four
    Matching lines:
    • wisdom, since it professed the Jahve-god, had to become Geology. And
    • man out of earth; and he, the Jahve-god, having become in the
  • Title: Christ and the Spiritual World: Lecture Five
    Matching lines:
    • Parsifal becomes the Grail King. And so the name,
    • stellar script must once more become something that speaks to us. And
  • Title: Christ and the Spiritual World: Lecture Six
    Matching lines:
    • important fact. The gold-gleaming sickle becomes apparent because the
    • little, to become a sickle. Something must be visible of the dark
    • might become the bearer of spiritual culture in later times. Now let
    • had become a moon god only in order to help the Earth forward.
    • such stories are despised, the rarer they become. For these spirits
    • out into the Earth's aura, had become the Lord of the Earth.
  • Title: Perception of the Nature of Thought
    Matching lines:
    • evolution become entirely spiritual, but leaving its signs behind in
    • become spiritual to the same degree as the Old Saturn laws. The
    • Saturn laws have become so spiritual that we can only investigate
    • embryo becomes so to say more and more atomistic. The nearer the
    • becomes increasingly spiritual. For that which is attached to the
    • to epoch, cause philosophy to become precisely what it is. Because
    • period and then the Christ, the Sun-Being, becomes active in the
    • ‘History of Philosophy’! And what it can become when one knows
    • this becomes living — the sun rises for us like the Sun within
    • becomes that is understood theoretically in Anthroposophy, so that,
    • Anthroposophy can become alive and grip our whole soul.
  • Title: Lecture: The Spiritual Individualities of the Planets
    Matching lines:
    • for such a man does the Moon become as it were inwardly transparent
    • eyes of spirit and soul, Saturn becomes a living historian of the
    • language tends to become superficial, poor in qualities of soul, when
    • in which freedom becomes a luminous reality in the universe; and at
    • can become luminous and pass over into the flame of freedom.
  • Title: Lecture: The Problem of Destiny
    Matching lines:
    • that life becomes less interesting through the fact that the riddles
    • that he is losing it more, and more, it will become an ever growing
    • onward, and in future it will become more and more necessary.
    • this force grows powerless because man must become independent, he
    • evolution of man's future, but these truths should become
    • would become paralysed if no help comes from the spiritual worlds.
  • Title: Lecture: On the Connection of the Living and the Dead
    Matching lines:
    • ourselves become precisely such a being as these elemental beings
    • are. In a manner of speaking, we ourselves become an elemental being.
    • becomes one with the etheric counterpart. A few days after death we
    • become — united as it now is with its counterpart or
    • body in the course of life becomes a part of the spiritual world. It
    • our etheric body into the spiritual world and become part and parcel
    • whom he becomes connected in one way or another — to whom,
    • are instrumental. Our life does not become any the less free thereby.
    • that we become unfree because our soul constantly receives influences
    • connected with warmth and cold, with all the things that become our
    • then that they become mature.
    • after our death that we become truly ripe to influence other people
    • from a given moment that it becomes truly ripe to work upon others.
    • Then, however, it does become ever riper and riper.
    • — for everything that evolves, becomes ever riper and more
    • mature — still more mature becomes that which lives in us when
    • it no longer has to stop short at Inspiration but can become
    • Time-Spirits or Archai. Only then has it become so mature that its
    • world. After a certain time we become ripe to send imaginations; then
    • which we always are, becomes alive for us through spiritual science.
  • Title: Lecture: The Elemental World and the Future of Mankind
    Matching lines:
    • intelligence has become something mechanical which no longer springs
    • world. It will be necessary for man not only to become conscious once
    • mankind does not become receptive to what streams towards him from
    • evolution. The earth can only become what it was originally intended
    • to become if man, in each epoch, tackles his task rightly.
    • becoming multitudes. The ones who strive the most to become
    • another and become many individuals. Rather do they strive to grow
    • together and disappear into one another; they seek to become a
    • powers. In order for the earth to become what it was originally
    • intended to become, man must wake up to the dangers that threaten
  • Title: Lecture: The Moment of Death and the Period Thereafter
    Matching lines:
    • spiritual science does death become a real event in the true meaning
    • portal of death. In the light of spiritual science, death becomes an
    • life); it becomes a deep and serious event within the whole compass
    • portal of death, it becomes all the more important. The time through
    • becomes dulled and loses its vitality. But when we pass through the
    • become interwoven with our life-tableau; in this form we experience
    • it becomes interwoven with the whole universe, with the whole world.
    • and becomes interwoven with the universe, even what we experience
    • namely, with our astral body and our ego, upon that which has become
    • earthly life we bear within us what thus becomes interwoven with the
    • But now it is spun up and becomes interwoven with the world. And we
    • what our physical body has become with lightning speed, also that
    • part of our own experiences which has become interwoven with the
    • that our etheric part becomes interwoven with the universe; this
    • little what has become of our astral body as a result of our earthly
    • become used up, we grow older, and our strength gradually dwindles.
    • being because it becomes hardened within us and because it pushes
    • becomes interwoven with us; it is wonderfully woven out of pure
    • experience ourselves inwardly, a delicate knowledge becomes
    • weariness means that a knowledge of the heart's structure becomes
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Relationships Between the Living and the Dead
    Matching lines:
    • physical body, he stands in a world, as we have become accustomed to
    • our work, and become ever stronger, as we can well see, yet we may
    • becomes especially difficult for him to penetrate into the spiritual
    • because their ideas have become stiff and dead, through the fact that
    • into the different ways by which this physical body becomes united
    • smallest parts of our bodies finally become, under all circumstances,
    • become air and water become at last warmth. Yes, even though it may
    • or, let us say, through conception — gradually becomes
    • surely do we always have before us, when we become fully conscious
    • must be carried out in perfect calmness of soul. If anyone becomes
    • we become conscious of it.
    • Perhaps you have all become familiar with the experience
    • becomes an exterior world. The one who has died, does not look upon
    • do the living. And, moreover, it never becomes alien to the dead.
    • somehow become evident, spiritually. In other words, this Lucifer
    • any concepts of Truth in our thoughts, our concepts become falsified.
    • take hold of lies, and allow truth to become inwardly distorted.
    • should be. For, the welfare of the human race can become a reality
    • only if our souls become united again with the spirit. Spiritual
  • Title: Mission of Folk-Souls (1929): Lecture 1
    Matching lines:
    • transform the astral, so that it will become something different from
    • ‘ I ’, become the Spirit-man or Atma. Thus we
    • mankind this may become different, and it will become essentially
    • above them.’ If at the present day a man becomes conscious in
    • this form will become more and more concrete in the following
    • The fact that individual persons become instruments in this mission
  • Title: Mission of Folk-Souls (1929): Lecture 2
    Matching lines:
    • would have become of many physical things in modern times, if this
    • become Spirits of Personality during our earth existence, work in
    • the constitution of the people. Hence it has become difficult for
  • Title: Mission of Folk-Souls (1929): Lecture 3
    Matching lines:
    • appear in the intellectual-soul or mind-soul, and only becomes quite
    • Archangels out of all that can also become human consciousness? What
    • being inwardly, so that it becomes a part of his life. Observe the
    • age these members become relaxed, they refuse to work; that is
    • which he perceives begin to become less productive, less active, when
    • who expresses himself in the Spirit of the Age becomes, so to speak,
    • to this portion that which has become the important concern of the
  • Title: Mission of Folk-Souls (1929): Lecture 4
    Matching lines:
    • become capable of taking into himself an ‘ I ’.
    • only becomes man during his earth life in the middle part, and in the
    • belongs to the later epochs of life. Through this man has become a
    • If all this had become what it did not become, that is
    • earth during the middle part, and had therefore become quite a
    • reason, however, man has become more dependent on the earth upon
    • which he lives, than he would otherwise have been. He has become
    • the Spirits of Form, as one might say, — he becomes dependent
    • But because he has become dependent upon the earth, because his youth
    • is spent in the way we have described, he becomes earthbound, he
    • becomes a being who is connected with and belongs to the country in
    • which he was born. He thus becomes dependent upon all the conditions
    • what it is in the mountains. Man therefore becomes altogether
    • permeates the human organization, so that man becomes dependent upon
    • but which through rejuvenation have become quite different. Thus in
    • the civilization become, and as civilization it approaches its end.
    • might be rather dangerous, because people might become indignant.
    • the spiritual will again become of no importance.
    • see him in his whole evolution; he has become what he is, through the
  • Title: Mission of Folk-Souls (1929): Lecture 5
    Matching lines:
    • Our consciousness, our horizon, becomes wider, more
    • become solid. Viscous waves were then thrown up from the South, so
    • through various incarnations before it could become earth, through
    • Trinity becomes a Quaternary, and the latter begins with its fourth
    • inner being becomes the substance of love. That is what we may call
    • the first spiritual Beings to become visible — even before the
    • atmosphere of the earth. These beings who are the first to become
  • Title: Mission of Folk-Souls (1929): Lecture 6
    Matching lines:
    • the earth, and that the way in which man becomes aware of these
    • you will have become somewhat more closely acquainted with what may
  • Title: Mission of Folk-Souls (1929): Lecture 7
    Matching lines:
    • post-Atlantean civilization after their Archangel had become the
    • himself became manifest, when he had become the Spirit of the Age, in
    • Asia, Africa and Europe, whose centre the Greek people had become.
    • Spirit of the Age that he might become the leader of exoteric
    • culture, it has become possible for the many different kinds of
    • of the Age. These tendencies will be able to become an important part
  • Title: Mission of Folk-Souls (1929): Lecture 8
    Matching lines:
    • states of clairvoyance, had become a matter of complete indifference
    • giving him what were to become his soul forces, and he found there as
    • awake, he might become Guide in the soul-world of the Germanic
    • microcosmically have become the twelve brain nerves. He sees the
    • passes over into what later becomes ‘Riesenheim’ (Home of
  • Title: Mission of Folk-Souls (1929): Lecture 9
    Matching lines:
    • impersonal, and above all one is required to become impersonal in
    • man gained two things: he gained the capacity to become an
    • Hela. Man has become such that his view, his clear luminous vision
    • into the spiritual world has become dimmed by the increasing pressure
    • slowly and by degrees has the outlook of man become limited to the
    • in the death of Balder, had become true for the majority of men.
    • become visible, — brought about the feeling that the time spent
  • Title: Mission of Folk-Souls (1929): Lecture 10
    Matching lines:
    • founding of the parliamentary forms of government at once becomes
    • significance of Christ becomes the central point of philosophy, and
    • it thus becomes a very different thing from what the Western European
  • Title: Mission of Folk-Souls (1929): Lecture 11
    Matching lines:
    • The Mystery-training will nevertheless not become
    • become the most wonderful manifestation for mankind. Everything that
    • may become the common possession of mankind, and become
    • South, East, West and Centre of Europe become aware that it is
    • Asa, whom we shall most certainly see before us, he will then become
  • Title: Lecture: A Picture of Earth-Evolution in the Future
    Matching lines:
    • intellect has become more and more shadowy, and as a result of the developments
    • possible for him to become an earthly being. Through this event — through the
    • earth — man has become an earthly being, existing in the sphere of earthly
    • gravity. Without earthly gravity, he could never have become a being capable of
    • personality. He was able to become a personality because of the concentration
    • nature has become more spiritual, but with his spiritual faculties he thinks
    • year of life. Women will then become barren. An entirely different form of
    • the earth and become part of it.
    • If the intellect continues to become even
    • will in a trice become substantial realities when the moon unites again with
    • thoughts become realities. Dreadfully abstract theories are hurled at men
    • today, such, for example, as “Thoughts become things,” or similar phrases.
    • the shadowy thoughts of modern times will become spidery creatures having a
    • when applied to the plant kingdom, science must become a form of art, and still
    • women will become barren and the moon will unite once again with the earth. The
    • Whenever science fails to become art, it degenerates into sophistry a form of
    • existence. It separated itself from the earth in order that man might become a
    • moon-existence as it comes down into the sphere of the earth and will become one
  • Title: Mission of Spiritual Science and of Its Building at Dornach
    Matching lines:
    • Anthroposophical Society are names which have become more widely known
    • which had become dear to me because a Professor of Philosophy, Robert
    • misunderstood. One who has become conversant with this spiritual
    • brain have become abnormal and diseased. In every case in which the
    • done with thinking in order that it may become something entirely
    • whole inner life of the soul becomes changed. Something happens which
    • lifeless form, were suddenly to begin to walk and to become living.
    • itself becomes a living being within him. Thereby he has grasped
    • conceptions. He becomes permeated by this living, ruling element. And
    • bringing logical thinking to life within him, becomes conscious of a
    • transformed that it no longer leads merely to images, but becomes
    • become something inwardly alive, a kind of etheric body. The will may
    • the will we become aware that we have a second human being within us,
    • become unconscious and know nothing about ourselves and our
    • whole, becomes split up into certain principles of which it is
    • This new human being can be seen in the present one, for it becomes
    • how unreasonable it is to become a pantheist, how repugnant to common
    • through spiritual science cannot be fully perceived, becomes quite, I
    • through spiritual science, but, in accordance with their nature, become
    • just proofs of the manner in which what is really said becomes altered
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Spiritual Communion of Mankind
    Matching lines:
    • the masses of those who were their followers: “We have become
    • a doctor to become ignorant in August and September — if I may
    • enables the roots of the plants to thrive. The seeds become roots and
    • because we can only become Man again in the true sense by finding the
  • Title: Lecture: Michelangelo
    Matching lines:
    • when in his heart he becomes fully aware of what lies before him; he
    • the moment when the soul becomes aware of its task, and that moment
    • impossible for the soul in one epoch becomes possible in another, and
    • Why had this become
    • soul had become more inward. There is a marked difference between
    • become more inward. This inner deepening he expressed by external
    • only become clear to us if we turn our gaze towards the Sibyls.
  • Title: Lecture: Technology and Art: Their Bearing on Modern Culture
    Matching lines:
    • is that in the former case the experiences become conscious; the
    • killed, destroyed. And he becomes aware that this destruction makes
    • modern Spiritual Science is to become living reality. Mankind has
    • when it encounters the (impact of the painting, may itself become a
    • carried to a further stage, the plastic-pictorial element becomes a
  • Title: Lecture: Past Incarnations of the Peoples of Today
    Matching lines:
    • happened in these earlier generations. He becomes familiar with the
    • you, another question forces itself upon him; namely: What has become
    • Today, of course, it has become altogether decadent, but at the time
  • Title: Lecture: Morality and Karma
    Matching lines:
    • Theosophy becomes really fruitful if we can observe its influence on
    • our own life and if it becomes living substance within us.
    • must become less selfish; we should be able to rejoice at another
    • case exercise its influence and we should wait until this becomes
    • which build up the next life; it will become interwoven with the
    • truth, it should become manifest that by adopting the right attitude
    • of Theosophy will then become living substance.
  • Title: Lecture: The Inexpressible Name, Spirits of Space and Time.
    Matching lines:
    • piece of the body tends to become something resembling the whole body
    • mathematical-geometrical sphere, the less transparent things become.
    • conception. Our world conception would become far less selfish than
    • that modern people must become more and more conscious of the real
    • Most egoistic of all have become religions, religious creeds. Even
    • superficial facts can show you that religious beliefs have become
    • large, they become majorities. In that case it is not human destinies
    • stereotyped model; he ceases to be a real human being and becomes
    • improvement of the human forces; people should once more become
  • Title: Lecture: The Etheric Being in the Physical Human Being
    Matching lines:
    • being expands and becomes a world. Man himself actually grows to
    • reality, now becomes an immense world, whereas the physical world
    • which surrounded us becomes a Being and we live within it. This
    • manner described and become part of the whole earthly organism,
    • that condition in which the earth becomes for us a Being to whom
    • so that our existence from birth to death becomes a whole, a
    • become man he had to pass through the evolutions of Saturn, Sun
    • lifeless character and becomes a living being.
    • body, become a flaming light, when we live in the spiritual
  • Title: Lecture: The Coming Experience of Christ
    Matching lines:
    • souls has become quite different from what it was before that time.
    • rapidly, especially in the last decades, ideas which have become
    • himself becomes comprehensible. There is no place for man in the
    • oppressive and dreadful will it gradually become. And the strength of
    • become unbearable, for it is associated with another feeling, a
    • something directly felt, and then it will become an oppressive
    • sides that the conception of the human being has become lost to
  • Title: Lecture: Spiritual Knowledge: A Way of Life
    Matching lines:
    • scientific fact. Knowledge has become severed from direct personal
    • become changed when we begin to have immediate experience of the
    • devotion to the world; but that thereby our life had become richer,
    • inwardly richer. We have become the world, and in so doing we begin
    • life, becomes a characteristic of one who is able to receive
    • beings become actual and objective; we begin to be familiar with
    • love another human being. And in so far as we become able to do this,
    • knowledge. Our knowledge has to become a loving knowledge, intimately
    • we recognise that when man devotes himself to moral truth, he becomes
    • himself up to error he becomes a cripple in soul and spirit.
    • And now this inner destiny becomes our outer destiny. For it is clear
    • life. The moral world becomes for us a reality.
    • It is a fact that very many people become able,
    • aright. Knowledge one has oneself produced many years ago becomes as
    • it, becomes united with his very being; but for the one who has
    • researcher severs itself from him and becomes objective; he is quite
    • as single personality. Knowledge of the spirit has become for us a
  • Title: Lecture: How Can the Destitution of Soul in Modern Times Be Overcome?
    Matching lines:
    • The significance of all this becomes clearer if we give
    • will become increasingly difficult to bring ourselves into a right
    • continue to spread and become more and more intensive. How hard it is
    • will become more and more difficult, because of the increasing need
    • This becomes clearer if we compare human beings with an animal
    • to become matters of general interest. This is a necessity for social
    • thing to bear in mind if we want the otherwise empty saying to become
    • unsuitable and will become ever more unsuitable for the growth of
    • become more and more necessary to exterminate Jesuitism, the enemy in
    • authority has become so great and so intensified that under its
    • are being built up which in their turn will become the basis of
    • understandable. But under the pressure of authority we shall become
    • and peculiar to it, does not qualify us to become experts in any
    • reason for this will become more and more plain to see. There are
    • Archangels and so forth. The world becomes peopled for us with real
    • Christ impulse will become our real link with the spiritual worlds
  • Title: Lecture: Modern and Ancient Spiritual Exercises
    Matching lines:
    • phases to become what may be described as modern man's consciousness of the
    • breathe in, hold the breath and exhale; this becomes a conscious process
    • rhythm, because as thinking becomes separated from the inner rhythm of
    • becomes free of the bodily functions, the moment it has torn itself away
    • exercise becomes mechanical because the strong energy, which is
    • because thinking, which has gradually become strong and alive, has found
    • made to overcome this pain of the soul, which becomes ever greater as one
    • becomes purely an inner soul path in which the body does not
  • Title: Lecture: The Meaning of Easter: St. Paul and the Christ Impulse
    Matching lines:
    • which is beyond the earth, man is to become free of the evolution of the
    • Christ Impulse, to become free of earthly conditions.
    • period of earthly evolution have become more and more veiled and hidden
    • which becomes intelligible to us only when with the help of spiritual
  • Title: Agriculture Course: Lecture 1
    Matching lines:
    • extent, with twining stems; they would all become like creepers. The
    • when plants become foodstuffs to a large extent — when they
    • evolve in such a way that the substances in them become foodstuffs
    • come into the Earth from Moon, Venus and Mercury and become effective
    • has become almost entirely thoughtless nowadays. They are only too
  • Title: Agriculture Course: Lecture 2
    Matching lines:
    • water and of the solid earthy element itself. They become still more
    • of their external life. Yet in this very process they become open to
    • Earth have the greatest longing to become crystalline, and the deeper
    • we go into the Earth, the more they have this longing to become
    • time when that which is under the surface of the Earth becomes
  • Title: Agriculture Course: Lecture 3
    Matching lines:
    • fast, having become solidified, mingled with other ingredients.
    • living enters into us we become faint. Even an ordinary hypertrophy
    • bearer of life — that is, of the ethereal. And it becomes the
    • our breathing it becomes alive again. Inside us it must be alive.
    • becomes living oxygen the moment it passes, from the atmosphere we
    • too it becomes living oxygen. Oxygen under the earth is not
    • again. Just as the oxygen does, so too the nitrogen becomes alive;
    • nay more it becomes sentient and sensitive inside the Earth. Strange
    • only becomes alive but sensitive inside the Earth; and this is
    • of the greatest importance for agriculture. Nitrogen becomes the
    • process thus: In all these structures, the Spiritual has become
    • outward, till it becomes of such a nature that it can be received out
    • around you. Such is the real process in meditation. All becomes
    • the revelations of nitrogen. He becomes more and more receptive to
    • which they can become independent: namely, on the one hand when the
    • seed-formation and makes them independent there, so that they become
    • plant into the animal or human kingdom, it must first become mobile
    • cravings. See how it all becomes organic and alive! Take the chalk or
    • fill itself at all costs; it wants to become quicklime that is, to
  • Title: Agriculture Course: Lecture 4
    Matching lines:
    • is only in the body that it becomes condensed. The body receives
    • living substance, is always on the way to become plant-integument. It
    • only does not go far enough in the process to become such plant-integument
    • to become inwardly alive — akin to the plant-nature. Now the same
    • aromatic scent! Then you become aware of the marvelous mutual aid prevailing
    • develop inner mobility; their body becomes inwardly quick and alive.
    • all that works organically in the nerves and senses. So it becomes a
    • — the entire content of the horn becomes inwardly alive. For the
  • Title: Agriculture Course: Lecture 5
    Matching lines:
    • through the manure may presently become inadequate — and this
    • the earth; we let it become permanently impoverished. We must then provide
    • of the plant organism which become rigid structure or framework in many
    • it from settling where it becomes a nuisance — it may become a
    • used, we shall make good again much that would otherwise become a ruthless
    • if I become a little local in my references at this moment. But I would
    • becomes inwardly sensitive — truly sensitive and sentient, we
    • products” which you obtain thereby become mere stomach-filling
    • wood or forest. That is what happens, once it has thus become inwardly
  • Title: Agriculture Course: Lecture 6
    Matching lines:
    • a being grows, it becomes larger. In this process the very same force
    • can thus become disinclined to receive the lunar influences. We can
    • Moon-influences in the soil can also become too strong. This can happen
    • the earth too strongly. The earth will become too much alive. Once more,
    • as a consequence, the seed (the upper part of the plant) becomes a kind
  • Title: Agriculture Course: Lecture 7
    Matching lines:
    • another — the one root winding round the other, until it all become
    • that the air and warmth may become mineral for the Bake of man and animal.
    • If you make the necessary effort, you can easily become esoteric in
    • become clair-sentient with respect to the sense of smell, especially
    • and the scent of trees. Then, in the former case you will become clair-sentient
    • You see, the farmer can easily become clair-sentient. Only in recent
    • The countryman, as I said, can become clair-sentient with regard to
    • life a little more, so that it becomes slightly more mineral. While,
    • the root in its turn will be influenced. The roots of the tree become
    • the other hand, what becomes poorer in ether, down below in the soil.
    • what I have now explained; here it becomes most evident. But the fast
    • is: What becomes very evident in the tree is present in a more delicate
    • tendency to become tree-like. In every plant, the root with its environment
    • to the rest of the root-world — that is, they become associated
    • it becomes too great. If the soil is tending to become too strongly
    • become wonderful regulators, safety-valves for the vitality
    • men have become so intellectual, so clever. When they were less intellectual,
    • in Nature, especially if we become clairvoyant in the way I explained.
    • Then we discover that the bird world becomes harmful if it
    • the inner kinship of the mammals to all that does not become
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Agriculture Course: Lecture 8
    Matching lines:
    • in the middle of the creature the metabolism becomes rhythmic —
    • system also becomes more rhythmic, and the two melt into one another.
    • first becomes weak. It can no longer feed the body because it is unable
    • process into the noble matter of the brain, there to become the basis
    • complicated — they become individual, in fact.
    • pursue the matter further. Suppose you wish the animal to become strong
    • you wish to become strong in this region? The milk-giving creatures
    • the sexual System, has become as nearly as possible akin — in
    • the way to become sexual secretion is met by the head-forces working
    • cow calves, the calf will become a good milk-cow.
    • will not become good labouring animals, nor milk-, nor fattening animals.
    • the plant-world, which does not care to become leaf and foliage, but
    • I spend the whole day with petty manipulations, I can never become a
    • true mystic. I can only become a true mystic if I am restful and quiet.
    • outer work. Then I shall be able to become a true mystic. Therefore
    • I will endeavour to arrange my food so that I may become a thorough-going
    • mystic.” Well, if you say that to yourself, you will become a
    • who is well on the inclined plane to mysticism of this kind becomes
    • physical constitution — he will make good progress, he will become
    • only afterwards become so “cranky” as to want to be a mystic.
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Significance of the Mass
    Matching lines:
    • following feeling: “Thou must again become like the
    • hast been astral and hast become physical. Thou must now
    • God, of the Logos Who had become Flesh in Christ; and then
  • Title: Lecture: The Universe
    Matching lines:
    • a very small measure, we cease to become human beings.
    • Although we are human beings, we become inwardly dust, so
    • become dust inwardly, we again fit ourselves into the
    • mineral world. We become, as it were, a body which has
    • nourishment and our not allowing it to become completely
    • He becomes a breeder of animals. This is the next stage.
    • Ten: A breeder of animals. Eleven: He becomes a farmer;
    • He becomes a trader. Later on you will see that I do not
    • pouring out water: Aquarius. And he becomes a trader
    • possibility to become symmetrical. But in regard to the
    • honest callings, and although they had already become more
    • hidden itself into the head which has become a sphere,
    • to obtain metabolic man with his limbs, seeking to become a
  • Title: Lecture: The Templars
    Matching lines:
    • being. It becomes objective — it is not merely within his own soul, but
    • become acquainted — and this is the case with everyone who truly sees
    • into the spiritual world — they had become acquainted with all the
    • had become familiar. In many an hour that was for them a sacred hour of their
    • the evolution of humanity. It had become a factor in history.
    • — he would never become free. Things are indeed so ordered in the
    • evolution of humanity in order that human beings may become not only good,
    • with the spiritual world have become so deep and intimate. For indeed, what
    • moving towards an ever richer life, and will have to become more and more
    • spiritual aspect, we all become old alike. If we die early, our physical body
    • becomes free when he is in a position to acquire these forces of the soul in
    • sources and beginning in the spirit. Man becomes free, when there is an
    • this way alone can souls become free, and it is only souls that can become
    • through the spiritual in us, it becomes something that can be shared by all,
  • Title: Paths to Knowledge of Higher Worlds
    Matching lines:
    • person who wishes to become a spiritual investigator, in the
    • clearly surveyed, so that the processes become, as it were, quite
    • complete willpower. A person who wishes to become a spiritual
    • and predispositions, we become able to suppress the whole tableau of
    • must become mobile and our thoughts must be inwardly connected with
    • know that we cannot immediately become familiar with this third kind
    • part of him which desires to become acquainted with these worlds
    • becomes absorbed by the physical form. But this fact does not deprive
    • become the spirit and soul of ordinary science dealing with the
  • Title: Errors in Spiritual Investigation
    Matching lines:
    • ordinary world with an abnormal soul life, his self-love becomes so
    • will surely fall. This must in a certain way become an experience in
    • One has already become so tranquil in one's soul, however, that
    • at a point at which it becomes necessary for the soul to recognize
    • not to be horrified by the horror, not to become anxious with the
    • People who become subject to this leaning become, rather than
    • crassly), those who see ghosts (Gespensterschauer); they become
    • of himself. He has become free of himself, however, only by feeling
    • occupy ourselves only with our own concepts, we become poorer and
    • poorer, our logic becomes ever poorer. Finally we find that we can no
    • it becomes clear immediately in the realm of spiritual training, that
    • things he cannot know about the physical world, he becomes flawed as
    • makes the necessary effort, can become a spiritual investigator, no
    • have tried to describe only sketchily today will become aware that
    • become aware that spiritual investigation not only satisfies an
  • Title: The Supersensible Being of Man and the Evolution of Mankind
    Matching lines:
    • self-discipline of the will I was speaking about: become actively
    • engaged in self-education and become at the same time independent of
    • ourselves but only when we are outwardly active and when we become
    • preparing the way for man's being to become conscious and inwardly
    • an understanding of it will become the general possession of mankind.
    • next. This knowledge of repeated earth lives cannot become a
    • have tried to describe. If you become aware of what is living deep
    • be that man's spirit will become mechanised, man's soul
    • that actually threatens us today. If men become addicted to this
  • Title: The Year as a Symbol of the Great Cosmic Year
    Matching lines:
    • twelve thousand years) becomes a symbol of the great New Year's Eve
    • cycle, can only be understood aright when it becomes for us a symbol
  • Title: On the Duty of Clear, Sound Thinking
    Matching lines:
    • thought has become quite unreliable. Therefore it becomes a
    • erudition. It has already become a question of force. Among those who
    • that they become Ahrimanic or Luciferic. Thus at the close of this
  • Title: Lecture: The Peoples of the Earth in the Light of Anthroposophy
    Matching lines:
    • that the metabolism becomes a kind of continuation of all that is
    • East. The inner essence of the Earth becomes articulate, as it were,
    • When he forms a concrete ideal of how he can become higher
    • European, become merely an ‘interpreter’ of the being of
    • for only then will he become fully man. Full and complete manhood is
    • where they can become feelings and pass over into
    • herself have become part of the very being of the oriental —
    • feel the need at least to become complete man — are aware of a
  • Title: Lecture: The Christmas Mystery, Novalis, the Seer
    Matching lines:
    • forever overcome death, becomes visible.
    • from the physical world. The God with whom man must become
    • whom he must become one.
    • become the God of the future.
    • a cosmic and an earthly Power, which can become a reality in
  • Title: Lecture: Some Characteristics of To-day
    Matching lines:
    • be intensified and clarified, must become perception which he
    • “astral bodies” have becomeempty. They are remarkably
    • Hence his “astral body” has gradually become empty. He
    • thinking and our whole feeling must become different, so that we
    • cultural life. The latter cannot become healthy unless fructified by
    • civilization that strives to become completely materialistic, though
    • should become conscious of our great responsibility and conscious,
    • lost in the last decades. What has our spiritual life become? An
    • history. One will only judge these things correctly when one becomes
    • who become convinced by this Spirit of the need for the new thinking,
  • Title: Lecture: Anthroposophy's Contribution to the Most Urgent Needs of Our Time
    Matching lines:
    • through Inspiration we become aware of a World Being which plays into
    • become clear to us that man bears in himself a real force, which is
    • destroyed. Man becomes inwardly creative, inwardly up-building. In
    • where the moral world itself becomes creative, where something arises
    • love, so that we can become men who act freely out of love springing
    • duty must sink down so that it becomes inclination, how inclination
    • must rise up so that the content of duty becomes congenial. Duty must
    • There, where this love has become spiritual, there it draws into
    • duty man can never be so spiritualized in his inmost being that he becomes
    • how this love of duty can become in the widest sense love for mankind
    • and therefore, as we will further consider, can become a true ferment
  • Title: Lecture: Buddha and Christ: The Sphere of the Bodhisattvas
    Matching lines:
    • the seeds of what will become part of mankind in future epochs are contained
    • gradually become able, from the twentieth century onwards, to
    • condition will become more and more pronounced in the future
    • human being can become immoral? It is because in his successive
    • the more immoral it tends to become. This fact is confirmed by a very
    • from the rank of Bodhisattva to that of Buddha, and to become a
    • become the successor of Buddha (Joshaphat is a phonetic variation of
    • Bodhisattva — who would eventually become a Buddha
    • Buddha will contain a magic power that will become moral
    • Individuality appeared and was to become a Teacher of humanity, signs
    • change in the personality becomes apparent at a certain point in his
    • of the Bodhisattva who will become the Maitreya Buddha have shown
    • he will become a Bodhisattva. Whenever the Bodhisattva becomes Buddha
    • years time, will become the Maitreya Buddha. It would be so much occult
    • years from now, will become the Maitreya Buddha. For the statement
  • Title: Lecture: Nervous Conditions in Our Time
    Matching lines:
    • ways: most easily in this way, that the person becomes what we might
    • becomes more and more enfeebled under such pursuits, precisely
    • so is to strengthen the ethereal body; thereby we become healthier
    • over the ethereal body. You thus become able, if need be, to
    • to do them in one way. One need not become a fanatical upholder of
    • life in such a way that illnesses will become less and less
    • oppressive; and they will become less oppressive if by such
  • Title: Lecture: The Position of Anthroposophy among the Sciences
    Matching lines:
    • of space; simply by making from it a kind of abstraction, now becomes
    • to sense perceptions, however, science has become really confused. In
    • must turn back at a certain point, and the fourth dimension becomes
    • become abstract; that one simply continues along the line of thought
    • space becomes filled with spirit, whereas three-dimensional space is
    • me for the first time, he asked: “How did you first become
  • Title: Lecture: Anthroposophy and the Visual Arts
    Matching lines:
    • course, if such intentions press on one's heart and soul, one becomes
    • beauty by means of plastic art, we must become aware that the beauty
    • soul-forces. One becomes a sculptor — really a sculptor —
    • sculptors were yet creative. One does not become a sculptor by
    • fledged artists; one becomes a sculptor by reaching back, with full
    • “imaginations” again. And if we become productive, it
    • “within”, we become able to create forms freely. We can
    • thoroughly scientific, while we, however, pass on to what becomes, of
    • artistically, we may go on asserting that it is illogical to become
    • respiration. What man, as a being of respiration, becomes in
    • becomes cosmic and creates something of a cosmic nature in its own
    • he take them into his thoughts. He becomes independent in face of
    • man becomes a free, individual being. In religious observance he offers
  • Title: Lecture: Evil and the Power of Thought
    Matching lines:
    • towards life becomes when he admits into his inner experience this
    • radiates into our inner being something which on the one hand becomes
    • decline can be transformed into forces of ascent only if he becomes
    • prevails, when we become aware once more of this human centre of
    • man's inner being. “Know thyself” has become a rightful
    • men become materialists — why would they admit only the
    • gradually spread throughout the West and will become a world culture.
    • men become aware that all economic activities and relations
  • Title: Lecture: The Seeds of Future Worlds
    Matching lines:
    • carried outside, it becomes evil and wrong. If it is kept within, it
    • these worlds. He must do so, if Christianity is again to become a
    • century. In the 19th and 20th centuries he has become incapable
    • becomes a philosophy and speaks with full justification of a
    • Father God and the Christ, the two ideas become confused and
    • them to find their way into ordinary consciousness; they must become
    • modern science will have to become permeated with conceptions
    • to become conscious of how into this evil, where matter is destroyed and
    • taking place within us in a natural way. We become aware of the
    • Imagination; but for his vision they become permeated with inward
    • receive life. They would together become the so-called flesh colour,
    • as to become alive. But when we turn to a corpse, this power to take
    • the Mystery of Golgotha. It will become clear to us how the very
    • closer circle, until the circle becomes the moon itself. Then it
    • split up and disperse; it becomes living, and spreads out life from
    • the cosmos. We must become aware of these two opposite activities in
  • Title: Lecture: Exoteric and Esoteric Christianity
    Matching lines:
    • becomes of the soul when the human being passes though
    • were to become an essential part of human evolution. Intellect,
    • become the Ruler of death and therewith also of the intellect,
    • Gods indeed allowed Ahriman to become part of earthly evolution
    • said that Theology has become ‘unchristian,’
    • so firmly by Paul before his vision at Damascus would have become
    • could become error among men, that truth had been turned by men
    • Christ on the Cross. Divine truth must therefore have become
    • error which, in its most extreme form, becomes the error
  • Title: Lecture: Realism and Nominalism
    Matching lines:
    • should become a lamb if it keeps on eating lamb's flesh.
    • civilization — signifies that humanity has become completely
    • the Christ becomes an independent being in the fulfillment of the
    • man. I become acquainted with the older and with the younger, each
    • Things become very
  • Title: Lecture: Spiritual Science, a Necessity for the Present Time
    Matching lines:
    • increase the soul's life of feeling, so that we become emancipated
    • St. Paul's words, “Not I, but Christ in me”, will become
    • becomes united with the cosmos: In ancient times, when people forgot
    • become more intensive. It calls for an understanding of spiritually
    • so-called dead; it is essential that mankind should become more and
    • heavy feelings. I have shown you what spiritual science may become if
  • Title: Lecture: Fundamentals of the Science of Initiation
    Matching lines:
    • that which was to become law. It was so that for centuries ahead that
    • which would later on become law was foretold prophetically.
    • is necessary to become acquainted with several things which appear
    • become acquainted with the natural science of to-day (I shall now
    • studies all this he may become a materialist, as far as his world
    • conception based on knowledge is concerned. Indeed, he will become a
    • quickly arrive at an opinion, they become materialists if they
    • he will certainly not become a materialist, but will undoubtedly
    • natural-scientific sphere, men become materialists only because
    • knowledge, will at least become idealists, and probably
    • to hear again and again how man's soul becomes mystical, if we
    • Those who observe natural science, natural research, become
    • may indeed send his son to the university, if he is to become a
    • you concentrate deeply, if your soul becomes quite mystical, you
  • Title: Lecture: Cosmogony, Freedom, Altruism
    Matching lines:
    • them. If they become merely an incentive to egoism, then they
    • karma become unethical — anti-ethical — ideas.
    • knowledge — then all knowledge ultimately becomes a
    • become in our age, insofar as it is not merely a utilitarian
    • Freedom has now become in many respects an empty phrase,
    • become permeated through and through with the way of thought
    • instance, among the Europeans. They were trying to become
    • in every part of it; they have become in their very essence a
    • humanity. We must become men of all the worlds, and act from
  • Title: Lecture: Brunetto Latini
    Matching lines:
    • as well. He becomes a University professor; so he has some
    • world, often goes hand-in-hand with what becomes the
    • experience the four temperaments. There it becomes clear to
    • and arid has become what is commonly known as the spiritual
  • Title: Lecture: The Shaping of the Human Form out of Cosmic and Earthly Forces
    Matching lines:
    • becomes different according to whether it comes from a
    • embryo destined to become the face, the human being will have
    • this process, continued inwardly, becomes metabolism. But
    • strength of the Earth by way of heart and soul becomes moral
    • Moon have by then become spiritual, and must be developed
    • can become head. We may therefore say : A man dies so that in
    • the spiritual world he can become able to bring to expression
    • future. This cannot be completed; he has to die and become
    • who take it in the right way it becomes as clearly evident as
    • then we become able to imprint the beauty of things on our
  • Title: Lecture: Yuletide and the Christmas Festival
    Matching lines:
    • become for many of those who want to be regarded in the great
    • become a festival of presents, a festival in which little
    • become aware at certain times of the connection with the
    • become inwardly quiescent during the time of approaching
    • withdraws into his own inner world in order to become aware
    • from it, has become more and more closely interwoven with
    • has become sinful is rooted in another Ego, a guiltless Ego.
    • this ideal can be felt by warm human hearts: ‘Become
    • what your Ego is before there is any concept of it! Become
    • had become little more than objects of study for learned
    • itself, in the way it is presented, has become utterly
    • could become for us a living experience. True, in a certain
    • can become aware of the breath of enchantment which filled
    • we cultivate in our anthroposophical centres become in the
  • Title: Lecture: Buddha
    Matching lines:
    • that man's sojourn on earth may become fruitful if earthly lives are
    • was enacted in the soul of the last Bodhisattva who was to become
    • that he who was to become Buddha passed through all these experiences
    • in a temple. Now I know that this body in which I have become Buddha,
    • earth has become a corpse — we too can say with Goethe: We
  • Title: Lecture: Hygiene - a Social Problem
    Matching lines:
    • has become abstract, so seldom grasping the social feelings and
    • observation becomes most clearly evident when we turn to a special
    • when he becomes a specialist in the ordinary sense. For the range of
    • become brain or nerve specialists, we should then still be able, in
    • And such insight becomes in
    • those who actually become doctors, have this attitude towards social
    • time before the moment when the defect becomes organically
    • when we really enter Spiritual Science, when it becomes concrete in
    • pressure of authority. The sphere of hygiene can become a
    • become in the real sense, and to a high degree, an affair of the
  • Title: Lecture: Speech and Song
    Matching lines:
    • back into pre-historic ages, the more does speech become recitative
    • speech in its present condition, where it has become very far
    • thinking system which takes hold of speech when speech becomes
    • for you yourself no longer sing. The World itself becomes cosmic
    • soul strikes into it, and lives in it, so that the sound becomes the
    • there it becomes filled with soul. Instead of being shaped and
    • musical element reveals ever more and more as it becomes filled with
    • becomes in him the plastic sculpture of the human frame, and the Soul
  • Title: Lecture: Three Epochs in the Religious Education of Man
    Matching lines:
    • this riddle he asked himself: “What becomes of me after death?
    • human body. The Christ has now become an “extract” of the
    • communion with Christ Himself. Christ, the Divine Being, becomes your
  • Title: Lecture: Concerning Electricity
    Matching lines:
    • to become sensory reality in the same way in which a plant's seed
    • becomes sensory reality, we would almost be looked upon as fools. And
    • of Nature, so that, later on, they take on real shape, become a real
    • extent the modern contemplation of Nature has unawares become a
  • Title: Lecture: The Problem of Jesus and Christ in Earlier Times
    Matching lines:
    • of Alexandria, where those who wished to become Christian teachers
    • preparation — humankind first needed to become acquainted with
    • allowed to become popular; it was kept entirely in the hands of the
    • become for many theologians. Among the most advanced theologians,
    • the Christ. Christ has become an unreal god, and Jesus an unreal man.
    • children, could actually become the one who assumed the position at
    • of what the ether body had become as a result of thinking, feeling,
    • that our ether body has become during earthly life — has become
    • more dry, more “woody,” than it would have become had the
    • point were one becomes a child, because if we look with the right
    • way and on the physical level, something that does not become
    • yet become involved in distinguishing nationality and so forth. We
    • become related as we gain the ability to understand how the Christ
    • we must again work to become the shepherds. Naturally, there are many
    • satisfied to come only once.This is a fact; yet, people can become
    • Christmastime, so that we may continue to become seeking shepherds,
  • Title: Lecture: On the Dimensions of Space
    Matching lines:
    • extended in space. Yet inasmuch as they become an experience in soul
    • hands or the crossing of the lines of vision we can thus become aware
    • and you become the plane in the middle. And when you are the central
    • become strange painters — for we must paint on to a line
    • Will. It has the constant tendency to become pressed together;
    • thereby it becomes a being of Feeling. First we see a cloud of light.
    • become a line. We must conceive this constant process — cloud,
    • Imagine the plane that becomes a line and then a plane again and then
    • in two successive moments. We must become alive and mobile-not by
    • merely because in the course of time he had to become an intellectual
  • Title: Lecture: What Has Geology to Say About the Origin of the World?
    Matching lines:
    • by this natural process have become thus entombed, and then, more or
    • sets of layers having become intermingled, overlaid, upturned,
    • surface, form mountains, and thus become visible. The tenets of
    • become attuned to higher contemplations of nature; and as the human
    • now become extinct and of whose existence as inhabitants of the earth
    • planetary body, becomes something totally different; as we go further
    • them to become “inwardly” aware of the spirit, inwardly
    • direction, so that what had formerly been covered by sea becomes dry
    • become what it is. We walk on this ground, divining – as in the
  • Title: Lecture: Thinking and Willing as Two Poles of the Human Soul-Life
    Matching lines:
    • these movements so that they become imbued with meaning. Thus there
    • become aware of these will forces when we pass through death and enter
    • become sheer automata if they do not accustom themselves to
    • that which becomes visible to us in the present. Imagine a meadow
    • owing to the fact that it has become part of us ourselves. This
    • immediately become clear to you if you consider without
    • doing we become aware of the past as it exists in the things present.
    • deeply into such pictures, then one's thinking itself becomes
    • I have just said becomes fraught with special significance when we
    • development of a higher knowledge to become possible.
    • have become very strong, and there is a danger that they will
    • European humanity, the humanity of present-day civilisation, has become
  • Title: Evolution/Aspect: Lecture 1: Introductory Lecture
    Matching lines:
    • who has become Buddha, no longer descends into physical life, can
    • nominated a successor to become Bodhisattva. This next Bodhisattva
  • Title: Evolution/Aspect: Lecture 2: The Inner Aspects of the Saturn-embodiment of the Earth
    Matching lines:
    • a vision to which we have to become accustomed. — And above all
    • Day-Book. It had become clear to Karl Rosenkrantz that this
    • light, it is quite devoid of sound, but we become acquainted with
    • sea of courage becomes a true objective reality for us.
    • be pictured in thought, becomes through clairvoyance, objective
    • courage. We become acquainted with beings who consist of courage, but
    • as far as this we become aware of a remarkable alteration in the
    • only notice that there are other Beings here at play when we become
    • actively radiant. In short, you then become clairvoyantly aware how
    • relationship between themselves; we become conscious of this.
    • And indeed we become conscious too that the Spirits of Will or
  • Title: Evolution/Aspect: Lecture 3: The Inner Aspect of the Sun-embodiment of the Earth
    Matching lines:
    • offer it in sacrifice on the altar of the universe; if this becomes a
    • of Wisdom who on the Sun were added to the beings with whom we become
    • might be told concerning the meaning of the Earth would become clear
  • Title: Evolution/Aspect: Lecture 4: The Inner Aspect of the Moon-embodiment of the Earth (Part 1)
    Matching lines:
    • this life, the more forceful shall we become as regards the activity
    • or air. Resignation as it has now become appears in external Maya as
    • possession of it, become independent of the Cherubim, self-reliant
    • become active within it. These beings are ‘they who remained
    • that substance. To make it possible for beings to become thus
    • they become our opponents!’
    • at a certain stage of evolution, we have just become acquainted,
    • Subconscious art has become a thing of the past. The art which
    • the picture becomes, how something like the liquefying of the dammed
    • up masses of cloud actually had to take place, and that this becomes
  • Title: Evolution/Aspect: Lecture 5: The Inner Aspect of the Moon-embodiment of the Earth (Part 2)
    Matching lines:
    • mood is different in degree. We only really become acquainted with
    • have no recollection of it, yet it works! It becomes active beneath
    • few grumblings and tears now becomes the suicide of a schoolboy! Thus
    • torment of it, how it drives a man into a state of mind which becomes
    • it becomes what is known to man hardly yet as ‘thoughts’
    • life people have become acquainted with all that can satisfy the
  • Title: Evolution/Aspect: Lecture 6: The Inner Aspect of the Earth-embodiment of the Earth
    Matching lines:
    • renunciation, in fact, to those virtues with which we can only become
    • been told should find an echo in himself. He wishes it to become its
    • sense. Suppose ice forms in a pond; the water then becomes solid. The
    • which during the earth-existence he must become real. In reality
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 1: The Driving Force Behind Europe's War
    Matching lines:
    • were drawn out and had become elastic, as if the things we
    • right. But let this justifiable pessimism become a challenge
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 2: Humanity's Struggle for Morality
    Matching lines:
    • an amoral character and has in many respects become downright
    • everything has merged into one and become mixed up in their
    • are asleep we look down on a body that has become mercurial
    • and salty. The fact that the body becomes mercurial has
    • it becomes salty — well, I think it is not at all
    • become moral. Human beings acquire morality by living here on
    • to see to it that our social life becomes truly moral.
    • evolution will not progress unless these truths become part
    • become automatons which they could influence like automatic
    • become so much more destructive. By the standards of those
    • the future and who would have become completely adapted to
    • minister and advance to become one of the leading figures.
    • in fact, become a Member of Parliament at the age of 27. He
    • soon rose further and has become a kind of axis of rotation
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 3: The Search for a Perfect World
    Matching lines:
    • extent that these illusions become powers that rule the
    • that it becomes a paradise; otherwise the whole world would
    • understanding of the world of the spirit. It must not become
    • created their own excitements. This has now become difficult.
    • hundred may well become opponents. That is a law; it is the
    • actually become opponents, there will be a reason for this,
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 4: The Elemental Spirits of Birth and Death
    Matching lines:
    • work of the gods had to become the work of human beings. This
    • will again become work to be done by humanity. We are only in
    • perfection becomes a weakness. Benevolence will after a time
    • become prejudicial behaviour. And however good the right may
    • Perfection becomes weakness, benevolence uncritical
    • to become used to the idea that progress in civilization will
    • have to live with the fact that a destructive element becomes
    • They did not actually become such beasts, but even so, the
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 5: Changes in Humanity's Spiritual Make-up
    Matching lines:
    • will no longer become part of the outer physical body to the
    • become substantial. And human nature has become more inward.
    • beings of the present time really and truly have become more
    • their own inner being. They do not become aware of their
    • our inner strength to become aware of the essential element
    • connection with the physical has become less close. This,
    • heads, for it has become inward. If there are thinkers
    • will help people become less clumsy about it. Just consider,
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 6: The New Spirituality
    Matching lines:
    • body condensed to become the rest of the human body, which of
    • if their bodies had not become sensuous flesh. It is entirely
    • manifestation of the Elohim has condensed to become
    • the human being has become the image of the gods in the very
    • become their lower nature. Please, do not forget that this is
    • it has become much more intimate. Human beings are always
    • association has become possible because in some ways the
    • world of sensory perception had not yet condensed and become
    • something that will become more and more necessary for
    • suddenly — as I said, by a miracle — becomes
    • history has become mere conventional fiction. Consider, it
    • however, but become part of a web of living thought. And when
    • are to become teachers. We still have a long way to go with
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 7: Working from Spiritual Reality
    Matching lines:
    • become for him? — It became a process which occurs
    • truths have to become known which are not welcome truths. Yet
    • have to become known.
    • enter into human beings or they will become unsure. The
    • clairvoyance has become something different today, it is
    • people through the embers in those days has now become more
    • through fire have been transformed and become more
    • muster what has become of you — up to a certain point
    • we can all see what has become of us — and then ask
    • not become a great man because his teacher had this
    • educate. In the immediate future this will become much less
    • expression; they have to become psychologists in a most
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 8: Abstraction and Reality
    Matching lines:
    • or four centuries, and the fact that as such it has become
    • again become creative and do so out of the spirit. This goes
    • reality become untrue. We must therefore break with the
    • become, is right for all nations, great and small; it creates
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 9: The Battle between Michael and 'The Dragon'
    Matching lines:
    • property, now they were transplanted to become personal
    • longer be sought. But the individuals who have become so tied
    • it has become necessary in the field of anthroposophical
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 10: The Influence of the Backward Angels
    Matching lines:
    • of people who have naturally come together and become
    • human intellect become extremely powerful if we do not want
    • your eyes become seeing eyes in the light of the inner
    • become really familiar with the thought that a great many
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 11: Recognizing the Inner Human Being
    Matching lines:
    • become more inward.
    • said that human soul nature will become more inward we must
    • current, which has now become an Earth current, can
    • including the Sun current which has become Earth current.
    • their outer life; it must become part of human civilization.
    • laws of nature which people need to know will become an
    • may become part of our inner feelings and will, and can set
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 12: The Spirits of Light and the Spirits of Darkness
    Matching lines:
    • have meant that people would have become spiritual very
    • also be torn away from the earth. The earth has become a
    • bound to the soil; the soul has to become independent. All
    • Europeans may become indianized when they go to America, but
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 13: The Fallen Spirits' Influence in the World
    Matching lines:
    • what it actually has become in people born after 1879.
    • believe. Our age may be materialistic and want to become even
    • become poets. Speaking of the time when they first began to
    • become the general human persuasion; people will not grow so
  • Title: Fall/Darkness: Lecture 14: Into the Future
    Matching lines:
    • people have become as clever as I have said. All this
    • complexity of human beings becomes apparent when you consider
    • they become journeymen, and finally masters.
    • become issues in education that people will come to
    • a book which has become famous. In his
    • function and become useless but still persist for some time;
    • have become atavistic and have lost their function. This is
  • Title: Lecture: Fall and Redemption
    Matching lines:
    • and our inability to look at the essential being of man thus becomes
    • wanted to say that this thinking can become the impulse for moral
    • can become really alive only if we can reverse the path that we
    • inwardly through the matter itself, one does not become proud. But
    • et cetera, we do not immediately become paragons of pride. This
    • out, become vegetarian, and proceed to do what their mother did.
    • this way the ideal whose reality can become conscious to the
    • becomes a force in our Society, then, even in people who wish us the
    • if the Anthroposophical Society wants to become a reality, we
  • Title: Lecture: Man's Fall and Redemption
    Matching lines:
    • force of thinking, which becomes active when a human being is born or
    • gradually becomes a habit. Think of the more recent evolution of
    • scientist, mankind has now become sleepy, and does not even
    • laws which has become universal beauty. This lies in the word
    • its heavenly meaning. In this way the idea of beauty becomes concrete.
    • matters is that we should become aware of the change in the content of
    • remember that the theoretical knowledge of to-day, which has become
    • scientific research must become permeated with spirituality. But this
    • first decay and become spiritual, in order to change into skull-bones
  • Title: Lecture: Calendar of the Soul
    Matching lines:
    • divine Being who would one day become the Spirit of the Earth. This
    • interests of our time will gain the day and Easter will become a
    • through which man becomes aware that he lives in the flow of Time,
    • to those mysterious connections through which human destiny can become
  • Title: Lecture: The Spirit in the Realm of Plants
    Matching lines:
    • cell,’ and so on. Finally it becomes necessary to tear oneself
    • spiritual investigator becomes aware that it is generally impossible
    • the depths of the earth are the plants that have become stone. If
    • analysis originated from the plant. The plant first had to become
    • condition it is a curious fact that the human being becomes
    • conscious that in sleep the soul becomes one with the universe and is
  • Title: On the Mysteries of Ancient and Modern Times: Lecture 1
    Matching lines:
    • where the accepted notion on these matters becomes very
    • have become magical manipulations, simply by virtue of the
    • too easily have become what is called ‘black
    • in reserve) they become mingled with Ahrimanic forces. And
    • Chemistry and the like; or else they must become truly
    • exists to-day. He who becomes acquainted with the life of the
  • Title: On the Mysteries of Ancient and Modern Times: Lecture 2
    Matching lines:
    • line belongs to the realm of those things which become
    • Thereby the Easter Festival becomes the symbol of cosmic
    • really become in the course of evolution, namely, the Church;
    • all-embracing Wisdom which becomes Teaching for mankind, and
    • fill us in our soul with active impulse. Thus it becomes the
    • social life. The Word itself becomes of social service, And
    • working with us, giving us that which becomes the guiding
    • develop the Christmas thoughts which will become the true
  • Title: On the Mysteries of Ancient and Modern Times: Lecture 3
    Matching lines:
    • super-sensible Man, has become materialistic; while on the
    • Man, has become unscientific, In our time the two are
    • become void of science. Any one who will, can see that it is
    • so. And, that the science of to-day has become void of
    • Natural Science, whenever it claims to become a
    • mere notification of facts, — becomes a science of mere
  • Title: Lecture: The World Development in the Light of Anthroposophy
    Matching lines:
    • by this separation man's inner world becomes his outer world, and
    • what we usually consider as his outer world becomes his inner
    • knowledge, which has become emancipated from the physical and
    • not change; they do not become less objective, for they are
    • comes out of the physical and etheric bodies becomes more
    • for many people, becomes immensely intensified when we thus
    • We can perceive, for instance, that the physical body becomes
    • Those who become
    • accordance with modern ideas: “But science must not become
    • universe to become an art, for we only learn to know reality by
    • transformed limbs which have become shriveled, as it were, and it
    • Anthroposophy thus becomes a moral-religious science.
  • Title: Lecture: The Supersensible in the Human Being and in the Universe
    Matching lines:
    • our life and existence. The times have become difficult. It
    • — so that it differs from that which becomes, in the child
    • what the human being becomes, to begin with, through his birth,
    • become a spiritual investigator at the present time, in keeping
    • to become a spiritual investigator, but certain people can become
    • books. But those who wish to become spiritual investigators at
    • the world in an exact manner, and the one who becomes an
    • strengthened and intensified in such a way that they become
    • become spiritual investigators, it is necessary to PRACTICE just
    • laboratory in order to become physicists, or those who practice
    • for years in an astronomical observatory in order to become
    • astronomers. Indeed, it is no easier to become a spiritual
    • investigator than it is to become a physicist or an astronomer.
    • in his world conception should become an astronomer, so it is not
    • necessary that everyone should become a spiritual investigator,
    • if spiritual investigation is to become an element of our
    • — the social life in common among men, which will become a
    • epochs, but in a way similar to that in which THOUGHT becomes an
    • the will in the manner explained, our whole body becomes —
    • passions and instincts, it becomes as pure as the transparent eye
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Anthroposophy
    Matching lines:
    • shall see how this is possible) becomes transformed and thus
    • our thought to a high degree, so that our way of thinking becomes
    • must become quite familiar with the conditions in which we
    • our thought to a high degree, so that our way of thinking becomes
    • must become quite familiar with the conditions in which we
    • observe carefully. Things must, so to speak, become enigmas and
    • thought to such an extent that it becomes a transformed memory.
    • the super-sensible worlds, must in a certain sphere become
    • wishes to become a spiritual investigator in the anthroposophical
    • earnestly strives to become an anthroposophical investigator
    • life, you must change, you must become different from what you
    • effects of the will, now become transformations within human
    • these become emancipated from the human organization, even as our
    • become an inner power which unites with the emancipated thinking.
    • the body as mere feeling and will, we ordinarily become
    • physical body which remained behind, become a reflecting
    • apparatus, where something becomes reflected soul-spiritually,
    • the soul becomes imprisoned by the body. The soul-spiritual world
    • encompassing sense organ. I might say that the body becomes one
  • Title: Lecture: East and West in the Light of the Christmas Idea
    Matching lines:
    • in the West we should look across to the East; we become more and
    • ever-growing measure to bear in mind that thought can become a
  • Title: Lecture: Man and Cosmos
    Matching lines:
    • which the earth, such as it is, would become transparent to sight
    • is concerned, the physical and etheric bodies become filled with
    • the Ego and the astral body become to a certain extent
    • becomes a sensory organ able to perceive the inside of the earth,
    • human being, may become free. This entails that he should
    • Anthroposophy with one's whole being, then one becomes a true
    • anthroposophical movement absolutely needs to become fruitful,
  • Title: Lecture: Human Freedom and Its Connection with the Mystery of Golgotha
    Matching lines:
    • is then the human being. What is concealed here on earth, becomes
    • before his soul in the form of concepts and become images —
    • religious faith which only lives in freedom, he becomes able to
  • Title: Lecture: Knowledge Pervaded with the Experience of Love
    Matching lines:
    • thoughts are absolutely correct and have become so perfect,
    • his own life; he himself must become alive. History cannot be
    • following question to the universe: Can Man become a God? And the
    • universe replied: God can become Man. This reply was given
    • becomes manifest in pure thought; as modern men we then no longer
    • Nature becomes an inwardly living comprehension. But there can be
    • it. They cloak it in all manner of other things and become quite
  • Title: Lecture: The End of the Dark Age
    Matching lines:
    • creature. He becomes hardened, as it were, within earthly
  • Title: Lecture: The Golden Legend and a German Christmas Play
    Matching lines:
    • We shall feel how much there is that can become strong and powerful
    • become quite different since the Mystery of Golgotha. In the
    • what the Earth has become through Lucifer's entering the Earth
    • through the Luciferic temptation has become different from what it
    • originally was, we then see everything that man has become through
    • I behold this knowledge it becomes in me something different from
    • what it would have been originally, it becomes something which I must
    • grow out of my Earth deeds which must become different. The tree
    • grows up, the tree which becomes the Cross of earth existence. It
    • becomes something to which man must acquire a new relation, for the
    • must become the stem of the Cross because man must unite himself anew
    • becomes an instrument capable of consciously grasping the Ego. A deep
    • here touch a certain mystery of Spiritual Science that will become
    • in the spiritual world. Man will have to become conscious of this,
    • and humanity can only become conscious of it because at a certain
    • the true Christian conception. This Christ-Thought becomes mighty in
    • us, it becomes something which must grow strong within us if the
    • have often done before — then this very same science becomes a
    • become the wood which is the Cross of humanity and which can only
    • become a blessing when on it is crucified and properly united with
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Christmas Thought and the Secret of the Ego
    Matching lines:
    • how strongly this thought is connected with what must become
    • this meaning holds good for the present as well. It will become clear
    • the earth has since then become united with the entire corporeality
    • of the earth. The earth has become something different since the
    • rather it becomes clear that the human being through all his activity,
    • itself the stamp of what the earth has become through the fact that
    • the tree that has become something different through the Luciferic
    • knowledge that has become muse by the fact that I have gained the
    • knowledge, however, it becomes something different for me, something
    • becomes something that I must change if the goal and task of the
    • something that must become different. The tree grows forth, the
    • tree that becomes the Cross of earthly existence, the tree that
    • becomes something to which the human being must gain a new
    • humanity that Adam has become since the temptation. The Tree of
    • Knowledge must become the trunk of the Cross, because the human being
    • spiritual science that will become more and more clear as time
    • (this is meant in a specific sense). Humanity ought to become
    • conscious of this fact. And humanity is only able to become
    • recorded by individual poets, but it did not become popular. The
    • Christ thought therefore becomes great and must gradually become
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Zarathustra
    Matching lines:
    • become a single current of culture. When we speak to-day of the
    • The eye had to become insensitive to physical colour, the ear to
    • becomes flatter and flatter. Draw the circle larger and larger, and
    • the arc eventually becomes a straight line; thereafter both lines
  • Title: Lecture: Hermes
    Matching lines:
    • understanding of such figures as Osiris and Isis become really
    • The active principle of thought has become the power of ideation in
  • Title: Lecture: On the Nature of Butterflies
    Matching lines:
    • becomes quite another kind of creature than it was as an egg. The egg
    • kind of caterpillar which, having become such, has the urge to reach the
    • alters the form of its blood vessels; they become quite different. It
    • becomes lung. Where gills once were, we now have lungs, spun there by
  • Title: Memory and Love
    Matching lines:
    • never become fully aware of ourselves. Hence in our experience between
    • what would become of your independence if in your thoughts you had
    • we become old because the forces holding us in connection with the
    • continually become less able to comprehend, to maintain, ourselves
    • within spiritual realms; this capacity becomes increasingly feeble. We
    • body. The feeling of loneliness finds a refuge in the body and becomes
    • during sleep becomes really clairvoyant, or when the clairvoyant soul
    • have been able to implant in ourselves through love becomes truly
    • has become a pale, almost abstract shadow. That is what our capacity for
    • for what is spiritual — then it takes on flesh and becomes weak.
    • spiritual breathing. Here on earth this breathing process becomes memory
    • elementary. The child has a certain memory, but it becomes an
    • become one with their fellows, who unfold love, can unite this unfolding
    • becomes art. And when the artistic is grasped in its spiritual nature in
  • Title: Lecture: The Experiences of Sleep and their Spiritual Background
    Matching lines:
    • mankind on Earth, the more evident does it become that man had a kind of
    • soul becomes altogether different from what it is in the life of
    • From being personal and human our life becomes cosmic during sleep. And
    • constitute our inner being. Thus during sleep man becomes in very truth
    • understanding of the human being is alone possible when we become
  • Title: Lecture: Reincarnation and Karma
    Matching lines:
    • in the opinion of this Apostle of Enlightenment has become
    • heard from the great Eastern Teachers cannot become
    • of which the lower can become the higher. We find, for example,
    • Kentucky become blind. We understand that dwelling in darkness
    • that his actions become part of a stream which flows from
    • the spiritual so that it may become the ruling power of your
  • Title: Lecture: Life and Death
    Matching lines:
    • in asking first of all: “What becomes of the oxygen,
    • become a more uncertain one.
    • matter. So lifeless matter now becomes in death the outer
    • becomes lifeless matter; but must seek the cause, the
    • above-mentioned truth also consists in its having become a
    • in relation to the life process. We can say that man becomes
    • For just think, if the muscles could really become fatigued,
    • animal or a man become tired? When their work is not
    • means of it consciousness, the organs concerned becomes
    • become fatigued.
    • what has become wooden, as it were, what it has itself formed
    • have become in our last life. We can, therefore, only build
    • life-process, of which we can become aware if we take the
    • that they become conceptions, as long as they only approach
    • become other than it is? Can we speak of an “Extension
    • We need not become fatalists on this account (a fatalist
    • become a reality for him. Thus we can give the reason to the
    • and spirit-life must lose its balance and he must become
  • Title: Lecture: The Elementary Kingdoms
    Matching lines:
    • becomes astrally clairvoyant, he is able to see the etheric
    • into steam it becomes Air. Occultism, here goes
    • still further, for it shows that the air may become still
    • more rarefied — may become thinner still. In this case,
    • how easily one may be tempted at times to become a
    • bones and muscles, it would become still more competition.
    • to explain the nature of these Beings who become active when
    • Only when man has become so earnest and purified, that he
    • not become for him a sacramental rite. Only then will he be
    • distinct height, should incite him so much the more to become
  • Title: Lecture: 'Goethe's Faust' from the Point of View of Spiritual Science
    Matching lines:
    • given to the man born blind through the operation. A man becomes
    • then it becomes self-evident and common knowledge of
    • will become the universal possession of humanity.
    • true knowledge of the facts of spiritual science will become
    • the University in Leipzig. He should have become a lawyer,
    • becomes aware of something that has been asleep — like
    • or feeling; something within me becomes active, compelling me to
    • Faust — in the first place to become occupied with
    • tried to find, but was then immature. Now he is to become
    • order to ally itself with them. Only then can it become
    • shall become alienated from this world — feel any
    • so that we may become freed from the egotism of the anxiety,
    • physical becomes attainment in the spiritual world.
    • Faust said “Erreichnis”. Here, the inadequate becomes
    • “inadequate” of the physical world becomes the
    • described, becomes there a living fact.
    • ever-manly in the cosmos, to become one with the
    • moment when the soul becomes united with the eternal
  • Title: Lecture: Birth of the Light
    Matching lines:
    • the cosmic Christ, we become aware how through the Mystery of
    • become entwined in it — a man who after the Mystery of
    • and every hour of the year compel us to become aware that we
    • had become of this feeling in Rome, at the time when the
    • Mystery of Golgotha took place? It had become the Saturnalia.
  • Title: Lecture: Galileo, Giordano Bruno, and Goethe
    Matching lines:
    • argumentative thought was to become dominant. Thus, Aristotle
    • Galileo, that great thinker, that it has become possible for
    • We see in this how the spirit of Giordano Bruno becomes fully
    • Goethe the mood of Giordano Bruno had become his own. It was
  • Title: Lecture: On the Occasion of Goethe's Birthday
    Matching lines:
    • events, is needful for us, in order that we may become human
    • human knowledge, as they now exist. It has become absolutely
    • all that has become known of late years regarding the
    • they cannot be spiritual powers, nor can they become active.
    • Goethe's, to show how necessary it is that we should become
  • Title: Lecture: The Errors of Spiritual Investigation
    Matching lines:
    • work disturbingly, he becomes all the more a capable
    • But without this, one cannot become a real spiritual
  • Title: Lecture: Factors of Karma, Deficiencies in Psychoanalysis
    Matching lines:
    • life — who has become a Cabinet Minister for instance,
    • office. Not until the end of his life does it become possible
    • becomes a military commander and conducts wars. But from
    • death when this life is at an end, and to become a potent force
    • characteristics become consolidated in the growing human being,
  • Title: Lecture: Matter Incidental to the Question of Destiny
    Matching lines:
    • therefore, how he became what he was. How did he become the
    • if I do undertake to become a theatrical Director, I shall
    • could become Director of the Theatre. But there was also the
    • certain matters, Truth must prevail when it becomes a
    • has gradually become lost to men. Think only of this: in the
  • Title: Lecture: Hereditary Impulses and Impulses from Previous Earth Lives
    Matching lines:
    • human being becomes ripe to bring descendants into life. The
    • age of fourteen to sixteen he becomes completely ripe for
    • become the mincemeat of Bourgeois nonentity. He felt this as a
    • of his own country, declares: England is on the way to become a
    • its noble ancestry and Christianity will become a modern
    • Eastern people have become their followers) — have
    • Such things should become impossible in future; and to
    • thought, the situation might become very dangerous even
  • Title: Lecture: The Relation of Man to the Hierarchies
    Matching lines:
    • all has become very slight indeed in modern time. The
    • emphasis of every one on his own God has become more and more
    • words by virtue of what the words have become through language.
    • evolution of mankind. The word has become more and more bereft
    • in practice. What has become so universal and has attained such
    • to be brought into man in order that he might become what he
    • was destined to become as earthly man. Through many hundreds of
    • Many things become apparent — I shall now again say
  • Title: Lecture: The Birth of Christ in the Human Soul
    Matching lines:
    • become trivial in the course of the centuries. And many a song
    • has as yet become very little aware of the fact that birth and
    • become as little children, ye shall not enter into the Kingdom
    • of Heaven.” “Except ye become as little
    • “Except ye become as little children, ye shall not enter
    • ye shall become as little children,” which we can
    • birth to death; that this ego becomes more and more powerful
    • that it becomes less and less manifest; and that what develops
    • humanity. Then will the Christmas conception become powerful
    • state of sleep the human being must become capable of
    • “Except ye become as little children ye shall not enter
    • does not become rooted in our souls in a moment,
    • to feel these thoughts so intensely that they shall become to
    • thoughts become intimately united with my soul, it is as if a
    • renders it impossible for thought to become sufficiently
    • For the Christ must become intimately related to us. Then
    • in our epoch, as this event becomes a light and a power in our
    • “Except ye become as little children, ye shall
  • Title: Lecture: The Mysteries (Die Geheimnisse)
    Matching lines:
    • time after they had become bishops and died their bones had
    • become transparent for him. The esoteric Christian felt that
    • he becomes aware that in this house not this or that religion
    • become the Head of the chosen Brotherhood. And thus he leads
    • level of the higher worlds must become at home in this
    • returning. But whoever has become familiar with the impulses
    • so that the earth itself becomes the bearer of the Christ-power,
    • festivals, which have long ago become something external to
    • some few at least in our environment we shall become
  • Title: Mission/Folk-Souls (1970): 1. Angels, Folk Spirits, Time Spirits: their part in the Evolution of Mankind.
    Matching lines:
    • body into Manas or Spirit Self, so that it becomes something
    • the human stage. Strange as this may seem, it will become perfectly
    • man becomes conscious in his astral body, i.e. outside his physical
  • Title: Mission/Folk-Souls (1970): 2. Normal and abnormal Archangels and Time Spirits.
    Matching lines:
    • life. It becomes virtually an empty phrase; in face of the stern
    • normally become Spirits of Personality during our Earth-existence,
  • Title: Mission/Folk-Souls (1970): 3. The inner Life of the Folk Spirits. Formation of the Races.
    Matching lines:
    • the human ego first becomes conscious.
    • the first time in the Intellectual Soul and only becomes fully
    • it becomes a part of his life.
    • supple, to be growing) and developing. In old age they become flaccid
    • transferred to this portion what have become the vital interests of
  • Title: Mission/Folk-Souls (1970): 4. The Evolution of Races and Civilization.
    Matching lines:
    • has become a more material being than he would otherwise have been.
    • would not have become Earth-bound to the extent that he is today. If
    • consequence man has become more dependent upon the Earth than he
    • would otherwise have been; he has become dependent on the locality
    • he becomes dependent upon the locality of his birth, he unites with
    • north, south, east or west. But because he has become dependent on
    • described, he becomes Earth-bound, he becomes closely associated
    • plains is different from that in the mountains. Man therefore becomes
    • He becomes wholly identified with his native soil through his close
    • relationships will become
    • the human organism so that man becomes dependent upon the soil of a
    • westward, the less productive civilization becomes. As civilization
    • civilization becomes externalized; it is no longer vitalized by the
    • becomes progressively more rigid and senile, and slowly declines.
  • Title: Mission/Folk-Souls (1970): 5. Manifestation of the Hierarchies in the Elements of Nature.
    Matching lines:
    • of human evolution. This, however, will only become apparent to us
    • become solidified. Waves of semi-fluid consistency were then thrown
    • could become our present Earth. If you refer to my books
    • mission. In this way the Trinity becomes a Quaternary: the latter
    • is such that the inmost being of man becomes the substance of Love
    • to become visible amongst those spiritual Beings weaving and surging
    • first to become visible on the astral plane, even before the normal
  • Title: Mission/Folk-Souls (1970): 6. The Five Root Races of Mankind.
    Matching lines:
    • Universe towards the centre of the Earth. Man does not become aware
    • as “man in the second third of his life” would become a
    • standpoint you will become aware of the five centres where the
    • become realized in a special manner; then Saturn withdrew into
  • Title: Mission/Folk-Souls (1970): 7. Advance of Folk Spirits to the Rank of Time Spirits.
    Matching lines:
    • Archai-being, a Spirit of Personality. After he had become a Time
    • its guiding Time Spirit in order that he might become the leader of
    • the guidance of many different Archangels in order to become
    • These potentialities will be able to become an important element in
  • Title: Mission/Folk-Souls (1970): 8. The Five Post-Atlantean Civilizations.
    Matching lines:
    • and Archangels on the human souls had become a matter of complete
    • course of his soul's evolution, he could become the guiding
    • the astral, his inner life becomes integrated, how the inner answers,
  • Title: Mission/Folk-Souls (1970): 9. Loki - Hodur and Baldur - Twilight of the Gods.
    Matching lines:
    • order to become merged in Brahma and to find Atman within oneself. In
    • to become a free and independent being, to be fired with enthusiasm
    • himself to become aware of the good powers which are present there:
    • step, has the perspective of man become limited to the picture of the
    • death of Baldur, had become true for the majority of men. There were,
    • again become visible, he owed to the fact that man felt his sojourn
  • Title: Mission/Folk-Souls (1970): 10. The Mission of Individual Peoples and Cultures in the Past, Present and Future.
    Matching lines:
    • establishment of parliamentary forms of government at once becomes
    • thus becomes totally different from the Western European conceptions
  • Title: Mission/Folk-Souls (1970): 11. Nerthus, Freyja and Gerda.
    Matching lines:
    • become a most valuable revelation for mankind. Everything that may
    • Spiritual Science should become a kind of basic attitude permeating
    • that it may become the common property of all mankind and may be
    • of Vidar, the Aesir who has been silent until now, he will become the
  • Title: Lecture: Wonders of the World: Lecture 1
    Matching lines:
    • become a ‘waste land’, the great, the overwhelming need
    • future — a future which has become our own present. He thus
    • place of this ancient clairvoyance another culture will become more
    • the human body, becomes purified, becomes spirit — as the
    • archetypal mother, out of whom what is born elementally becomes
    • course of human development have become what they are today. When
    • Demeter current and the Eros current, will in the future become more
  • Title: Lecture: Wonders of the World: Lecture 2
    Matching lines:
    • faculty of clairvoyance. And because this organism of ours has become
    • organisation of the human body, they had to become less active; man
    • had to be alienated from the direct influence of Demeter, to become
    • when it eliminates the Eros forces, as it does when it becomes older,
    • when it becomes shrivelled and wrinkled. This profound truth is
    • these three sheaths. These three have all become different in the
    • present day, we see that through having become denser it has come
    • particular have become quite different. In olden times what we call
    • of human nature, man in his inmost being has become subject, so far
    • we have astral bodies. But these thoughts and images become conscious
    • can become for us living feeling if we permeate ourselves with the
    • coming of the Christ Being, who will become ever better understood by
    • Science must prepare, so that the soul may become capable of
    • has only once appeared in a human body will become ever more
    • Thereby He will become a trusted friend of the human soul. Just as
    • must become ever higher, and that it would mean stagnation if in our
    • our own century, will become visible as an etheric Being to human
  • Title: Lecture: Wonders of the World: Lecture 3
    Matching lines:
    • when we become aware of the currents of air in the wind, then we no
    • become visible in an unobtrusive way even to physical eyes, should be
    • only slowly become convinced again — a truth which I will try
    • become active within, so outside us in the cosmos those forces are
    • become intellectual knowledge, but was elemental feeling, there arose
  • Title: Lecture: Wonders of the World: Lecture 4
    Matching lines:
    • such a remarkable way in the Mystery of Eleusis, will only become
    • spirituality with the greatest intensity could not become incarnated
    • astral spheres have become permeated through and through by Him. This
    • Anyone who becomes clairvoyant in the
    • dwelt upon the Earth that humanity will become mature enough to
    • the bodies of the gods has become star. Looking up into the starry
  • Title: Lecture: Wonders of the World: Lecture 5
    Matching lines:
    • acknowledge: ‘As I observe this soul, it becomes larger and
    • not become creators of the ego-consciousness. In this respect they
    • consciousness, which has now become subconscious, man looked outward
    • bodies, were to leave them, were to become outspread in the widths of
    • their respective bodies again ... what would become of this unity?
    • Humanity will only become able to understand this tremendous truth in
  • Title: Lecture: Wonders of the World: Lecture 6
    Matching lines:
    • was yesterday? Why does anything become, why does not
    • spiritual world, and has become a quite different being, a being
    • because he was to become the ego's first teacher.
    • skeletons such as men have today. The human body has become more
  • Title: Lecture: Wonders of the World: Lecture 7
    Matching lines:
    • everything of which one can become conscious through a deeper insight
    • become instructed as to what cognition really is. For the study of
    • mirror, that is where I am.’ He would soon become convinced
    • organisation. What becomes evident through the work of the brain is
    • this activity may become evident to the human being himself, in order
    • we see when as earthly men we become aware of what actually goes on
    • necessity a complex activity takes place in order that it can become
    • to become the reflecting apparatus for what the human being really
    • usually passes unnoticed. These challenges will have to become ruder
    • grow old in that life. Before we die we become old, and the forces
    • that we return to the world as little children, that we become
    • man has become young). This is an extremely significant expression!
    • relinquishing his normal consciousness no one can become a mystic. He
    • of the spiritual figure, so that in the physical world it becomes in
    • become, we find these two, Dionysos and the wise Silenus. These
    • the pupil of the wise Silenus, he who had himself become Socrates
  • Title: Lecture: Wonders of the World: Lecture 8
    Matching lines:
    • them full play, that he inevitably becomes impressed by the exoteric
    • which it feels as yet to be inadequate is bound to become ever
    • originating from the ether body has become since the time of Lemuria;
    • becomes visible in the solution, so in a higher sense something of
    • was once etheric and had become physical, is once more dissolved, is
    • again, again becomes visible.
    • becomes rarefied again in the heart, how in its finest
    • present day we have the reverse process. The blood becomes etherised,
    • lave the pineal gland, which becomes luminous and its movements as
    • occult development becomes aware of something peculiar about these
    • parts of heart and blood circulation. And we have become permeated
    • we become aware of it. We become aware that what we received from the
    • that it has become sullied by our own being.
    • not become so dense that we are confronted by it as a reality.)
    • still not mature enough to recognise this Being who had become part
  • Title: Lecture: Wonders of the World: Lecture 9
    Matching lines:
    • bull forces, so that they all become part of the original Phantom,
    • cannot become feather, because in the case of animals and men forces
    • one could say that every feather has the tendency to become a hair,
    • the feather from all sides; and every hair has the tendency to become
    • a feather, but does not become a feather because the forces which
    • become because it had been prepared for upon the Old Sun.
    • looks closely at these currents it becomes clear that they contain
    • is what is meant by the halo, that is what becomes visible to the
    • — we have become so corrupted by materialism that we ignore the
    • super-sensible knowledge. He suddenly becomes aware: ‘The
    • image; it must become more solid.’ Because we are all the time
    • Mystery Play comes to an end. He then becomes aware that what he has
  • Title: Lecture: Wonders of the World: Lecture 10
    Matching lines:
    • materialistic phase. And unless meanwhile man has become much more
    • has undergone many changes. Man has become very different. Far
    • to develop his present ego-consciousness. He has had to become
    • ego. To enable man to become strong as regards his ego-consciousness
    • for objective knowledge of the world our souls had to become weak,
    • into space the thinner our ideas become, and we find ourselves at
    • with the Goethean phrase, ‘to become one with the whole world,
    • to enlarge oneself to become a world’, then we must say:
    • but give way to them. Again and again we become gripped by a will of
    • observe it as it is in itself, and if this consciousness becomes
    • what they become as our modern form of consciousness permeated by the
    • we become emptier and emptier and more impoverished, and our
    • consciousness becomes finally completely dissipated, dispersed into
    • Impulse our consciousness becomes richer, fuller, the further we come
    • to an extent not today dreamt of, will become permeated by the Christ
    • ordeals have led us on, our souls then become purified, thoroughly
    • of the spirit will follow someday. What need have we to become
    • her first trial, then the trials become more and more severe, but the
  • Title: Lecture: The Mission of Raphael in the Light of Spiritual Science
    Matching lines:
    • spiritual history of man. On closer observation it becomes evident that
    • brightly and then disappears again, becomes a member of the whole spiritual
    • of the human soul were thereafter to become inward, to take
    • order that he might become conscious of the riddles of existence, but
    • of the world of sense, and it then becomes part of history itself.
    • in the midst of an age when Christendom had, as it were, become heathenized
    • before Greek culture could become visible in this particular form, and
    • had conceived of in forms only, has now become inward; we see the inner
    • life becomes our guide as we passed through the epochs of earthly existence.
    • a man for Raphael has become one of the basic elements in higher development
  • Title: Lecture: About Horses That Can Count and Calculate
    Matching lines:
    • the tens, etc. In this way a whole system of reckoning becomes inwardly
    • so, he becomes incorporated within the mathematical automaton of the
    • become aware so strongly of the way in which the mathematical automaton
  • Title: Lecture: The National Epics With Especial Attention to the Kalevala
    Matching lines:
    • epics of Homer, which have become the epics of Greece; of the legends
    • this national epic, the more clear does it become to us that we cannot
    • more remarkable do things become if we take in addition the Northern
    • increase till they become monstrous! And yet it is peculiar that while
    • become perfectly familiar with it.
    • use of intellect and reason. Man has become more independent by the
    • still be united, but which has withdrawn from man, which has become
    • consideration of the national epics becomes specially interesting when we
    • sense body, into that condition of perception whereby we become aware
    • of super-sensible facts. We become aware of two kinds of super-sensible
    • we become aware of the super-sensible when we begin to know that we no
    • body in a living, active manner. And then we become aware of the following:
    • We become aware that what
    • perceive how the etheric body becomes a special, individual, egotistical
    • a complete familiarity with the physical body has it become possible
    • could become human matter. Then again, they looked upon the third, upon
    • becomes the master-builder of the most varied forms, from the most imperfect
    • then Kalevala becomes very specially significant. Here we are led specially
    • against the interpretation in a material sense, of what man may become;
  • Title: Four Seasons/Archangels: Lecture I: The Michael Imagination
    Matching lines:
    • humanity, and these tests will become harder still. Many old forms of
    • earth. As they approach the earth, they become subject more and more
    • like a sensational novel but so that what it imparts becomes the
    • prepare our souls to become receptive to the activities that go on
    • away of nature in our own inner being. For if a man becomes more
    • beings, and he will become aware of what this really
    • seasons. It becomes a kind of combustion process. It is natural for
    • become world-dreamers, and in this condition they would be a prey to
    • say to himself: “You will become lord of this process, which
  • Title: Four Seasons/Archangels: Lecture II: The Christmas Imagination
    Matching lines:
    • become part of the being of the atmosphere.
    • that in deep winter it becomes really a cosmic body, expressing
    • say, were to become an anatomist and were to study a bone, it would
    • permeated with spirituality. In winter the Earth does indeed become
    • of this the Earth in mid-winter is enabled not only to become rigid
    • however, would become a
    • itself everything seeks to become spherical (dark red); in this upper
    • disintegrate it, so that everything might become a flat
    • become when she is beginning to develop a new human being? Originally
    • saying: The woman becomes Moon, just as the Earth — especially
    • just below its surface — becomes Moon when Christmas
    • it is not the Earth only which becomes
    • become Moon occurs again, in like manner, when a woman prepares
    • the Sun-influence on her becomes different, just as it is different
    • salt-activities, so strongly into herself, she becomes able to take
    • we can say schematically: The woman becomes Moon so that she can take
    • become for him a living picture.
    • world, the approach of autumn becomes the glorious Imagination of
    • force of earthly gravity can become
  • Title: Four Seasons/Archangels: Lecture III: The Easter Imagination
    Matching lines:
    • especially when March comes, the limestone becomes — we may say
    • but the remarkable thing is that it becomes full of eager desire. It
    • surely by now the Ahrimanic beings must have become clever enough to
    • able to become etheric beings, whereas they are now only astral
    • man in his whole organism would become more and more like the living
    • become more and more calcified. In this way he would transmute his
    • idea, would become a living Earth-being.
    • living limestone and thereby become gradually one with the
    • which tends always to loosen man from the Earth, and it has become an
    • him, so that he becomes a crude materialist, thinking and
    • the ear — this knowledge becomes the creative word that works
    • in this peculiar balance between the sulphur-element that becomes
    • astral and the limestone that becomes living, the forces we can
  • Title: Four Seasons/Archangels: Lecture IV: The St. John Imagination
    Matching lines:
    • becomes constantly more active, more satisfied inwardly, and
    • feeling for it, he becomes one with all that is growing and
    • seeking to become the living growth of the following year.
    • conscience, which at the present time has become uncommonly feeble.
    • foundation of active spiritual being. The Heights become Mysteries,
    • the Depths become Mysteries, and man himself becomes a Mystery within
  • Title: Four Seasons/Archangels: Lecture V: The Working Together of the Four Archangels
    Matching lines:
    • processes become different directly they enter into the human
    • not true. Whatever enters the human being becomes different
    • illuminating us so that we become possessors of human wisdom.
    • staff of Mercury which now in the airy heights has become
    • human nutrition, and there they become healing forces. Gabriel hands
    • on the nourishment to Raphael, and it then becomes a means of
    • human organism is interwoven with the secret of breathing, it becomes
    • on further there, they become not only a means of quenching hunger
    • become healing forces. Anyone who understands nutrition correctly,
    • these breathing forces rise into the head, the healing forces become
    • becomes the material foundation for the spiritual life of man.
    • head, it becomes the material bearer of the power of thought: Raphael
    • in man they become the forces of movement.
  • Title: Fifth Gospel (1950): Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • science which since the time of Copernicus has become an
    • contained in it. In other words, if Darwinian thought becomes
    • concepts that have become ingrained in us, to leave aside
  • Title: Fifth Gospel (1950): Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • pass into shadow, while the group-souls become radiant. All
    • eclipse. And the external event becomes a symbolic expression
    • lived through it all but only now did they become
    • as it has now become — we must feel ourselves as those in
  • Title: Fifth Gospel (1950): Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • power to become the spiritual guardian of his people, whose
    • activity of a single people. And just as one who was to become
    • experiences, so too, he who was to become a Sun-Hero must pass
    • Apostles. And the Apostles, in a certain respect, had become
    • be recognised that such a description becomes null and void in
    • the physical body of a man. What man becomes on earth reflects
    • unceasing pain becomes aware that the body is steadily
    • stage the Christ had become Man, had become human, had
    • same measure did the Christ become Man. The miraculous,
    • Christ Being had become so identical with the body of Jesus of
    • become Man, in the words: If thou art a God, come down from the
  • Title: Fifth Gospel (1950): Lecture IV
    Matching lines:
    • Nazareth had become one who gazed deeply into the mysteries of
    • knowledge that is wisdom, but had in a certain sense become an
    • fulfilled to the uttermost, men would all have to become
    • deeply into the soul — they become part of the soul's
  • Title: Fifth Gospel (1950): Lecture V
    Matching lines:
    • community of the Essenes and had there become acquainted with a
    • possible nor is it meet for all men to become Essenes. Hillel
    • she felt as if her very being had become one with his. And
    • what had become old and withered in humanity. He was
    • who had become, through Him, quite different from those
    • whether it was the ether-body that had become visible. Such was
    • individuals among the people when Jesus of Nazareth had become
    • had more and more to become one with it. And the longer His
    • of Jesus of Nazareth — which had itself become
  • Title: Lecture: The (Four) Great Virtues
    Matching lines:
    • it becomes particularly holy to us at such a moment as this. Through
    • can be said that these souls have become faithful fellow-workers with
    • at those who have become attached to our spiritual movement here, and
    • spiritual movement, of which we are to become part, has to bring a
    • Mystery wisdom has become so remote and so chaotic.
    • part. Hands are on the way to become what the brain is already. In
    • through more stages of evolution. The hands are on the way to become
    • similar to the brain, for the whole man is on the way to become a
    • skull which looks like a tree. When we have become wise, when we have
    • become wisdom, we find ourselves in fact under a ‘tree,’
    • how a man who has become especially wise stretches out the organs of
    • in German a good expression for a man who refuses to become wise. We
    • who seeks to become wise makes the effort to carry over the work
    • incarnations. The wiser we become, the more we bring over from
    • become wise, so that we leave barren the wisdom developed in earlier
    • through the old conditions of clairvoyance. Everyone could become
    • much wiser than he does become. No-one has the excuse that he could
    • from the past. To become wise means that one develops what has been
    • wisdom. These organs are on the way to alter, and will indeed become
    • we become wiser, we develop the organisation of the astral body and
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Tension Between East and West: Lecture 1: Natural Science
    Matching lines:
    • Under these conditions, what has become of human thinking? It
    • has actually become the servant, the mere tool of research.
    • into with the world. It has become a purely formal aid for
    • processes themselves. It thus becomes paradoxical to
    • become seriously involved with the research methods both
    • process of respiration. Ordinary respiration does not become
    • content itself becomes a matter of complete indifference, and
    • become conscious of an external world rhythm. If I may express
    • becomes a vitalized thinking. This is the significant
    • processes in the animal. Because our thought has now become a
    • example becomes for vital thinking an experience about total
    • transform all its other organs. Thought becomes vital simply
    • become different people; but we have done so by
    • aspect for your experience. That is, increasingly they become
    • complete spiritual being we have become.
  • Title: Tension Between East and West: Lecture 2: Psychology
    Matching lines:
    • the riddles of existence touch the human soul, they become not only
    • great problems in life, but life itself. They become the happiness
    • experience of happiness or sorrow he becomes fit or unfit for life.
    • question of the fate of his soul becomes for him a
    • plethora of phenomena and experiences. And these become
    • experiences obtrude so much that they become even conscious,
    • into our body; we inform our organs of will with it and become
    • world, and to become a capable being. Out of the
    • today, and by which I orientate myself in life and become a
    • then become clairvoyant powers in the sense in which I spoke
    • have previously called dead and abstract thinking, becomes
    • not become; for it could not provide us with a firmly
    • of his sickness of soul, at least, he becomes one with
    • existence. What is eternal and immortal in us becomes not only
    • When the soul becomes a spiritual organ in this way,
    • although one can become one up to a point — to be able to
  • Title: Tension Between East and West: Lecture 3: East and West in History
    Matching lines:
    • them; but they cannot possibly become memories for him in the
    • become memories.
    • experience inwardly on seeing our thoughts become
    • spiritual vision: It is complete, it has now become part of
    • situation in which we only become sufficiently attentive when
    • my lectures, other features will become apparent. Today, I
    • first become ripe. We cannot of our own volition do
    • inevitably becomes a part of us; we refine what we absorb with
    • language as part of our common heritage until it becomes a
    • equilibrium becomes increasingly unstable and the
    • towards living things. And as the equilibrium becomes more
    • with Aristotle — does thought become separated from
    • abilities. What you were to become as a scientist you achieved
    • self may become a sense-organ or spiritual organ; and we
    • Europe. But when we become at home in his mind and in what he
  • Title: Tension Between East and West: Lecture 4: Spiritual Geography
    Matching lines:
    • embodiment of universal spirituality; it becomes just as
    • experiences. From them, we retain thought-images, which become
    • have developed; the world about us becomes spiritual, just as
    • really are within us will become for us a replica in the
    • life I have outlined. This philosophy has become old and
    • actuality, the life of man's soul becomes an image of it. The
    • gradually becomes a mere image, to be recognized as a
    • element, becomes for us an impulse of freedom. It is a
    • meaning of the world had to become “ideology” for
    • that has become generally familiar today and that is also
    • who have become disciples of Buddha, have looked at the body
    • attitude must become. It is young, it must develop
  • Title: Tension Between East and West: Lecture 5: Cosmic Memory
    Matching lines:
    • soon as we become aware of the need to consider man as a
    • become active — that part of us which is beyond clear and
    • it can become capable of developing further and creating that
    • on our being as it becomes a living thing.
    • extent that the whole man becomes a kind of sense-organ, or
    • rather spirit-organ — becomes, that is, as transparent in
    • spiritual plane. Our entire being, soul and spirit, must become
    • become entirely valueless on that account. For the truth in
    • ourselves we shall become aware of the flow of heat and cold in
    • become aware of man down to the details of his temperature
    • what it acquires from the earth, this spiritual element becomes
    • operative in it. And we permeate what will become of the earth
    • pessimism that arise in face of the question: What is to become
    • self becomes world-memory and we learn world-knowledge.
  • Title: Tension Between East and West: Lecture 6: Individual and Society
    Matching lines:
    • does he become conscious of his freedom. To all mental
    • into areas where the instincts have become uncertain. We thus
    • have become more mature. Only now do we understand it and bring
    • These powers of cognition become conscious as man develops into
    • the spiritual organism or “sense-organ” he becomes
    • becomes a natural scientist, what he absorbs impels his spirit
    • and concepts only in order that they may become as vital within
    • become apparent to people when many of those who, only a
  • Title: Tension Between East and West: Lecture 7: The Individual Spirit and the Social Structure
    Matching lines:
    • certain autocracy becomes apparent, a system of administration
    • phenomenon that has become particularly important in very
    • Decadent as it has become in the East, everything that can
    • What they were actually asserting we again become capable of
    • become — in the Greek sense, it is true — wise men,
    • itself in social configurations. The priest gradually becomes
    • becomes the logos of the Occident; and from the
    • legal one becomes increasingly predominant.
    • this point, however, we become aware of something that must
    • element has become more independent; and that now, in the
    • history now co-exist. They have now become shuffled
    • remains a kind of dead thought. Anyone, however, who becomes
  • Title: Tension Between East and West: Lecture 8: The Problem (Asia-Europe)
    Matching lines:
    • individuals who could become leaders in the social sphere. Only
    • become available, simply through the temper of soul that
    • man and man, so that what the other man needs becomes part of
    • their own profession uninteresting. It may have become so,
    • of life becomes of interest. Whereas formerly what was
  • Title: Tension Between East and West: Lecture 9: Prospects of its Solution (Europe-America)
    Matching lines:
    • have become so clever, if I may so express it, that it is
    • become possible to discover man within the social order —
    • needs. Mankind has had to become resigned about
    • instincts and the like become spiritualized, and you feel
  • Title: Tension Between East and West: Lecture 10: From Monolithic to Threefold Unity
    Matching lines:
    • become conscious of the direction in which mankind is really
    • decades, we become aware that in fact the essentials of the
    • become increasingly apparent in recent decades. It is the
    • out of the depths of its being, to become more and more
    • them and becomes an empty form. And then they say: This empty
    • something that will have to become practical wisdom, that truly
    • becomes increasingly abstract. What mankind acquires in one
    • itself the germ of what are later to become forces of decline.
    • abstractness that has become increasingly apparent in
    • precisely when it becomes nationalized, it leads to the
    • When people realize this, they become social reformers and work
    • become aware that social life falls into three regions, shaped
    • something, but how it can become established in life. If a lot
    • spring from the meeting of men, otherwise it becomes
  • Title: Lecture: Pythic, Prophetic and Spiritual-Scientific Clairvoyance
    Matching lines:
    • thereby become aware you were following your nerve-paths, and the etheric
    • would experience this inner self-enjoyment. But man, as he has become,
    • bliss in people when they become clairvoyant in this way, that is when
    • has now fallen from him what was outside him on the old Moon has become
    • his physical body. The longing for one's physical body becomes ever
    • Perceptions become dim because desire for the physical body pervades
    • this life of desire becomes so strong during sleep, that man not merely
    • he becomes greedy to such an extent that he partially seizes on this
    • are members of our souls, so man must become, as it were, a thought,
    • now saying might become very definitely the subject of your further
    • one may perhaps become proud and haughty. When this is the case opinions
  • Title: Lecture: Pythic, Prophetic and Spiritual-Scientific Clairvoyance
    Matching lines:
    • and would thereby become aware that you were following your
    • he has become, may not have this enjoyment, and the secret of why
    • when they become clairvoyant in this way, that is, when they
    • outside him on the old Moon has become inward, as the circulation
    • physical body becomes ever greater and greater in the state of
    • cloud, the life of thought is dimmed. Perceptions become dim
    • desire becomes so strong during sleep that man not merely develops
    • becomes greedy to such an extent that he partially seizes on this
    • thoughts are members of our souls, so man must become, as it were,
    • very definitely become the subject of your further meditations, for
    • clairvoyance — because of this one may perhaps become proud and
  • Title: St. Augustine
    Matching lines:
    • “Death is suffering.” It becomes an axiom with the
    • age is has, however, become important, far more important than
    • life. Consciousness has become more important than life,
    • earthly development which has now become the most important
    • thing was to recognise the origin of Life, it has now become
    • simply a germ, will become a fruit which animates our next
    • a reality like the external world. We should never become free.
    • become external reality, like that of our environment, in our
    • incarnation, becomes a concrete reality in the next. We
    • becomes a believer in Theology (please, not a bearer, not a
    • the Soldier. The person who most easily becomes a believer in
    • the person who most easily becomes a believer in Positivistic
  • Title: The Social Question and Theosophy
    Matching lines:
    • immediately become clear for everyone, arise out of a mere idea
    • to think at all, and just as no one can become a mathematician
    • grave closes over us we will all be and become equal. What the
    • some influence. Then it becomes practical, then it is
    • being becomes what the environment makes of him, that
    • because he has become a proletarian worker, due to the
    • entire development of industry, he has also become one in his
    • conditions better and human beings will become better.
    • become? He invests his labor power into this work. In Greece,
    • way labor has become a commodity in the figure of the laborer.
    • Thus labor becomes anything but a burden. It becomes something
  • Title: Architectural Forms
    Matching lines:
    • have become for it an absolute necessity; they have become a
  • Title: Goethe's Secret Revelation: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • thought has become so important for a large part of our modern
    • therefore devours them and becomes, by thus taking the golden
    • become black and smaller. ‘Now it only looks like it,’
    • might become a fact. The hand will gradually dwindle and finally
    • reach the Beautiful Lily. She had become his Ideal. But her lovely
    • decides to sacrifice herself, the Youth becomes alive again, though
    • changes and becomes a small Temple inside the large one. And now
    • necessity of reason. Such a person becomes the slave either of the
    • physical senses in the contemplation of beauty — these become
    • the intermediaries. So art, life in beauty, becomes for Schiller a
    • become so fruitful through this method of his aspiration, that we
  • Title: Goethe's Secret Revelation: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • what is to become our knowledge is continually dependent on our
    • otherwise that which is objective would become clouded, and that
    • become objective. The man who has not yet developed in himself by
    • basis of knowledge (not the feeling as it is, but as it can become by
    • a man it becomes gradually clear that there are things deeper than
    • Green Snake? The Snake, after taking it, becomes internally luminous!
    • one direction or another, it becomes harmful. This abstraction leads
    • in what the Will-o'-the-Wisps represent. What they contain can become
    • another way, will become extremely fruitful in the human soul. When
    • through the rocks, are absorbed by the Snake which thereby becomes
    • would become an empty picture, killing all life, as the gold, thrown
    • soul, however, does not itself become capable of crossing into the
    • someone wished to cross; but now she will become a permanent bridge,
    • through with it, but surpass, transcend yourself. Let it become a
    • But such a saying can become a ladder leading to high stages of
    • recognize the spiritual behind everything. The physical becomes a
    • become accomplished fact. And that which one cannot describe, that
  • Title: Goethe's Secret Revelation: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • for a human life to become fruitful for the rest of humanity in a
    • more beautiful, harmonious way, or indeed to become fruitful in a
    • longing lying deep in his soul and inner life which had become
    • who to a certain degree, had become unshackled and who had a very
    • a world which had long become rooted within him. A world of which
    • And now Faust's personality becomes a being placed between two
    • world which drags him down. Faust becomes a being placed
    • significance and had become a living problem for poets, especially
    • the bench, and wishes to hear no more of Theology, as he has become
    • pictures, without even a guess of what they will become in the
    • become for the people of the North. In Italy he became particularly
    • did in Goethe. But those who become impatient and refuse to wait
  • Title: Goethe's Secret Revelation: Lecture IV
    Matching lines:
    • some meaning, becomes for Faust the expression of the fact that one
    • is transfigured in the night, as it at first becomes clairvoyant in
    • world, he loses his qualities, the ego becomes his
    • eludes him yet again. He has become capable of living in the
    • Faust has become a selfless man up to a point. He has
    • such things as Care become disturbing forces. Some things may
    • if man is far enough, and faces Care bravely, Care becomes a power
    • becomes deeper and even deeper, the more one grows into it, and
    • only then one learns what Goethe can become for humanity. One
    • learns to recognize what he will one day become, if Spiritual
    • such as the soul experiences when it becomes one with the world
  • Title: World History: Lecture I: Evolution of the Soul and of Memory
    Matching lines:
    • help us to become more intimately conscious of the nature and
    • For it cannot be denied that the present only becomes
    • fancies, and that man has only really become clever in the
    • Cosmic Universe; he had become one with the Cosmos. And this
    • earth, he had become one with it with his head. To-day he
  • Title: World History: Lecture II: Mysteries of 'Asia'
    Matching lines:
    • There below was this realm that for us has become the earthly
    • the language that has become current with us in
    • I cannot endure it. My consciousness will not become reflective
    • had already become decadent. The younger nation went out
    • lightning could become manifest.
  • Title: World History: Lecture III: Asiatic Mysteries of Ephesus, Gilgamesh and Eabani
    Matching lines:
    • him, penetrate him and become part of him. In that earlier age,
    • his soul and spirit and becomes — if I may put it so
    • have we become what we are? What share have we had in the
    • evolution of the Earth? We have become what we are through the
    • embodiments, saw approaching them, that which later has become
    • could become living Ideas in them, a far-spread vision, showing
    • later did it sink down into the soil and become what is known
  • Title: World History: Lecture IV: Atlantean Wisdom in the Mysteries of Hibernia, Gilgamish and Eabani at Ephesus, Logos Mysteries of Artemis at Ephesus
    Matching lines:
    • Mysteries was that the pupil should learn to become aware in
    • Cosmos, then he must become in his whole being a sense-organ,
  • Title: World History: Lecture V: Mysteries of the East, West, and of Ephesus
    Matching lines:
    • from himself this plant-world. Imagine that you were to become
    • becomes the plant-world separates off from man, the Earth
    • he had pushed it away from him, in order that he might become
    • become Man. To feel oneself one with the Macrocosm: this was an
    • for in the East generally the Mysteries had already become
    • establishing it in such a way that it could become fruitful for
    • transition and become Greek in character. For in Ephesus, man
  • Title: World History: Lecture VI: Mysteries of the Ancient Near East Enter Europe
    Matching lines:
    • become sub-human, he simply cannot maintain himself on the
    • this part into the head, and there becomes insight and
  • Title: World History: Lecture VII: The Fifteenth Century and the Transition from Mind-Soul to Spiritual-Soul
    Matching lines:
    • that is, into cosmic dust and thereby fitted to become exposed
    • through some circumstance become too strongly affected by the
    • will in consequence become diseased, for a certain harmony and
    • reverse may also happen. The etheric forces may become too
    • ceases to be albumen in any sense, becomes entirely mineral in
    • action; in the human organism they become different from what
    • moment you become ill. The external warmth, — not even a
    • only becomes the same again when I give it off in the form of
    • drink becomes in me living fluid and is no longer the inorganic
  • Title: World History: Lecture VIII: The Burning of the Ephesian Temple and the Goetheanum
    Matching lines:
    • ready to become the bearer of the renewal of spiritual life, in
  • Title: World History: Lecture IX: World History in the Light of Anthroposophy
    Matching lines:
    • this kind, one becomes attentive to the fact that something is
    • what a man has become through them in modern civilisation
    • incarnations, the Earth will become barbaric. Human beings will
    • individual who becomes a doctor to-day really longs for
    • passed the ruins during the Meeting will have become aware of
    • following thought will have become a reality to them: Spiritual
    • become aware of and avow your obedience to this voice from the
    • our thoughts to this work and become conscious of the
    • become for us a festival of consecration not only of a year's
    • In Christ, Death becomes Life.
    • That good may become
  • Title: Purpose of the Goetheanum and Anthroposophy
    Matching lines:
    • anything to become fixed in the minds of the public,
    • continue to use becomes stronger; in exactly the same way the
    • way, streams into thinking that has thus become active.
    • can really speak of a time-body, for a man becomes aware
    • terrific uproar, and we become quite deafened by it. We leave
    • the roar behind us, but the noise has already become somewhat
    • less, and the farther we go the quieter it becomes. If we
    • zero. This can even become less; it can become more silent than
    • soul becomes deeper than zero silence, if I may express it so.
    • we must first become accustomed, a language utterly different
    • that we gradually become accustomed to it by drawing upon our
    • silence of soul, and love which has become a force of
    • becomes art quite spontaneously. It fulfils what Goethe said
    • Golgotha. Quite certainly a man becomes religiously inclined
  • Title: Goethe, Comte and Bentham
    Matching lines:
    • could thus become conscious through his sleeping condition, he
    • and Astral body; and that he cannot become conscious that all the
    • becomes clear to us that in the 5th Post Atlantean epoch man
    • is something of which men would become aware, if he were intensely
    • to-day constitutes our ideals will become Nature in the next epoch.
    • given for the Ideals of modern humanity to become the external
    • Saint-Simon, because gradually Saint-Simon had become too mystical;
    • soil of this Ahrimanic Science; and yet they become mystics!
  • Title: Whitsuntide in the Course of the Year
    Matching lines:
    • more complete consciousness appear. We become conscious to
    • initiation we become conscious of what is all the time being
    • alive, and the more conscious we become the more do we insert
    • make winter within us if we wish to become conscious. Thus we
    • The moment the soul goes forth, the body becomes the world, a
    • physical world without destroying nature, so we cannot become
    • recede. But this will become clear to us, my dear friends,
    • hear that to become spiritual the trees must first decay,
    • anthroposophist must become conscious of this new thing.
    • was in olden times, what it must again become — a
  • Title: Meditation and Concentration
    Matching lines:
    • to become free in
    • experiences become tinged with colour and sound, for the
    • The colour will then become paler — and if we extend it
    • still further, the colour will become ever paler and paler,
    • yellow here (at the extremity,) it would become a strong,
    • opulent mid-day meal, and become clairvoyant, but clairvoyant
    • can become, and how one should hold oneself far removed from
    • connected with the results of head-clairvoyance. Man becomes
    • thought's own life. Each thought becomes a being. One thought
    • As soon as we develop body free thoughts, each thought becomes
    • becomes the stage for the activities of the higher
  • Title: Tree of Knowledge and the Christmas Tree
    Matching lines:
    • beings and objects. He then becomes a being shut up within
    • apathy: in this direction we become immoral. Thus we see that
    • shall gradually disappear and that man shall become
    • what man once possessed as instinctive wisdom may now become
    • the word truth, for as we have now become more
    • has everywhere become a quality of the age; it is impossible
    • Christ-impulse, has become the special virtue of the
    • will become feeling. Through the Mystery of Golgotha Christ
    • significant statement of love, and this statement must become
    • brother thou has done unto Me," will immediately become a
    • living element in anthroposophy will become life and
    • possess. This will become more and more general when man
    • to love. We have also seen that wisdom has become truth. To
    • human being and if we have this attitude, we shall become
    • more and more truthful. Truth will become something by which
    • super-sensible world becomes something towards which we
    • chance.” How could such a thought become more concrete
  • Title: Karma of Vocation: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • hands, as if playing mythological roles, become soul-endowed,
    • independent figures. They become Thumbling, Pointerling — I
    • become entangled in varied situations through which he
    • that period. Early on, he becomes a self-sustained personality,
    • this regard, he was able to become acquainted with men then in
    • universal nature. Earlier in Frankfurt he had become acquainted
    • himself completely therein. Then he becomes involved in another
    • South Germany, he becomes involved in the peasant uprising. All
    • cultured world surrounding Goethe. People had become bound, as
    • captured by his environment. We often become acquainted with
    • of logic. In neither is he free. He becomes free when he enjoys
    • the air pump and have become a famous professor.” He says quite
    • services for humanity and not have become such a debauched
  • Title: Karma of Vocation: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • would have become entirely different human beings if only small
    • course of his life, how he becomes an utterly different person
    • the capacity to become permeated with super-sensible concepts.
    • spiritually, it becomes possible for us to sense the profound
    • become something quite different in Goethe because the same
    • inheritance that they tried to prove he had become
    • necessary for us to sleep, we become weary. We are tired
    • personalities may become important for the life of every
  • Title: Karma of Vocation: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • that may become a profound riddle in the evolution of humanity.
    • Experiences become conceptions. Ordinary experiences become the
    • become the conceptions, the mental images, that Goethe poured
    • other people become, in a certain sense, dream-forms of life
    • their youth were trained like Schiller to become doctors had
    • special pleasure. But the nail becomes detached from its
  • Title: Karma of Vocation: Lecture IV
    Matching lines:
    • increasingly become different in the future. But a sort of
    • increasingly important it will become to conceive of it as a
    • have become more specialized and that not so many centuries ago
    • of the recent fifth post-Atlantean period have become
    • become specialists.
    • will soon become one of the weightiest of family problems;
    • according to which children must be allowed to become what
    • man himself; it becomes more objective. Through this
    • very fact that this life becomes detached from human interests,
    • degree. But they will have become elemental beings of the third
    • becomes the external sheath for elemental beings who thereby
    • connection. What we produce in our vocational life can become
    • increasingly become disengaged from man's emotional life and
    • vocational life must become something different from what it
    • church, have become the sheath and shell of culture; the days
    • and they will become less so the farther we advance into the
    • produces and brings into existence. This connection will become
    • national economic development will become such that to patent
    • from them can become a motor force. The truth is that through
    • also become more susceptible to what will emanate from, and be
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Karma of Vocation: Lecture V
    Matching lines:
    • mentioned, has become, let us say, a minister or councilor of
    • becomes a commander-in-chief and conducts wars, but in the
  • Title: Karma of Vocation: Lecture VI
    Matching lines:
    • with the theater and whoever was to become the director had to
    • say, become totally enmeshed with his individual being, if not
    • mistake when they become involved in such things. But it also
    • world symptomatically. This will become increasingly necessary;
  • Title: Karma of Vocation: Lecture VII
    Matching lines:
    • climate, nationality, etc. At that time, humans become mature,
    • the scientific point of view that they become fully mature
    • relationship to life. Since, however, human beings must become
    • come to light. It must become possible for a person to consider
    • development of the spirit of the time will become increasingly
    • important, and the human soul will have to become increasingly
    • life would become ever more the “pressed caviar” of bourgeois
    • Chinese entity in which men will become the “pressed caviar” of
    • become another China. These words were spoken in 1864!
    • Christianity had also become shallow, flattened out by
    • men of the East have also become their adherents — have taken
    • become acquainted with the course these people will adopt.
    • such things are to become impossible in the future, it is
    • become the “reincarnated John!” Certain sources would then have
    • there practiced, but in such a way that it should become
    • become mutually acquainted.” Her idea was that this is done
    • could have become effective, many things of which such
    • are concealed behind them. It is entirely wrong not to become
  • Title: Karma of Vocation: Lecture VIII
    Matching lines:
    • now is: What did each of them become? What course did their
    • become acquainted with the materialistic impulses dominating
    • world with open eyes. What will become of the world if the
    • evening I had become empty, void of feeling, and cruel, and I
    • we become ugly through everything that surrounds us — streets,
  • Title: Karma of Vocation: Lecture IX
    Matching lines:
    • human beings with those gods who are common to all has become
    • god has become most conspicuous. Humanity has been fragmented
    • deeply significant light. But our characterization must become
    • what they have become through language. Indeed, in words we
    • to become what he ought as an earthly human being. For many
    • become manifest when we learn rightly to read what is often
  • Title: Karma of Vocation: Lecture X
    Matching lines:
    • but since that time — everything has become quite different.
    • throughout the earth. It is thus that Christ becomes the One
    • when what is unholy service today becomes holy; that is,
    • when the symbolic sacrament of the altar will become the
    • becomes acquainted with everything: contemporary chemical
    • in London, and so forth. His hero becomes exposed to everything
    • will become apparent to you momentarily, should not be
  • Title: Mysteries of the Sun: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • is working anywhere nowadays it will become increasingly
    • allowing it to become known. Throughout the further course of
    • Christ-Mystery. By this, the Church has become an institution
    • Christ-Mystery. This is something that today must become ever
    • is true, is it not, that the world conception that has become
    • years of age, your head becomes so that out of itself nothing
  • Title: Mysteries of the Sun: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • in us as as extremity man will become head in our next
    • consciousness had become so strong that gradually this
    • through consciousness, that becomes more clairvoyant, what
    • becomes conscious during sleep. What today man has as waking
    • of consciousness have become more less veiled since the
    • becomes outer and the outer inner. Here you now have in your
  • Title: Mysteries of the Sun: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • of life could prevail — he would become aware of
    • become empty and in certain parts more than empty, that this
    • with the physical body and then they become free. Becoming
    • itself becomes hollowed out and the life of the spirit coming
    • future become more and more so, for us to perceive that these
    • arms and legs, hands and feet become the head of my next
    • become confused and hazy to people. Thus there has come to
    • longer. Everything now becomes quite abstract with the
    • shall see what it has now become. Today the scientist says as
    • himself a God because the concept of God had become
    • thoughts sink into a head such as Lenin's they become
    • what will become of human progress if a number of
  • Title: Threefold Order II: Lecture 1: Influence of the human will upon the course of economic life
    Matching lines:
    • see in the spiritual world will become thereby distorted,
    • mind with all sorts of nebulous notions, and becomes in the
    • Carl Marx's ‘Capital,’ — should have become
    • have become established, those people who care to take
    • came about through money having become what I might call an
    • to-day it has already become somewhat fabulous, when one
    • has become altogether divorced from realities; it has run into
    • consumption gradually becomes anarchic; it runs wild; and one
    • become eliminated which might acquire an unhealthy influence.
    • become all that is necessary to enable us fully to overcome
    • shell-making. Through such work the workers become
    • individual human being is tending more and more to become a
    • is, when one becomes altogether involved in abstractions:
    • economic life has become so abstractionised, the spiritual
    • independent parts, becomes a living, life-bearing unity,
  • Title: Threefold Order II: Lecture 2: On Propaganda of the Threefold Social Order
    Matching lines:
    • And therefore it has become necessary to-day to found
    • carried up into money; so that money, here, again becomes
    • become a road-sweeper! Well, of course it was only just an
  • Title: Reincarnation and Immortality: Lecture I: Free Will, Immortality
    Matching lines:
    • No one can become a scientist of spirit in the right way who is
    • something indefinite, can ever become a scientist of spirit.
    • we also become conscious of gradually following an inner
    • between imaginations and visions can, it is true, become a
    • his body, but he can never become a scientist of spirit. We are
    • the important factor, for by these means the soul becomes
    • pictures only to strengthen his ego that thereby becomes
    • The world of pictures becomes transparent, and the outer
    • happens when we go to sleep: our normal perceptions become
    • unclear and sink away, then we become unconscious. This sinking
    • great mistake to imagine that the scientist of spirit becomes a
    • achievements of modern science. But evolution has become a
    • forward, then stops and becomes retrogressive.
    • very odd — in using our minds, our heads become hungry.
    • sphere of pre-earthly existence. When does it become manifest?
    • — It becomes manifest when we are able to work out an
  • Title: Reincarnation and Immortality: Lecture II: The Historical Evolution of Humanity
    Matching lines:
    • sorts of differences but in which it would become
    • personality, that becomes the decisive factor. This lasts until
    • which a higher kind of understanding becomes particularly
    • become clear in further lectures. For the moment I would only
    • decay. We find the part of life that becomes dead in historical
    • then learn to see history as it really is, we become aware of
    • paradoxical it may sound this will become a most
    • began to be significant, to become intellectual. History really
    • but it can only become truly spiritually enlightened knowledge
    • everything through the consciousness, now becomes typical for
    • experience of the body, becomes younger. This means that it
  • Title: Reincarnation and Immortality: Lecture III: The Supersensible Being of Man
    Matching lines:
    • doubts become of finding in it a gateway into the world
    • where the real being of man is. In fact, at last we become
    • particular way so it becomes quite a different power in the
    • undertaken in order that the thinking becomes a different power
    • it were, outside itself and become this new power in the soul.
    • using our ordinary thinking we do not become conscious of the
    • become apparent as we proceed. What we notice is what has
    • of thinking that becomes memory.
    • become more skilled, our hands become more alive so that we not
    • whole mood of our soul life has become different under the
    • what it has thought, we very soon become aware how our own
    • these exercises. It really becomes quite a different power in
    • on life, to become active, our inner logic, the inner
    • consciousness, can become inwardly alive; in the same way an
    • ordinary lives or we would become quite useless or even worse,
    • spirit-soul consciousness. We become aware of a second person
    • here. We really do become aware that we carry a second person
    • follows: In our spirit-soul experience we become aware of what
    • pain, for we now become aware of what normally cannot be
    • when we have begun to become scientists of spirit. We
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Reincarnation and Immortality: Lecture IV: Nature of Anthroposophy
    Matching lines:
    • use of the senses and at once becomes empty, vague and
    • contact with external things; we only become conscious because
    • research works in a direction through which it can become fully
    • which he becomes susceptible to suggestion, the powers of his
    • from hallucinations and visions becomes more dependent upon his
    • misunderstanding. If a man becomes subject to
    • hallucinations and visions, or if he becomes open to
    • concentration, one becomes able to say at a certain point of
    • mathematician making his calculations, one gradually becomes
    • becomes difficult to detach oneself from the object of this
    • which has great importance for further research. One becomes
    • What is meant by this can become clear when we consider
    • weakened. Under such conditions a man's consciousness becomes
    • of will of another personality. One must become in a sense the
    • of the will are continued; in a sense it becomes transparent.
    • becomes transparent, as through the transparent, vitreous body
    • its further development it becomes such a means. This is the
    • which has become independent of the physical body.
    • spiritual world, become real results of knowledge. And this
    • that has been described. The whole of nature then becomes
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Reincarnation and Immortality: Lecture V: Mystery of the Human Being
    Matching lines:
    • it becomes quite clear that however far we are able to go by
    • world becomes no more explicable than it already is to
    • Naegeli, had to say. He expressed his view, which has become
    • perceptive consciousness, where he becomes a part of a real,
    • conviction that becomes more compelling as one immerses one's
    • people and will become a common conviction with all the
    • this clear and obvious, that this will become more and more the
    • with our will become a part of the outer world. It is what
    • will have to become a basic conviction of a future outlook and
    • will indeed become so, because it is bound to follow from a
    • become any different from anyone else. But if he is to receive
    • consciousness has been completely brought to rest and becomes
    • like a calm sea. They should then become active in the life of
    • expectancy that we bring about at the right moment. We become
    • becomes something from which there springs something out of the
    • science that today has to become a reality.
    • spirit that has now to become a reality through this present
    • various exercises that are described, and it becomes
    • — It becomes a real fact for the first time with the
    • in quite a different way. And, as I have said, we become able
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Eurhythmy (Introduction to a performance)
    Matching lines:
    • will become ever more and more perfect, and will one day take
  • Title: Differentation of Primeval Wisdom into East, Middle, West
    Matching lines:
    • external knowledge, their external cognition, will become
    • how did it become ever more and more differentiated? We must
    • permeates the world, the East will gradually become
    • great contrast, of which humanity should become aware,
    • (Königsbergerise) it, and it then becomes Kantian. That
    • becomes Aesthetic in Goethe, on his Italian journey, in the
  • Title: The Real Being of Man
    Matching lines:
    • birth and death we may become too allied to the Earth; we
    • impulse to become too much related to the earthly powers,
    • develop too strongly the impulse to become too closely
    • wait for a later age to become that which they were intended
    • to become, they could not wait for the development of what
    • down in the world, and thus become something which here on
    • become foreign to our Earthly existence. We are now
    • understand that what is finally to become of our Earth is not
    • concerning what the Earth is to become, when we know the
    • individualized. It may thus become a common being, an
    • becomes too strong, we become too closely related to physical
    • humanity. But it is absolutely possible for man to become so
    • become — no longer one great organism with unified common
    • of the human beings. The Earth will become that which man
    • become the inclination of humanity.
    • decision — either to become Spiritual
    • is the dissolution in Nirvana, which has already become a
    • Cosmosophy. Now through his Cosmology man would become
    • Luciferic, through Geology he would become Ahrimanic, unless
    • to become Luciferic. Man must attain this equilibrium, and he
  • Title: Necessity for Spiritual Knowledge: Lecture 1
    Matching lines:
    • this poor science of the world but to become material,
    • easily becomes atheism, this necessary waiting of the
    • interest in him. He therefore easily becomes an enemy of
    • has become necessary through the development of modern
    • becomes Christian because in every third line Christ's name
    • need not immediately become lacking in human feeling if this
  • Title: Necessity for Spiritual Knowledge: Lecture 1 (alternate translation)
    Matching lines:
    • of human evolution wherein man has become a different being
    • this reason too he so easily becomes an opponent of all
    • in man. Hence it must become possible for us to confront the
    • Lutheran view of Christ has no reality nowadays and becomes
    • since the last third of the 19th century, it has become
    • it becomes his deepest concern.
  • Title: Necessity for Spiritual Knowledge: Lecture 2
    Matching lines:
    • continual dying and coming to birth becomes objective to us,
    • found midway between these two poles. Everything becomes more
    • then cosmic space becomes a very different thing to the
    • Kepler, and Newton. It becomes something that is inwardly
    • and becomes aware of the fact that physical space is only an
    • people at our Universities and High Schools become what they
    • pedagogy it is possible to become a good teacher. Now even in
    • influenced by their environment. Then the child becomes an
    • adult; the concepts become more abstract, the experiences
    • little talent, to become at that age, a Feuilletonist.
    • or to become a town councilor! They are supposed to be
  • Title: Man and Nature: Intellect in Man and Nature Bereft of the Gods
    Matching lines:
    • these become abstract and shadowy. This has been the tendency
    • have experiences that have become a mere series of pictures.
    • inevitable consequence is that this destiny itself becomes
    • the Human-Divine principle now within his being will become
    • only become concrete and real when we receive the impulse of
    • choice — a choice which has become a matter of greater
    • become illusions, and these illusions are distorted into all
    • become aware is similar to ‘having weight,’ and
    • People have become blind and deaf to these things. Man is
  • Title: The Physical-Superphysical: Its Realisation Through Art
    Matching lines:
    • reveal, through art, the super-physical,. But it becomes very
    • become true art. And it can well be said that it reflects a
    • become vision. We offer the soul, as it were from outside,
    • it becomes artistic perception.
    • upon us so that it becomes head, we get something in
    • become a whole but has not become so in nature herself.
    • become reconciled. It becomes necessary to atone artistically
    • human form becomes powerful — as indeed it is in life
    • soul of Raphael had become entirely
    • of art becomes a secret — a secret which is then
    • conceals within it what is striving to become like fire,
    • at one time becomes small inwardly, at another big, a form
    • would become actual vision, but is not permitted to do so in
    • in its inherent element becomes its own content and form,
    • often takes place a quite secret process when we become aware
    • spiritual science is purified till it becomes
    • that the inner becomes in us the outer. In Intuition we go
    • how each part of nature is striving beyond itself to become a
    • whole, through metamorphosis to become something different;
  • Title: The Sources of Artistic Imagination and the Sources of Supersensible Knowledge
    Matching lines:
    • standpoint of super-sensible knowledge, becomes a domain
    • consciousness; the seer feels as though he has become one
    • which a man becomes aware of another Ego, the Ego of another
    • who say that a man becomes aware of another Ego or soul only
    • we have become accustomed, when we see a bodily structure
    • colouring in the human dissolve, as it were become
    • than ordinary reddening — which becomes outstreaming
    • degeneration takes place when, in prose, speech becomes
    • that in present as our body. The body becomes something new,
    • these matters, but they will, in time, become the subject of
    • was to become conscious of the ebb and flow of the breathing
    • arrived when men must become more and more conscious, freer
  • Title: Lecture: Human Knowledge and Its Significance for Man and the Cosmos
    Matching lines:
    • become intelligible to us.
    • of the head, will become the head of the next incarnation, after we
    • body transformed in such a way that they can become a head in the next
    • next incarnation. This is the remarkable connection which becomes clear
    • the Gods, must, as it were, become an act of divine worship. All the
    • can become the means of nourishing higher Spiritual Beings. Our concepts
    • become food for these higher Spiritual Beings. In other words, we must
  • Title: Anthroposophical Ethics ... St. Francis, Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • beings and objects. He then becomes a being shut up within
    • apathy: in this direction we become immoral. Thus we see that
    • shall gradually disappear and that man shall become
    • what man once possessed as instinctive wisdom may now become
    • the word truth, for as we have now become more
    • has everywhere become a quality of the age; it is impossible
    • Christ-impulse, has become the special virtue of the
    • will become feeling. Through the Mystery of Golgotha Christ
    • significant statement of love, and this statement must become
    • brother thou has done unto Me," will immediately become a
    • living element in anthroposophy will become life and
    • possess. This will become more and more general when man
    • to love. We have also seen that wisdom has become truth. To
    • human being and if we have this attitude, we shall become
    • more and more truthful. Truth will become something by which
    • super-sensible world becomes something towards which we
    • chance.” How could such a thought become more concrete
  • Title: Teachings of Christ the Resurrected
    Matching lines:
    • feeling had already become so vital that they felt the life
    • aside many of the concepts which today have simply become
    • Much of the Mystery of Golgotha has become known to human
    • gradually become so dense, the death forces in it have become
    • to become fully acquainted with all that relates to
  • Title: Christianity in the Evolutionary Course of Modern Mankind
    Matching lines:
    • beginning as elementary truths becomes modified — we
    • various phenomena of our existence will already have become clearer,
    • What we have just been discussing becomes
    • feelings and for all that he did, — that fact becomes
    • phenomena of that time will become luminous and clear to you,
    • What has become of scholasticism, if we consider it, not as to
    • times the Christ and Christianity must become the perspective
    • prepared itself for what it is to become. In the early
    • since the ego can in any case become egotistic — but
    • Christianity has become Ego. As it is true that this
  • Title: Eternal Soul of Man in the Light of Anthroposophy
    Matching lines:
    • continue to develop himself when he becomes an adult. Now it
    • this brain gradually becomes, and so on.
    • become acquainted with this deprivation, in which there occurs,
    • physical-sensory world. Then this love itself gradually becomes
    • can really only know when love becomes the power of knowledge.
    • because the entire human being must to a certain extent become
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture I: The Significance of Supersensible Knowledge Today
    Matching lines:
    • of spiritual investigation will become apparent. These
    • fallow, they become burning questions weighing on the human
    • same fundamental truth. From these lectures it will become
    • them. Far from wanting to become another religion, spiritual
    • also become understandable. The true value of the ancient
    • of evidence of that today, and it will become even more
    • fully justified, as anyone will acknowledge who becomes
    • from the ways and customs that over the centuries have become
    • supersensible realm so that they become effective in the
    • arrangements will give way to new ones and people will become
    • such conferences it becomes apparent that modern physical
    • forms, while the old forms that have become influenced by
    • spiritual sight will gradually become aware of things that
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture II: Blood is a Very Special Fluid
    Matching lines:
    • question. These are all problems that become understandable
    • category. This problem has become even more pressing since
    • people to assimilate a strange culture? Can a savage become
    • development does formation of blood and blood vessels become
    • stage becomes a developed nervous system.
    • becomes a microcosm that dimly senses within itself the whole
    • become individualized, so will the human being's first
    • is, the physical body, become individualized. In present day
    • the astral body the outer world is reflected and becomes
    • world becomes inner world, so does this inner world become
    • outer world of concrete forms. This becomes clearer if we
    • deeper consciousness becomes submerged. Then, in a dreamlike
    • and Truth become part of a person's blood does he truly
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture III: The Origin of Suffering
    Matching lines:
    • himself, allowing his soul to become ever more encompassing.
    • ice. As ice can become water once more, so can spirit emerge
    • matter, has become solidified. Thus, we see that the astral
    • apart, it continually holds them together. Thus, life becomes
    • that dies outwardly cannot become conscious. Consciousness
    • connection is recognized, the existence of pain becomes
    • recognized, many things become comprehensible, for example,
    • do you become aware of your inner organs? You go through life
    • of enjoyment because it becomes transformed into something
    • back to the point where suffering evolves and becomes
    • is to become capable of higher perception, then thinking,
    • external compulsion. He becomes separated into human beings
    • becomes richer, more satisfying, when we can widen it so that
    • become able to attain a higher life. There will then, out of
    • becomes a source of healing. Thus, sin can eventually
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture IV: The Origin of Evil
    Matching lines:
    • soul to become free of the senses; something occurs in an
    • task once the soul becomes free of the body? Here we touch on
    • higher stage of evolution, they become the leaders and guides
    • themselves passed through. When a person has become
    • long ages to become as perfect and as wise as the physical
    • with the result that what should remain impersonal becomes
    • Lucifer, human self-consciousness would never have become
    • have become reality without Lucifer, but not freedom. In
    • self-love has developed and widened to become love of all,
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture VI: Education in the Light of Spiritual Science
    Matching lines:
    • the astral body. Like the ether body, it becomes visible when
    • maternal organism, from which they become independent only
    • birth. That means that the ether body is born and becomes
    • the ether body before it has become completely independent.
    • person it becomes the bearer of his enduring traits such as
    • indicate when it becomes right to exert influence on the
    • child's bodily faculties develop; they become independent and
    • physical body has become free to interact with the external
    • becomes free, as did the physical body at physical birth. Now
    • become forces of strength in later life. It is immensely
    • becomes independent. With the awakening feelings for the
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture V: Illness and Death
    Matching lines:
    • things attain a permanent character, they become a feature of
    • body is to become free so that it can emerge and participate
    • one, the poison becomes an integral part of the organism.
    • processes similar to the one described, we have become immune
    • himself the bearer of healing forces. He becomes strong
    • the harmless substances contained in the body have become so
    • continuously exposed to substances that could become harmful,
    • upon our capacity to become ill. Thus, health is conditioned
    • death become comprehensible. It is this comprehension
    • these things becomes wisdom of life.
    • transformed, fructifies life and becomes a source of healing.
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture VII: Education and Spiritual Science
    Matching lines:
    • development, and must have become not merely learned, but
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture VIII: Insanity in the Light of Spiritual Science
    Matching lines:
    • terms only point to symptoms. No one can become insane by
    • religious person becomes mentally ill, his religious ideas
    • become distorted. Had he been steeped in materialistic ideas,
    • then they would have become distorted. The cause of mental
    • purified parts become ever larger. The “I” also
    • incarnates, the stronger becomes his character and his moral
    • condensed water; as ice can be melted to become water, so can
    • there are irregularities, he becomes aware of them in such a
    • becomes conscious of itself, and feelings of hopes, wishes
    • their true form, but if they become projected outwards due to
    • bring about the accord with the physical environment becomes
    • disturbed, becomes conscious of itself, it leads to idiocy. A
    • human being can become what is called “demented”
    • the “above and the “below” only becomes
    • becomes apparent. The form of mental illness that results
    • find no harmony with the “below” it becomes
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture IX: Wisdom and Health
    Matching lines:
    • science must become a personal quest. The striving human
    • spiritual knowledge becomes a personal quest.
    • become decision and action. Someone who is knowledgeable
    • knows how to apply knowledge so that it becomes reality is
    • become an inner force. Through his contemplation and exact
    • but could exist. In someone who has become a sage laws are
    • raised to become imagination.
    • required of human beings. The soul must become active, as the
    • becomes such a picture, then this wisdom becomes in all
    • acting from outside has become individualized in humans.
    • error, they can transform so that it becomes wisdom once
    • more. What is already in existence must, as it were, become
    • recast within human beings, must become color-filled,
    • the astral body of which it becomes a part, whereas
    • thus become creative. Their health-giving effect acts
    • being that becomes ill; only people take the spirit into
    • When this wisdom has reached its climax it will have become
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture X: Stages in Man's Development in the Light of Spiritual Science
    Matching lines:
    • an organ, a tool; and self-knowledge becomes ever greater the
    • more this self can forget itself and become aware of the
    • life. The tableau becomes indistinct and dissolves, but the
    • general, though they may become modified in various ways. In
    • because the child's fantasy becomes active in providing what
    • Organs; they become strong, as a muscle becomes strong when
    • line of descent develop and become established during the
    • part. Emulation of relatives widens to become emulation of
    • become defined, now when the child's life widens beyond the
    • individual, become characteristic. At this time the etheric
    • organs should now become stronger and increase in size.
    • qualities that must be so deeply imprinted that they become
    • the astral body become free, that is, become open to external
    • definite, too conclusive; they should not become consolidated
    • body becomes ever denser; if up till now the person has been
    • a learner, he or she can now become an adviser. A person's
    • problems are in the balance. The apprentice has become
    • with what has inwardly been elaborated: a person becomes
    • while the tissue becomes slack. The withdrawing physical
    • develop a life of its own. The human being becomes more and
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture XI: Who are the Rosicrucians?
    Matching lines:
    • human nature was different from what it was to become a few
    • methods are developed whereby he becomes the instrument able
    • facts. Here we are concerned with thinking that has become
    • desires permeate the lower organs, a person will become as
    • become independent. Space becomes a world of color and sound in
    • of the changed breath has become great enough. This will take
    • seventh stage is within reach. Knowledge now becomes feeling;
    • roses” — what this expresses — has become one's
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture XII: Richard Wagner and Mysticism
    Matching lines:
    • out to become world-substance that they then shaped and
    • to become an individual, a personality, had to leave the old
    • itself. Only in this way could man become a free being, but
    • that human beings could become more and more conscious. He
    • have to become a prominent factor of life.
    • evolution. An Ashasverus is someone that has become stuck
    • matter, with external aspects of life, and becomes stuck in
    • to ever greater perfection. He becomes entangled in matter
    • by material life and one that has become entangled in it.
    • dance, not as it has become, but the dance that once
    • import. Only when inner impulses have become external action,
    • have become part of space and time, can they be conveyed
    • become articulate, strove to permeate the whole world and envelop
    • some action taking place on the stage, we should become aware
    • Nibelungs, who have become egoistic, of the human being that
    • qualities, and in human beings become egoistic craving for
    • that had become individualized, but with that which had not
    • yet become so, and still strongly acts as
    • which the individual human being becomes united after death,
    • men to freedom and independence. The lady who becomes his
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Supersensible Knowledge: Lecture XIII: The Bible and Wisdom
    Matching lines:
    • modern person becomes critical when faced with contradictions
    • which they have become accustomed are not in a position to
    • did not know before; through our will we become capable of
    • seed that has already become a plant. If we never forget that
    • higher stages of development and we become aware that our
    • become reality, though as yet it is only slightly indicated.
    • becomes a “beggar of the spirit”; he feels
    • ideal; through what he is, is revealed what we shall become.
    • a definite method if one wishes to become an astronomer,
    • without guidance; that would be like wishing to become a
    • experience a certain life if they were to become initiates. Their
    • insignificant, will become by far the most important. The
  • Title: An Impulse for the Future
    Matching lines:
    • falls, harden or become corrupt, others show that they are strong and
    • a human will which has become free of selfishness. He repeated these
    • things. With every futile attempt the conditions and relations become
    • be like a living tree. Never should what it is to become be
    • become one with nature. Various other things sought a peaceful
    • certain impossible symptoms had become apparent in our Society it was
  • Title: Article/Lecture: West-East Aphorisms
    Matching lines:
    • becomes the physical basis of his existence. But rhythm courses into the
    • into man, and how man thus becomes a living soul. The man of the present
    • way to find himself in the world. If the Western man should wish to become
    • a Yogi, he would have to become a refined egoist, for Nature has already
    • course of civilization toward the West, trade first becomes an independent
    • farther toward the West, production in industry becomes an independent
    • down to man. in the West, it has become the human word. It must find the
  • Title: Contrasting World-conceptions of East and West
    Matching lines:
    • metabolic organs and the extremities do not become separated so
    • is gradually drawing near, and which will become a reality in a
    • end. That is why our European civilisation has become so
    • character (or have become tangible) through the human
    • become- delusively perceptible to the senses and which are
  • Title: The Mystery of Golgotha
    Matching lines:
    • walk, to speak and to become independent.
    • received the Spirit-Self and this enabled him to become an
    • into the human beings, when all shall have become brothers)
    • Christianised men, by men who have become divine through
    • experience he felt that he had become a new man and he obtained
    • lived in the bosom of the Cosmic Father hath become our guide in
    • before. This has become possible because by shedding His blood,
  • Title: Year's Course as a Symbol for the Great Cosmic Year
    Matching lines:
    • earth, becomes clearly evident if we study the consciousness of
    • vegetable kingdom becomes aware of the secrets of the stars, it
    • which closes the small cycle of twelve months becomes a symbol
    • course of one year, can only be grasped if it becomes a symbol
  • Title: Spiritual Relations in the Configuration of the Human Organism: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • that is, they want to become salt. So that we continuously have a tendency
    • organism from without towards the inner that should become a statue,
    • but they become dependent, they are not themselves any more, who remember
    • things, but the things take hold of them, one becomes an automaton.
    • present no rigid form can come about. Since, at present, it cannot become
    • which cannot be dissolved in there anymore, becomes the basis for memory-representation,
    • from the outside wanting to become a form, this works four times faster
    • strongly, then the person cannot become a statue sufficiently. You only
  • Title: Spiritual Relations in the Configuration of the Human Organism: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • they can satisfy and become human, so to say, inside our organism.
    • never could become through outer proceedings what they become inside
    • Far, that it has become dead, we have taken up something already dead.
    • food at first must become dead in us and then must be revived again.
    • thing. Otherwise we would have to become angels again, if nitrogen were
    • the kidneys, and become active only there. So every substance has its
    • activity that is spiritual, but become “spleeny”. In reverse,
    • activity of the liver has become that which is most important for the
    • by the conviction, that one becomes heavy through the activity of the
    • a culture that has become heavy. One cannot quite get him in movement.
    • man does not only know more but will become something through Anthroposophy.
    • But to become sleepy through Anthroposophy means that one gives much
  • Title: Spiritual Relations in the Configuration of the Human Organism: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • a person had become ill in the sense we understand, but one spoke about
    • assume now, that a human being had become ill of something we would
    • of this type of illness. One then said to oneself: this person has become
    • in such a case one said: this person has become too dependent upon the
    • “trimmings,” as it were. For us, the trimmings have become
    • skin seemed to become somewhat dry. He even sensed something like his
    • was still something else than it was to become later, mainly in the
    • But all that is there in the animal and plant kingdom becomes something
    • simply become dark. In earlier times one looked at the light ether-body,
    • around us, as far as it is plant-world, has to become aglow in the most
    • people declare this up to a certain age and then become even greater
  • Title: Necessity and Freedom: Lecture I: The Past Shows Us a Picture of Necessity
    Matching lines:
    • infinity, our thinking becomes confused. The problem arising
    • way there are many things in the world people could become
    • course of time we have become accustomed to knowing that we
    • must become familiar with the fact that underlying our
  • Title: Necessity and Freedom: Lecture II: The Legend of the Prague Clock
    Matching lines:
    • plane, therefore it has become accustomed to dealing with those
    • nodding both to the rich man, who has become dependent on
    • mentally confused then, we are bound to become confused in our
    • had himself become a school teacher and passed on this nonsense
    • become teachers and remembered something of this verdict on
    • become good. So we must avoid Lucifer and Ahriman, avoid them
    • has become part of your whole thinking, resides in you, and
    • behind becomes necessity. If we were to see what is taking
    • it, it remains in our soul, where it becomes an activity of the
    • are necessities for us. But our current thoughts will become
    • it has become nature. What the gods thought during
    • There they become the beginning of a natural world. But
  • Title: Necessity and Freedom: Lecture III: Three Teachers with Different Attitudes
    Matching lines:
    • proper school administration, had himself become a school
    • teachers, with a few exceptions naturally, had all become
    • doubtlessly have become a good mailman. He would have easily
    • the second man would not have become aware of them. We cannot
    • then that they can enter into us and become one with us.
  • Title: Necessity and Freedom: Lecture IV: The Roman World and the Teutonic Tribes
    Matching lines:
    • become aware that there are deep reasons behind what I already
    • is essential that we become aware that the deciding factors
    • things. It is essential that we become aware that into the
    • necessity, and we must become familiar with the thought that
    • ball would first of all have to become unconscious in order
    • only now becomes a matter of knowledge. It comes up into
    • perpetrator becomes aware that he allowed his consciousness to
    • and has not become an eye that can completely eliminate itself
    • become free when they achieve the possibility of drawing
    • being what could become tangible in his work. That is to
    • develops and grows older until it becomes senile. The etheric
    • normal old age, and die, our etheric body has become so
    • say, we become acquainted with spiritual necessity, thereby
    • into a spiritual necessity we ought to become more and more
    • the spiritual plane, we become freer and freer of the
    • purely spiritual impulse, we become freer and freer from all
    • unalterable, the etheric body as such becomes freer and
    • become unconscious to the extent that we undertake to
    • unconsciousness arises, where we become aware of what is at
    • present our souls must become conscious of the spirit, souls
  • Title: Necessity and Freedom: Lecture V: The "I" is Found on the Physical Plane in Acts of Will
    Matching lines:
    • become so well acquainted with. We consider man as a synthesis
    • is a further mystery. For you can become conscious of your
    • will we actually become conscious of ourselves. But of
    • the matter so much that it ought to have become second nature
    • these colors.” Outer nature will become more and
    • but will have to learn it until it becomes a habit. The mere
    • experiences, the first one being that people have to become
    • People will also become aware that they are able to grasp moral
    • become aware once more of the aura, and on the other hand,
    • way that they become enthusiastic, fired up, they are
    • they have positive knowledge of Christ, and we become the sort
    • Christ in a different way from them: they then become far worse
    • dreary grey in grey, and they would become less and less
    • definition of truth is nonsense, and this becomes evident
    • see it has already become an ideal, this eliminating of
  • Title: Social Question as a Problem: Lecture I: The Inner Experience of Language
    Matching lines:
    • discarnate souls, must become increasingly closer, because
    • concrete. It must again become an aim of mankind to think
    • gradually become accustomed to accepting the words as a sort
    • insert it again in one's revision; for people have become
    • further consideration it all becomes very abstract because
    • itself has become younger and younger — how we are now
    • understand”. They would become concrete if you would
    • People must become more mobile inwardly, that is, they must
    • more pictorial speech becomes. And that is just the reason
    • become pictures again. Only in this way can we fulfil the
    • last centuries the more abstract has all life become. Only
    • their wills they can easily become ahrimanic, despotic,
    • a Lenin? In their idea materialists easily become luciferic,
    • prosaic, pedantic, dry, bourgeois; and in their wills become
    • Idealists: Ideas can easily become luciferic:
    • easily become ahrimanic: despotic, tyrannical.
    • Materialists: Ideas can easily become ahrimanic,
    • prosaic, pedantic, bourgeois. Wills can easily become
    • not one-sided. One should not become one-sided where the most
    • now become as conscious in a higher way as it was unconscious
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Social Question as a Problem: Lecture II: The Inner Experience of Language
    Matching lines:
    • consciousness soul this becomes increasingly individual.
    • People become more and more different in their thinking,
    • catastrophe will become immeasurably greater. For one cannot
    • become an essential part of our schooling.
    • recently become international, men have with a certain
    • Nowadays he who has acquired several languages becomes a
    • become barren, and mankind would be able to evolve hardly
    • yesterday, by a healthy paganism. Nature must again become
    • present that we have become more and more indifferent towards
  • Title: Goetheanism as an Impulse for Man's Transformation - Lecture I: The Difference Between Man and Animal
    Matching lines:
    • fall back on any kind of deluded ideas that have become mere fine words.
    • present time men actually become quite frightening when they begin to
    • actually hold good for anyone who will not become a spiritual scientist
    • hypotheses of Spiritual Science man and animal are compared, it becomes
    • themselves about all kinds of scientific concepts that have become popular
    • pressing towards a time when consciousness will become a mere reflection,
    • of life. Science will become increasingly abstract and man in his social
    • and just by going forward you will become ever more so. Man will have
    • decision either through abstract concepts to become more animal than the
    • own faculties, and he will become so increasingly if he develops only
    • shooting them and so on, so that the animal souls have become accustomed
    • they become so afraid? It comes about by their having at the present
    • animal in the form of its organisation? Nature becomes sick and the
  • Title: Goetheanism as an Impulse for Man's Transformation - Lecture II: St. John of the Cross
    Matching lines:
    • working in him the practice of certain virtues becomes easy which otherwise
    • up outer perceptions through his senses, the soul can become passive,
    • the soul of itself does nothing further. Thereby God becomes the principal
    • night of the senses. To go through it the soul must become free of itself
    • of the soul and the divine will, become one.”
    • of time becomes capable of abandoning these conceptions, particularly
    • when carried out by men today, for they are obsolete, they have become
    • For, externally, existence becomes ever more like a mask, and elmsys
  • Title: Goetheanism as an Impulse for Man's Transformation - Lecture III: Clairvoyant Vision Looks at Mineral, Plant, Animal, Man
    Matching lines:
    • side on what becomes so enigmatical if looked at from the points of
    • actually to become as man of the earth; then he continues on, and now
    • to the insensitive men of today as sophistry, must gradually become
    • look at the external world to become conscious of himself. In the mineral
    • smell, would become half dead in the world one has entered. Before birth
    • The Soul's Awakening, scene 6) we become clear that something
    • will, than this raging will become ever greater and greater in the world;
    • will forgive mel To become headless means that the head could no longer
    • this has become so noticeable; and it will become ever more noticeable
    • not the thoughts but the thinking, must become active. And when thinking
    • where he should become clear about his own personal being. In this longing,
    • At this point man will be able to become clear about the life of mankind
    • grows into the habit of getting free from himself. As today, if he becomes
    • Science, he becomes more selfless. Spiritual Science, therefore, is
    • account: he becomes much more practical. It is just this belief that
    • however, be noticed. If it is noticed it will become apparent that through
    • how verbose they have become in the ordinary world where nothing new
    • speak in such a way that it is not sympathy that becomes dominant but,
    • is possible to become a hermit in spite of wearing elegant shoes and
  • Title: Goetheanism as an Impulse for Man's Transformation - Lecture 4: Human Qualities Which Oppose Antroposophy
    Matching lines:
    • will become increasingly so for all men, to learn to understand the
    • far man can become ripe to look into the spiritual world himself is
    • do not become aware of the infinite and important number of experiences
    • was sent to sleep wakes up, and it becomes clear what is holding sway
    • to become clear about this mother love, and then ask whether this mother
    • become one family. That is perfectly right, my dear friends, but just
    • of their soul—if this becomes direct experience, just as we experience
    • today instinctively, but must become conscious that the development
    • paid to such a matter the spiritual horizon becomes wider. And this
    • time. Such hostility very frequently becomes particularly strong, however,
  • Title: Goetheanism as an Impulse for Man's Transformation - Lecture 5: Paganism, Hebraism, and the Greek Spirit, Hellenism
    Matching lines:
    • side. We penetrate to the inner side by trying to become clear how this
    • ancient times by the way which man out of his own bodily nature becomes
    • there is no doubt it becomes impossible to bring the events of nature
    • the Jahve God, is obliged to play a part in what man has become in earthly
  • Title: Goetheanism as an Impulse for Man's Transformation - Lecture 6: Goetheanism as an Impulse for Man's Transformation
    Matching lines:
    • standing-by, in all the help given her, how fond they had become of
    • did not become free in the chaotic condition that it does today in sleep;
    • must the event of Golgotha become for this intellect that is above all
    • from this turning a fact becomes clear—it may be believed or not,
    • has become ever more impossible for Latin culture as well as for the
    • has become ever more impossible out of mere intellectuality to school
  • Title: Regarding Higher Worlds
    Matching lines:
    • you have become learned in theory. It doesn't really come to
    • These revelations become absorbed just like facts on the
    • them, from one moment to the next become another, because the
    • person becomes polluted. From these thickenings exude evil
    • a way that folds are created, sections become slack and hang as
    • being gradually becomes that which is being touched, not
    • cooperation and hence becomes glowing and penetrated by
    • Thus if you are not thoroughly prepared it can become dangerous
    • astral world. Here you become aware, when you have developed
    • world become ever clearer and more distinct to observation and
    • the physical world and hence this world becomes ever more
  • Title: Goethe's Relationship to his 'Faust'
    Matching lines:
    • gradually into our soul, that it becomes larger than all which
    • which becomes a visionary life when it turns ill.
    • lives in our soul. We couldn't become wise or clever through
    • What did this knowledge of nature become? It was much spoken
    • They had to become so blended together that they become one.
    • “Faust” has become no lesser work of art. It is
  • Title: What is Self-knowledge?
    Matching lines:
    • striving, but falsely understood, can become extremely
    • cycle, that the human “I” can only become self
    • self-knowledge the ascent becomes just as dangerous as it
    • becomes firstly possible through genuine self-knowledge. This
    • measure with which to orientate himself. This measure becomes
    • around us, how it becomes inclusive in relation to the physical
    • body. We become spiritually larger within, through spreading
    • feelings. For the clairvoyant awareness it becomes gradually
    • the aura spreading, enlarging, as we become refined and more
    • become liberated in their feeling and will impulses from
    • become independent from his talents and abilities. This healing
    • perceive how the aura becomes agile and vibrates. We will at
    • should become more profound, seek God within, will hardly
    • insight can become everything without having to make
    • is to warm the room” — the room won't become warm. Merely
    • become a life-hypothesis. Will he give me a slap if I think
    • relationships the aura becomes stronger and capable of shaping
    • anthroposophic knowledge will become ever more known. It is
    • a necessity, a gateway. So we too, should become gateways, but
  • Title: The Building at Dornach (Bn/GA 289): Lecture I: The Goetheanum
    Matching lines:
    • of seeing it, may become acquainted with it. The very way in which this
    • of mankind. The life of modern humanity has become simply intellectual;
    • it has become so because for centuries modern humanity has hardly received
    • sort of intuitive thought-form is necessary. We shall have to become
    • but has only become different in the course of its metamorphosis; it
  • Title: The Building at Dornach (Bn/GA 289): Lecture II: Bau Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • see as we continue that things become more and more complicated. That
    • and how the architrave motif becomes extremely complicated as it develops
    • it becomes apparent to you what is organic and growing and in this way
    • to-day when they are confronted with Art tend to become a little dreamy
    • thing with which we are concerned is to become wider awake than we are
    • to be profoundly stirred and become more awake and aware than we are
    • has become simple although it has arrived at perfection. You see the
    • and everything that follows can become more and more perfect. The beginning
    • easily follow what I mean. But it becomes easier and easier as time
    • to become objective and to develop interest in the great objective universe,
    • commonplace puerilities. If we cannot become objective in relation to
    • that they become personal. It is for this reason that they try to bring
    • properly and become aware of the things that are going on around us.
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture I: The Problem of Faust
    Matching lines:
    • all that he has become spiritualised. Faust cannot remain
    • the head, but he realises how reason can become living
    • depths concealed in it become evident. All the temptations I
    • become much more than a travelling student with all a
    • books that has become double-Dutch being often put forward
    • its spirit becomes stronger than before, and its eyes
    • way men would never have become free. They would, through
    • through inner moral forces alone. Thus, nature becomes veiled
    • having become free, he has desecrated her. It is at most
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture II: The Romantic Walpurgis-Night
    Matching lines:
    • naturally become rather — painful. It is all very well
    • trivialities. And then Faust becomes impatient, for he had
    • recall a bit of his own past. For this reason he becomes
    • impressive — and the red mouse becomes Gretchen. The
    • reason of her misfortune, now becomes visible to hem in her
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture III: Goethe's Feeling for the Concrete.
    Matching lines:
    • may become conscious of his divine spiritual origin. Fichte
    • ancient Greece but through it becomes paralyzed.
    • become what we now see? Is it possible that in him Goethe was
    • created the whole world. It had become an idée
    • this man the striving after the Absolute has become the
    • sense, but she must become more substantial.
    • instructions. And Homunculus does in fact immediately become
    • traversing the rounds of nature Helen becomes, externally on
    • expression, to ‘become young’ meant to ‘be
    • rises to Goethe's level — should try to become clear as
    • What becomes of me when you all go away?”
    • become universal and historic. Thus it has become possible
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture IV: Faust and the "Mothers"
    Matching lines:
    • from which our sense-world is drawn. And Faust is to become
    • is consummated. The man who is about to become physical
    • uneasiness; in a certain way it becomes dangerous for him
    • that he would, become free from Mephistopheles. The other
    • intellect become clouded. Mephistopheles really puts himself
    • these forces has already become so duting the fifth
    • consciousness to become present in their minds. Remember what
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture V: Faust and the Problem of Evil
    Matching lines:
    • things have become rather vague and obliterated in our time.
    • as will become the wrestlings of the fifth post-Atlantean
    • Graeco-Latin epoch must also become impulses of human beings
    • the Witches' Kitchen Scene we have an Idea that has become
    • transformed into Imagination; it is Feeling that has become
    • Feeling that has become Imagination.
    • Phantasmagoria’ is Willing that has become
    • legend is well known; the other has also become known, for
    • all things esoteric become exoteric by-and-by. The exoteric
    • impulses of human evolution must become sharp and clear
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture VI: The Helena Saga and the Riddle of Freedom
    Matching lines:
    • that, and cannot become abstractly pious all at once. On the
    • would become his father's murderer and live in incest with
    • home-country; otherwise thou wilt become thy father's
    • becomes a rebel against the bonds of blood and thereby
    • it is true, but the point is that Paris only becomes fully
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture VII: Some Spiritual-Scientific Observations
    Matching lines:
    • own bodily organisation, becomes capable of achieving self
    • then be the being who only becomes ripe for self-knowledge in
    • self-knowledge. And what did the Homunculus-figure become
    • theory of knowledge! But then he never would have become
    • must picture as though our metals were gradually to become so
    • glowing and fiery that at last they become actually nothing
    • wished, and become hot or cold in the element of fire. And in
    • become this solid planet on which man can stand at the same
    • understanding enough to become man. Therefore his experience
    • and waking, for then it becomes clear that these theories
    • may become Homo.” — Therefore Goethe makes
    • struggle? The answer is that we observe it when we can become
    • today is not able to become fully conscious of what takes
    • he wishes to become Homo, but into that world he refuses to
    • to enable Homunculus to become Homo in a human life-time;
    • wants to learn how to become Homo from the philosophers, from
    • expected that Homunculus will become man.
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture VIII: Spiritual Science Considered with the Classical Walpurgis-Night
    Matching lines:
    • become anthroposophists, appears to differ very little from
    • give, they will be found to become, especially as they
    • accessible, become a Homo? — Not through the ordinary
    • become Homo. He is on the track of two philosophers,
    • Königsberg to get information from Kant on how to become
    • to what has become”.
    • sees around him is what has become. Anaxagoras enters into
    • He becomes ‘hermaphrodite’ when it is
    • he clings only to what the day brings, man of himself becomes
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture IX: Goethe's Life of the Soul from the Standpoint of Spiritual Science
    Matching lines:
    • also it only becomes clear how such a life of soul is
    • etheric body. And they become overdone, all these theories
    • quite definite way. He either becomes a scientist, learning
    • permeate natural phenomena with these; or, he becomes a
    • Christian Churches has become accentuated. The historical
    • Luther and those of Calvin. The extreme Anglicans have become
    • in a general way this would naturally become abstract and
    • to the soul of mar, so that it grasps that it will become
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture X: Faust's Knowledge and Understanding of Himself
    Matching lines:
    • Homunculus; if, however, he wishes to become a real man, he
    • then, must take place when Homunculus is to become Homo, when
    • the outlook of Homunculus is to become the outlook of Homo?
    • everything becomes real. Then we have to come upon those
    • Thales himself cannot be made to help Homunculus to become
    • to advise Homunculus how to become man, complete man. For
    • Homunculus is to become man? Nereus has indeed understanding,
    • Spiritual Science is presented here, it becomes
    • importance; how in later life he becomes spiritual. This,
    • prepared for it. He becomes spiritual as the body falls into
    • decay, as the body becomes dry and sclerotic the spirit
    • becomes free, even during the waking condition. Only, a man
    • into which we men and women grow as we become old. There you
    • Homunculus can become Homo. (You know how, in this scene,
    • earth-life will, in the next life, become the head. There,
    • developed were Homunculus to become Homo. Goethe in all
    • ourselves he knew everything. But No! Goethe becomes all the
    • rather, makes us see — how Homunculus can become Homo
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture XI: The Vision of Reality in the Greek Myths
    Matching lines:
    • outside his body, becomes able to perceive what is around
    • for modern man who has become so abstract. They felt with
    • become living, as demonic beings of the sea, only when the
    • Homunculus is to become Homo, to become man, and because the
    • Homunculus can never become Homo. Thus Goethe believes in all
    • to show Homunculus how to become Homo. This Nereus has a
    • conception, the abstract Homunculus-idea can become that of
    • becomes the stamen and pistil of the flower. He also believed
    • incarnation, it becomes my next head. This is the crown of
    • beautifully expresses it in this book, nature becomes
    • know what Goethe had become by the nineties of the eighteenth
  • Title: Problem of Faust: Lecture XII: Goetheanism In Place of Homunculism and Mephistophelianism
    Matching lines:
    • darkness. he imagines it will only become clear when he
    • point of view. What would man have become had he just been
    • what you feel when Mephistopheles becomes a Phorkyad among
    • Homunculus would receive new life and become man, but against
    • become gradually known to mankind, so that as impulses they
    • the tree becomes bare in autumn, it is in its fruiting in its
    • century. What must be sought will become something good and a
  • Title: Anthroposophy as a Demand of the Times
    Matching lines:
    • by outer observation. But he who in all seriousness becomes a
    • not such a fictitious one. He who becomes an imitator of dream
    • becomes aware of how a living inner being, something active,
    • a general feeling of ego or self becomes a strongly felt inner
    • activity. If one wants to become a spiritual scientist and not
    • do not become conscious of an activity, the images of the dream
    • consciousness. But he who wants to become an investigator or
    • spirit may not become a person inclined to fantasy nor a
    • the dream becomes a fully conscious reality. It even becomes
    • not become a man of phantasy; he must acquire a sense of
    • his longing for immortality, that it becomes a mere belief if
    • spiritual investigation, although one can become one up to a
  • Title: The Ten Commandments
    Matching lines:
    • souls, can become a specific connecting thread allowing an
    • After death however, when they have become sufficiently worthy,
    • and grandparents and their bodies will become stultified. If
    • “I” as divine, the way is given to become free from
    • for the Jewish people to become the most prepared people for
    • people had to, in order to become free, find the source of
    • their bodies will become stultified.” You produce
    • are correctly translated. It becomes clear to us from the
    • festive day, so that the image of Your Being becomes the image
  • Title: Way of Knowledge
    Matching lines:
    • work into us, it becomes transformed in us as feelings, as soul
    • spiritual events to work through the soul, we become warm,
    • the rest of nature becomes understandable in a wonderful way.
    • a single being, but becomes part of the great living being,
    • spirit and can penetrate all. So our earth becomes a living
    • being. So every single plant becomes something which grows out
    • of a large supersensible being and, on the surface, becomes
    • safe within the soul-spiritual. Gradually it becomes possible
    • time it will become old and aged.
    • Christ. Paul didn't become a believer through sharing the life
    • spirit in the astral world, who had become the earth spirit; he
    • become a worthy body for the Christ-Spirit and while the earth
    • endlessly profound this becomes with the inauguration of
    • the body of Christ! How meaningful this becomes with reference
    • being, then we can become conscious of what lies in the stone
    • a transparent crystal blanket but to become opaque? Through the
    • than people who become spiritual. Ahriman awakens storms,
    • of nature, and the earth itself become an expression of the
    • spirit. The earthly body, which is a living being, would become
  • Title: Haeckel, "The Riddle of the Universe," Theosophy
    Matching lines:
    • become interwoven with explanations relating to the facts
    • entity by which man becomes a spiritual being. No mental
    • spiritual observer; he must become one. become a
    • become audible, telling their spiritual names, and able to
    • he becomes aware of that harmony of the spheres, that truth to
    • Tones and sounds, this music of the spheres, now become, for
    • incomplete brain, enabling it at a later period to become the
  • Title: Karmic Relationships, Volume III: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • it with the help of Anthroposophy, but as soon as it becomes a
    • this: At the beginning of his earthly life, man becomes capable
    • Nevertheless, if their idea had become dominant in Europe, only
    • become vaguer and vaguer. People would increasingly have fixed
    • comparison. Today the thinking of many people has become quite
    • them that his thoughts had become condensed, consolidated once
    • people become unconscious during earthly life of what is there
    • begin to think along these lines the strangest nonsense becomes
    • thinking. For then they become distorted, misrepresented truth,
  • Title: Cosmic Forces in Man: Lecture I: Cosmic Forces in Man
    Matching lines:
    • but until it becomes a natural matter of course to speak of
    • indicate very briefly that it must become possible for man once again
  • Title: Cosmic Forces in Man: Lecture II: The Soul Life of Man ...
    Matching lines:
    • metabolic system, for example. When metabolism becomes too strong in
    • for what works more from out of the unconscious, to become
    • we wake in the morning and become aware of the colours and sounds of
    • more intimate becomes our relation to the Angel while we are asleep.
    • whereby our relation to the Angel becomes more and more intimate.
    • acquires its real significance for us when it becomes our environment
    • clearer does our consciousness become.
    • Before the Midnight Hour of Existence man has become more and more
    • with deep and inward love for what will become his mother-tongue, or
    • being. He becomes one with it. This love is absolutely natural to him;
    • such a case the individual life also becomes unfree. This lack of
    • concepts, such a man merely thinks words. He becomes unfree
    • man will become more and more a dealer in abstractions, He will not be
    • has become an ‘automaton’ in his relation to his nation, language and
    • world and within physical existence become the corpse of the Divine
  • Title: Cosmic Forces in Man: Lecture III: The Mission of the Scandanavian Peoples
    Matching lines:
    • with the world of the higher Hierarchies becomes especially noticeable
    • that must be made clear to him. But in spiritual matters man has become
    • had suddenly become frenzied with desire to tear one another to
    • illumination of the highest wisdom if they were to become intelligible
    • one soul has the urge to become a Norwegian, and another a Swede. But
    • everywhere deflected. They do not become really active. They cannot
    • what man is and has become through many earthly lives, when we have
    • what they have become to-day as a result of these experiences. We have
    • rustling trees and the roaring of the waves, you become aware of the
    • Those who in the true and real way have lived a Norwegian life become
    • the people of Middle Europe do not accept spirituality, they become
    • necessary. For Middle Europe will degenerate, will become barbarian
    • to-day from all sides, they may become timid and say: Would it not be
  • Title: Spirit of Fichte: Lecture I: The Spirit of Fichte Present in Our Midst
    Matching lines:
    • seemed to have so imbibed it that it had become part of himself.
    • opportune moment, appeared the writer Weisse, who had become one of his
    • assimilated that education till it had become the most fundamental
    • growth and work, until at last he becomes, as we have been able to
    • after going on to discuss what a man should become in life if in
    • when occasion demanded. It had become necessary for him to enter as
    • become? A place of nurture, which might be termed a school of
    • become his colleague. Thereupon Fichte in turn published a few
    • become aware, says Fichte, of a special sense, a new sense within one's
    • spoke of then? Of the necessity for men to become conscious that
    • of being. We must, he said, become aware that a supersensuous mind
    • become, as a creative Ego, one with the stream of the creative
    • dismissed his audience as changed people. They had become other
  • Title: Lecture: The Christmas Festival In The Changing Course Of Time
    Matching lines:
    • greatness any longer, a greatness to which humanity had become
    • that times have changed, and that in our modern cities it has become
    • these can no longer exist at present. What has become often a mere
    • and what should it become in the future? To this end, let us compare,
    • Christmas or Easter. Today it has become very difficult indeed,
    • darkness has come about. Long have the nights become, shortened are
    • Story.” The actual Christmas plays had already become quite rare,
    • such as have become customary in our time in imitation of the Passion
    • in such a Christmas play should become signposts, as it were, by which
    • most sacred mood, like a mystery, has become merely external poetry,
    • become something able to give us solace and comfort in the darkest
    • spiritual life. Yes indeed, cradles shall our places of work become at
  • Title: Occult Significance of the Bhagavad Gita: Lecture 1 of 9
    Matching lines:
    • peoples become familiar with this marvelous song. But these lectures
    • in a time when he could become acquainted with the wondrous things
    • own blood relations. His bow falls from his grasp when it becomes
    • picture before our eyes it is almost as though the teaching becomes
    • that have only become known in this last century, very little
    • have no doubt whatever about it but becomes confused instead with the
  • Title: Occult Significance of the Bhagavad Gita: Lecture 2 of 9
    Matching lines:
    • occult record it becomes ever clearer that it is really most
    • allowed to become unbalanced. The upheaval that may be the
    • and calm. To this end a person who is striving to become ripe for
    • of mankind, of the earth, of the whole planetary system become his
    • charioteer becomes the instrument through which the god Krishna
    • clairvoyant. If that were true they could never become clairvoyant at
    • become so?” This is just the point. It is most important to
    • ideas. You become utterly bewildered in your world of ideas, an
    • he becomes unconscious of it. Now for every human soul the
    • can learn to look at himself from outside. He becomes aware of being
    • how this plant-like life shrinks together again and becomes the
  • Title: Occult Significance of the Bhagavad Gita: Lecture 3 of 9
    Matching lines:
    • sleeping — our dream consciousness. We cannot become familiar
    • experienced in the outer world. But it is just when we become more
    • ordinary consciousness. This recognition can become still more
    • from what we imagine. It is just this difference that now becomes
    • occultism. For example, they become vegetarians. In spite of all
    • practice, we become aware of a certain layer of consciousness present
    • it only becomes such through our carrying into it what we experience
    • necessary, to become ever more perfect. This feeling is stronger than
    • has acquired in ordinary life, and thus he becomes a different man
  • Title: Occult Significance of the Bhagavad Gita: Lecture 4 of 9
    Matching lines:
    • but become altogether wrong if they linger on for centuries, or as in
    • would become one-sided, it would not bring forth all the fullness of
    • He would become a true
    • he is able to become a twofold man. Those who have the power at will
  • Title: Occult Significance of the Bhagavad Gita: Lecture 5 of 9
    Matching lines:
    • more become evident how the new mode of thought has to come in touch
    • with the reality of things. Thought will become very different from
    • now approaching it will become evident in more and more people. Now
    • evolution for the forces at work preparing the future to become free
    • for a moment and become clairvoyantly visible.
    • them, for they have become forces of the soul. Here we have a cycle
    • it will become later on. So we must say that until the period when
    • withdraw the constructive forces and become clairvoyant. Or what men
  • Title: Occult Significance of the Bhagavad Gita: Lecture 6 of 9
    Matching lines:
    • are told how the soul can become ever more free of the outer bodily
    • actions the body experiences. The soul can become a complete whole,
    • independent of outer things as it gradually attains Yoga and becomes
    • of Arjuna’s opened vision comes before us. Arjuna becomes the
    • them. And what I have done will through thee become perceptible.
    • planted; the highest they can attain is to become free souls.
    • Free — that is what men will become if they bring to full
  • Title: Occult Significance of the Bhagavad Gita: Lecture 7 of 9
    Matching lines:
    • human forces, can only be perceived by man when he becomes
    • it will become possible to discover them if not to perceive them.
    • in man there are at work forces that can become capable of either
    • from man ‘become’ to man ‘becoming;’ from man
    • becomes sexually mature. But the body of this child that had
    • with all the faculties of our soul. Then we shall ourselves become
  • Title: Occult Significance of the Bhagavad Gita: Lecture 8 of 9
    Matching lines:
    • real depth, even afterward when it passes over and becomes the
    • fate of truth that it must always become paradoxical in the world.
  • Title: Occult Significance of the Bhagavad Gita: Lecture 9 of 9
    Matching lines:
    • tamas food what had become rotten, had stood too long, and had a foul
    • to it but meets it with what he himself is. For example, he becomes
    • But man must gradually become apathetic to the physical world in
    • his surroundings. However, when the world about him becomes so
    • becomes more and more free of the world, more independent in
    • abstract concepts, but afterward these become more and more vivid.
    • he who would truly become free in his soul, who does not wish to be
    • and in thine own self become as one who lays hold of himself. Learn
    • Arjuna's highest endeavor has become the greatest suffering for many
    • him to become ever more perfect as an individual being. The Krishna
    • teaching, how it directs man to put aside all externals, to become
    • striving for perfection has become too strong. It has gone so far
    • become a means of shedding light on all religions. He must learn to
    • conditions that have now become necessary. It is certainly more
  • Title: Mysteries of the East: Lecture 1
    Matching lines:
    • carried through in the right way. Sense-impressions become merely a
    • becomes for him a matter of knowledge, equally with his knowledge of
    • Mysteries, everything in his soul-life must gradually become
    • figure in ordinary soul-life must all become a means to higher
    • become transparent, and he must be able to see what he wants to see
    • to be a boundary. It becomes transparent, and behind it appears that
    • it becomes transparent and is eliminated by the soul-force which has
    • themselves a complete experience, after Initiation they become merely
    • object of the life of the soul, thinking must become merely a means to
    • themselves; for the Initiate they become the means of expressing what
    • which I have just been saying: it must be overcome, must become for
    • experiences of his soul. All this must become merely a means, as soon
    • outward nature. Only think, the blue vault of heaven becomes
    • becomes actual experience. Thus, for example, the feeling, “to
    • suddenly to become conscious without waking up again in his physical
    • but they are of no use for seeing. On the one hand all things become
    • the moment when this begins — e.g. when the heavens become
    • words: Thou alone art the whole world. This experience becomes ever
    • small at first, but it becomes ever greater and greater and spreads
    • encounters becomes himself; he becomes submerged in it, becomes one
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Mysteries of the East: Lecture 2
    Matching lines:
    • fate of morally irresponsible souls after death is to become the
    • Love of ease a widespread attribute. Souls subject to it become
    • This requirement is shown by the fact that when the soul becomes
    • contemplation, so that they become capable of conscious experience
    • what good thing the rock crystal has done that it should have become a
    • a certain category — have become the servants of very terrible
    • become servants of the evil spirits of illness and death, and have
    • indolence — they become servants of the god or gods of
    • will mount upwards stage by stage. For him who wants to become an
    • after he has become an Initiate, that while moving around in the
    • feelings and perceptions remain with him, once he has become a seer;
    • do not let us imagine that anyone who has become a seer must forfeit
    • perceptions of such a kind that he becomes a participant in the
    • gradually into connection with the Sun and the starry world, becomes
    • but becomes acquainted with the spiritual beings and worlds belonging
  • Title: Mysteries of the East: Lecture 3
    Matching lines:
    • Then, however, arises a great longing, a longing that becomes terrible
    • for after it all things become in some sense different.
    • weaving in the innermost astral being of the man himself. It becomes
    • he could also become acquainted with the Light which illumines the
    • and that wherein one met only the mute, mourning Isis and could become
    • the higher worlds, becomes acquainted with all the Beings who
  • Title: Mysteries of the East: Lecture 4
    Matching lines:
    • But since we have become accustomed to bring in pictures as a help in
    • our ordinary speech, which has already become so secular, fails us,
    • all being and development. Now the Word has become mute and silent.
    • as the Creative Word, had gradually become lost to the experience of
    • How did That reappear which had become submerged in ancient Egypt? It
    • can become master of the dead part. Montsalvat, the sanctuary of the
    • order to become master of the part of the physical body that has died,
    • and the part of the soul that has become unconscious. Hence, in these
    • that had become dead, and to the part of the human soul that had
    • become unconscious. This domain, into which were justly transferred
    • part of the human soul that had become unconscious and on the portion
    • of the human organism that had become dead.
    • as it had to become in the fifth. It withdrew itself more from the
    • in earlier times. It has become possible only in later days, because
    • — the part of the soul that has become unconscious, and the part
    • so that this inner part becomes lord over the outer. Asceticism and
    • it produces on the soul. And when a person becomes cleverer and
    • many people suppose, and it will indeed become more and more
    • “wounding” of Amfortas and become acquainted with the
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture I: The Birth of the Intellect and the Mission of Christianity
    Matching lines:
    • Scandinavian and Germanic myths of Sigurd and Gudrun. Love becomes an
    • faculties unite once more and become dynamic through the power of the
    • become Theosophy.
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture III: God, Man, Nature
    Matching lines:
    • A star is visible in the heavens only when it has become mineral. Thus
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture IV: Involution and Evolution
    Matching lines:
    • to physical life — organs which have now become useless,
    • body; its mission is to become the temple of the soul.
    • and will blossom again in her. Thus does Involution become Evolution.
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture V: Yoga In East and West
    Matching lines:
    • Initiates — have become public property. Knowledge possessed by science
    • (2) The etheric body. How does it become perceptible?
    • when it has become wholly luminous (the first phase of Initiation), he
    • becomes a master.
    • extent to which he achieves this; he becomes a sage and has power over
    • body becomes much more sensitive and impressionable because it is no
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture VI: Yoga In East and West (conclusion)
    Matching lines:
    • pure. He gradually becomes able to live on the forces contained
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture VII: The Gospel of St. John
    Matching lines:
    • souls of all who become aware of it in the depths of their being. The
    • All that was supersensibly seen in the Ancient Mysteries becomes, in
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture VIII: The Christian Mystery
    Matching lines:
    • fear. When he has become fearless, he sees, in dream, the scene of the
    • a dense forest. The noises gradually cease and the silence becomes
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture IX: The Astral World
    Matching lines:
    • unto you, unless ye become as little children, ye cannot enter into
    • A lie in the physical world becomes an agent of destruction in the
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture X: The Astral World (continued)
    Matching lines:
    • is to say, our own astral body. We become aware of it from within
    • thoughts then become living and visible forms, constituting the aura
    • the astral world; the rite becomes beauty. This came to pass
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture XII: The Devachanic World (continued)
    Matching lines:
    • meaning. It becomes more and more possible to decipher the meaning of
    • At the second stage of clairvoyance, dreams become precise and clear.
    • The Beings living in the region which becomes perceptible at the
    • Cosmic Word. To the clairvoyant who has now become
    • time the Initiate is united with all beings, becomes one with his
    • Earth but from the side of the heavens. The Akashic Record becomes the
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture XIII: The Logos and the Word
    Matching lines:
    • the course of evolution, the etheric and physical brains have become
    • universal’ becomes the objective universe; man proceeds, first,
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture XIV: The Logos and Man
    Matching lines:
    • faculties of thinking and feeling, a man becomes as pure and free from
    • Sleep itself — not the dream — here becomes a conscious state. We do not only behold images but we enter into the living essence of beings and hear their inner tones. In the physical world we give names to things but the names are merely outer appellations. Only man can express his own being from within by saying ‘I’ — the ineffable name of conscious individuality. By this word we distinguish our own personality from the rest of the universe. But when we become conscious of the world of sound, each being, each thing communicates its own true name; in clairaudience we hear the sound which expresses its innermost being and rings forth as a tone in the universe that is distinct from all others.
    • One stage further and deep sleep becomes a conscious state. Description is impossible, for this condition passes beyond the limits of comparison. All that can be said is that it exists.
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture XV: The Evolution of Planets and Earth
    Matching lines:
    • become the substance of which the brain is now composed. On the Old
    • Old Moon, the planetary sphere which has now become our Earth had a
    • being and his conscience becomes his rightful guide. His
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture XVI: Earthquakes, Volcanoes, and Human Will
    Matching lines:
    • different kingdoms on earth have become as we now know them: the plant
    • similarly it recognizes the earth as a planet destined to become the
    • he would become on the ancient sun; he simply vibrated like a tone in
    • shall become conscious of what today is the unconsciousness of sleep.
    • this will have happened the soul of man will have become totally
    • have become conscious. This fact is connected with the forces of
    • which they will densify and finally become solid. The Earth is both
    • being a negative emptiness, becomes a positive substance.
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture XVII: Redemption and Liberation
    Matching lines:
    • being. And so it was due to Lucifer that man was able to become truly
    • intervenes in this karmic process and becomes its central pivot. Since
    • Through karma, the Act of Christ becomes cosmic law, and through the
  • Title: Esoteric Cosmology: Lecture XVIII: The Apocalypse
    Matching lines:
    • finally to become physical in the future, already exists in germ, in
    • will proceed in the same way and consider how man has gradually become
    • the two streams will again unite. Mechanical science will become
    • feelings, will find expression in the outer world and become his
    • all humanity. Having become like unto Christ, men will gather around
  • Title: First Lecture: The Gospel of St. John
    Matching lines:
    • the John Gospel rise to the two higher worlds and become
    • It is as if one cooled water in a vessel until it becomes
    • world, but one does not see this world or become aware of it
    • these organs are gradually developed one becomes clairvoyant
    • heart, so that the heart becomes one with these words, then
    • physiognomy becomes an expression of the individual soul,
    • reached when the inner word has become flesh completely
    • — when the outer has become an exact imprint of the
    • inner soul lives unconscious in man and he only becomes aware
    • does it mean to say: something becomes conscious. Can we
    • become conscious of something which lives within us? As long
    • the soul must leave the temple of the body so that it becomes
    • profundity, and then it becomes one of the greatest texts
  • Title: Second Lecture: The Gospel of St. John
    Matching lines:
    • experiences how man has become what he is. This was achieved
    • become steeled after the feeling of humiliation, this
    • that later also becomes noticable in the waking state.
    • bottom of the human soul. He becomes a second person by the
    • Everything pertaining to this planet becomes the body of the
    • bound with it. The grave becomes the source of his experience
    • — man and animal, plant and rock around him become
  • Title: Third Lecture: The Gospel of St. John
    Matching lines:
    • earth, it was possible to become an initiate — to
    • higher interests become mere subsidiary interests, mere
    • overcome what is only in him. Then his interests become
    • they will, becomes his own feeling and his own will. The
    • vanished and his consciousness has become one with the whole.
    • the spiritual element become established in man? For someone
    • is complete. Jesus answered him, and said that it will become
    • who directs his gaze towards the spiritual world to become
    • has to develop to become mature. Such is he who has developed
    • reverence is of the utmost importance, for it will become
    • soft and pliable has now become more and more solid. If you
    • John Gospel. We will become aware of the deep truth of one of
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture I: The Being of Man
    Matching lines:
    • substances and their forces in such a way that they become for him the
    • experience, but for the Initiate the astral body can become an outer
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture II: The Three Worlds
    Matching lines:
    • to become widely known — Helen Keller. In her second year she
    • people do not see their own passions, but these may sometimes become
    • becomes clear for the first time when he passes from the astral world
    • When our senses have become
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture III: Life of the Soul in Kamaloka
    Matching lines:
    • to get loose, and this can be very dangerous. The victims become dreamy,
    • act on the brain sufficiently to become conscious, because the physical
    • and the higher a man's development, the slower the process becomes, until
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture IV: Devachan
    Matching lines:
    • can become when the experiences of this latest life are added to those
    • hardly observable in the ordinary man of today, but if he becomes
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture VI: The Upbringing of Children. Karma.
    Matching lines:
    • a child's senses, to draw them out so that they become active
    • the scale of nature towards man, the more individual does destiny become.
    • do not have to understand the law in all its details; that becomes possible
    • of years, the law will of its own accord become part of our feelings.
    • become sheer fatalists! If we are responsible for whatever happens to
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture VII: Workings of the Law of Karma in Human Life
    Matching lines:
    • will engender in his astral body something which will become a
    • things and has not merely looked on at them, he will become a choleric.
    • will become a phlegmatic or a sanguine type.
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture VIII: Good and Evil. Individual Karmic Questions.
    Matching lines:
    • achievements of the physical body itself? Its deeds become its future
    • Either the physical body becomes more beautiful as a result of the illness
    • himself so that he might become more truly human. It was as though you
    • to become outward, and man will rise still higher when his karma has
    • transformed evil will become a quite special good. The power to effect
    • himself, it becomes intelligible for him to say: All that is myself.
    • splitting off, because man was to become an inward being; he had to put
    • of human living. Further important aspects of the subject will become
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture IX: Evolution of the Earth
    Matching lines:
    • a faint indication of what they were to become, the physical body of
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture X: Progress of Mankind Up To Atlantean Times
    Matching lines:
    • surrounding the separate physical forms, which in their turn had become
    • which have now become dwarfed. The animals, too, had not yet acquired
    • matter began to become harder and more solid. Shortly before the separation
    • fire which had become permanent in man, in the warm human blood —
    • undergone further changes and had become more solid. Other continents
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture XI: The Post-Atlantean Culture-Epochs
    Matching lines:
    • failed to make headway and had then become retrograde — to relinquish
    • reality, so that it may itself become an image of the eternal Spirit.
    • world. The result is that humanity has become more material, indeed
    • will become more spiritual again.
    • we shall become tolerant towards every form of truth. We come to a better
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture XII: Occult Develpment
    Matching lines:
    • will gradually become able to gain knowledge for themselves. You should
    • that your dreams become more regular and meaningful. Above all, you
    • careful attention to them. Later, you may notice that your dreams become
    • pleasure and in the deepest grief. Indeed, we become truly receptive
    • suddenly become a liar, vengeful, quick to anger; all sorts of
    • development becomes unduly absorbed in the teachings of Theosophy.
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture XIII: Oriental and Christian Training
    Matching lines:
    • have become so complex that many people violate this commandment without
    • become the rule in our social life. So begins a complete disregard of
    • retrace his steps. He will himself become plant; he will take up the
    • so that he may become a being who does not kill.
    • a transformation of the soul. In a certain sense you become clairvoyant
    • for him; his body must become as indifferent to him as a piece of wood.
    • him through life; it has become for him the wood of the Cross. He need
    • the whole planet. The Earth has become his body; he is buried in the
    • this seventh stage, Christianity has become an inner experience of the
  • Title: At the Gates: Lecture XIV: Rosicrucian Training - The Interior of the Earth - Earthquakes and Volcanoes
    Matching lines:
    • but practically, so that they become part of his everyday life. There are
    • becomes an illusion unless we look on it as an expression of the Divine.
    • into the life of the soul. Everything must become for us a symbol in
    • in this way, so that external things become symbolic pictures of moral
    • organ on which he concentrates his attention. This method has become
    • specially important in recent times because humanity has become deeply
  • Title: Pastoral Medicine: Lecture 1
    Matching lines:
    • understood will become clear during the course. We have admitted a few
    • theologians are to become physicians, or that the physicians are to
    • become in the slightest way theologians. It is purely a matter of the
    • movement must not be allowed to become an area where everything is
    • Anthroposophy must not become propaganda for quackery. Theologians
    • must not be allowed to become quacks.
    • anthroposophical physician. But the following must also become an
    • Section. There will be no progress unless this procedure becomes a
    • to consciousness, and consciousness becomes a helper, at least (in
    • relationship has become completely veiled. This true relationship
    • must be reestablished. It must become active again.
    • Again it must become
  • Title: Pastoral Medicine: Lecture 2
    Matching lines:
    • become dim. And in the same measure that the sense impressions fade,
    • the thoughts become livelier. Sense impressions can appear almost
    • their thoughts have a lively quality and tend to become more intense,
    • Then the following can take place: the person becomes unable to control
    • becomes “senseless.” Sense impressions in general fade
    • one's neighbor can become tremendously intense, so much so that the
    • touch with a priest, particularly when the fourth stage becomes
    • perception from within increases; it becomes, as it were, a larger
    • interpreters, the theological detail becomes clear to them — if
    • a man is hidden away in an office, or if such a woman becomes an
    • in bourgeois everyday life, these people become really insane, and
  • Title: Pastoral Medicine: Lecture 3
    Matching lines:
    • earlier they had become angry when others told them of their own
    • becomes independent of the physical body, of the ordinary connection
    • this etheric body becomes inwardly stronger than is the case with the
    • they enter the third stage they become really ill. At the same time
    • automatically become active in the self-healing of these abnormal
    • widely separate for some reason become entangled.
    • their actions. Now this becomes a practical question: whether they
  • Title: Pastoral Medicine: Lecture 4
    Matching lines:
    • older one becomes, the more one retains of old physical substance. A
    • — itself becomes free in the etheric body. Quantitatively it is
    • importance. It is what now becomes tremendously active as soul
    • forces that have now become free for soul activity. That is the great
    • yet freed for the soul-life. They become free at puberty, and then
    • stays fixed in the human being, it becomes permanent structure.
    • a person becomes, the less material is stripped away from the bones
    • faster so far as quality is concerned, for they actually become bad
    • twenties. Then the world becomes severe. It no longer wants to work
    • into a person; it becomes harsh. Of this strange new relation of the
    • child's own body. We become aware of it from certain pathological
  • Title: Pastoral Medicine: Lecture 5
    Matching lines:
    • them. For they become amazingly stubborn, they don't want to
    • still a good distance from the place he is heading for. He becomes
    • memory is unusually well developed. He becomes anxious. He wants to
    • only become aware of the second condition when seizures or other
    • gaps in it. This can become so extreme that the person lives in a
    • the physical body has become even weaker, along with all the other
    • these things have become extraordinarily precious to people.
  • Title: Pastoral Medicine: Lecture 6
    Matching lines:
    • not just a feeling in him: it becomes his life practice. In the
    • the playing-out of his karma. Raimund becomes obsessed by the
    • body and become pathological cases, as I showed you, in three stages.
    • This does not mean one becomes sentimental and goes calling on a
    • divine service. Healing then becomes a divine service. Things that
  • Title: Pastoral Medicine: Lecture 7
    Matching lines:
    • combustion that has become living. This fact is important for all of
    • that become fashionable are particularly important when one wants to
    • astrality of the human being can become abnormal. There we have the
    • nerve-sense system becomes united with what is being inhaled by the
    • nerve-sense process that becomes a spiritual activity. Below we have
    • activity gradually becomes purely physical, becomes altogether a
    • of nerve-sense spirit activity becomes inner activity, so what
    • remains behind of inner activity from exhalation becomes the sum of
    • becomes inner chemism — which is something different from the
    • everything that has not yet become blood; we see in it also the
    • then becomes active in the human being's earth-life between birth and
    • become blood, one sees the latent karma. It stays in the lymph. So
    • When we look with spiritual eyes at the lymph that has not yet become
    • life is dammed up. Below, in the lymph not yet become blood, we see
  • Title: Pastoral Medicine: Lecture 8
    Matching lines:
    • for instance thoughts about the macrocosm. Thinking becomes wider.
    • in the organs, the perceptions that had become dim or had vanished
    • sun and then it had become dark, foggy, but had still been within the
    • gradually come from the etheric world to which we have become
    • we can attain. It is by virtue of our past that we have become what
    • blood, one becomes aware of the activity of the moon. This is of
    • macrocosm in them — in picture form, so that it becomes a seed
  • Title: Pastoral Medicine: Lecture 9
    Matching lines:
    • Medicine is seriously ill with materialism. It has become blind and
    • experimentation in this field will now have to become careful
    • physicians must more and more become really practical individuals
    • development has made them. They have gradually become pure
    • one bursts, if another becomes a bit thicker from the bursting of
    • realized, is that one does not ever becomes a materialist if one is
  • Title: Pastoral Medicine: Lecture 10
    Matching lines:
    • thought power, how their thoughts can become powerful. In this way
    • bottom of it all? These things will simply become worse unless clear
    • gradually become untenable through their very absurdity. And those
    • I said about the breathing, that in the upper human it becomes a
    • must more and more become a part of science.
    • matter. It only becomes important if one observes such people from a
    • human being. The whole human being must become acquainted with such a
  • Title: Pastoral Medicine: Lecture 11
    Matching lines:
    • important, but it only becomes so after one has first obtained full
    • what temperature a substance becomes earth, for instance; in what
    • temperature it becomes solid, or fluid, or air. That was the
    • become well acquainted with illness and with clairvoyance.
    • body. When we become conscious in them, we are in the opposite
    • priests become more and more aware of the relation of a human being
    • When you have become
  • Title: Broken Vessels: Lecture 1
    Matching lines:
    • theologians are to become physicians, or that the physicians are to
    • become in the slightest way theologians. It is purely a matter of the
    • movement must not be allowed to become an area where everything is
    • Anthroposophy must not become propaganda for quackery. Theologians
    • must not be allowed to become quacks.
    • anthroposophical physician. But the following must also become an
    • Section. There will be no progress unless this procedure becomes a
    • to consciousness, and consciousness becomes a helper, at least (in
    • relationship has become completely veiled. This true relationship
    • must be reestablished. It must become active again.
    • Again it must become
  • Title: Broken Vessels: Lecture 2
    Matching lines:
    • become dim. And in the same measure that the sense impressions fade,
    • the thoughts become livelier. Sense impressions can appear almost
    • their thoughts have a lively quality and tend to become more intense,
    • following can take place: the person becomes unable to control the
    • becomes “senseless.” Sense impressions in general fade
    • one's neighbor can become tremendously intense, so much so that the
    • touch with a priest, particularly when the fourth stage becomes
    • perception from within increases; it becomes, as it were, a larger
    • interpreters, the theological detail becomes clear to them — if
    • a man is hidden away in an office, or if such a woman becomes an
    • in bourgeois everyday life, these people become really insane, and
  • Title: Broken Vessels: Lecture 3
    Matching lines:
    • earlier they had become angry when others told them of their own
    • becomes independent of the physical body, of the ordinary connection
    • this etheric body becomes inwardly stronger than is the case with the
    • they enter the third stage they become really ill. At the same time
    • automatically become active in the self-healing of these abnormal
    • widely separate for some reason become entangled.
    • their actions. Now this becomes a practical question: whether they
  • Title: Broken Vessels: Lecture 4
    Matching lines:
    • older one becomes, the more one retains of old physical substance. A
    • — itself becomes free in the etheric body. Quantitatively it is
    • importance. It is what now becomes tremendously active as soul
    • forces that have now become free for soul activity. That is the great
    • yet freed for the soul-life. They become free at puberty, and then
    • stays fixed in the human being, it becomes permanent structure.
    • a person becomes, the less material is stripped away from the bones
    • faster so far as quality is concerned, for they actually become bad
    • twenties. Then the world becomes severe. It no longer wants to work
    • into a person; it becomes harsh. Of this strange new relation of the
    • child's own body. We become aware of it from certain pathological
  • Title: Broken Vessels: Lecture 5
    Matching lines:
    • them. For they become amazingly stubborn, they don't want to
    • still a good distance from the place he is heading for. He becomes
    • memory is unusually well developed. He becomes anxious. He wants to
    • only become aware of the second condition when seizures or other
    • gaps in it. This can become so extreme that the person lives in a
    • the physical body has become even weaker, along with all the other
    • these things have become extraordinarily precious to people.
  • Title: Broken Vessels: Lecture 6
    Matching lines:
    • not just a feeling in him: it becomes his life practice. In the
    • the playing-out of his karma. Raimund becomes obsessed by the
    • body and become pathological cases, as I showed you, in three stages.
    • This does not mean one becomes sentimental and goes calling on a
    • divine service. Healing then becomes a divine service. Things that
  • Title: Broken Vessels: Lecture 7
    Matching lines:
    • combustion that has become living. This fact is important for all of
    • astrality of the human being can become abnormal. There we have the
    • nerve-sense system becomes united with what is being inhaled by the
    • nerve-sense process that becomes a spiritual activity. Below we have
    • activity gradually becomes purely physical, becomes altogether a
    • of nerve-sense spirit activity becomes inner activity, so what
    • remains behind of inner activity from exhalation becomes the sum of
    • becomes inner chemism — which is something different from the
    • everything that has not yet become blood; we see in it also the
    • then becomes active in the human being's earth-life between birth and
    • become blood, one sees the latent karma. It stays in the lymph. So
    • When we look with spiritual eyes at the lymph that has not yet become
    • life is dammed up. Below, in the lymph not yet become blood, we see
  • Title: Broken Vessels: Lecture 8
    Matching lines:
    • for instance thoughts about the macrocosm. Thinking becomes wider.
    • in the organs, the perceptions that had become dim or had vanished
    • sun and then it had become dark, foggy, but had still been within the
    • gradually come from the etheric world to which we have become
    • we can attain. It is by virtue of our past that we have become what
    • blood, one becomes aware of the activity of the moon. This is of
    • macrocosm in them — in picture form, so that it becomes a seed
  • Title: Broken Vessels: Lecture 9
    Matching lines:
    • Medicine is seriously ill with materialism. It has become blind and
    • experimentation in this field will now have to become careful
    • physicians must more and more become really practical individuals
    • development has made them. They have gradually become pure
    • one bursts, if another becomes a bit thicker from the bursting of
    • realized, is that one does not ever becomes a materialist if one is
  • Title: Broken Vessels: Lecture 10
    Matching lines:
    • thought power, how their thoughts can become powerful. In this way
    • bottom of it all? These things will simply become worse unless clear
    • gradually become untenable through their very absurdity. And those
    • I said about the breathing, that in the upper human it becomes a
    • must more and more become a part of science.
    • matter. It only becomes important if one observes such people from a
    • human being. The whole human being must become acquainted with such a
  • Title: Broken Vessels: Lecture 11
    Matching lines:
    • important, but it only becomes so after one has first obtained full
    • what temperature a substance becomes earth, for instance; in what
    • temperature it becomes solid, or fluid, or air. That was the
    • become well acquainted with illness and with clairvoyance.
    • body. When we become conscious in them, we are in the opposite
    • priests become more and more aware of the relation of a human being
    • When you have become
  • Title: Genesis: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • we shall become thoroughly convinced that it would be quite wrong to
    • possible for man to become man as we know him. In none of the earlier
    • being that he will more and more become in the future; that was not
  • Title: Genesis: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • Ha'arets had thus become one-sided. It had not brought with
    • trinity. To recognise this unity in trinity first becomes necessary
    • difference between the earth, as it has become in the course of
    • is today. Let us ask ourselves how man has become what he is —
    • What would have to permeate it for it to become human? Let us put the
  • Title: Genesis: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • today has become sun and earth was then a common body, a
    • again; but now it had become sufficiently mature to manifest as a
    • tendency to become vaporous, to rise upward as cloud, and the other
    • had the tendency to press upward, to become vapour; that is, the
    • become air, which of course includes watery vapour, from what tends
    • to contract and become denser. That is the second “day”
  • Title: Genesis: Lecture V
    Matching lines:
    • become of the world if all those who ought to be teachers of young
    • children were to become university professors? Those who do not
    • become professors are much better where they are than the professors
    • become stunted in their growth. Light is an element of life for every
    • Sun. When therefore the Moon (later to become earth) separated from
    • becomes possible for Beings who are already united with the sun
  • Title: Genesis: Lecture VI
    Matching lines:
    • if, with a certain intellectual superiority which can easily become
    • and whose effluence has become denser and denser until it has now
    • into our sense-world? In the sense-world it becomes the expanse of
    • form, to become crystalline. Solid matter tends towards the form of
    • become revealed as the solid matter we see around us. In the act of
    • Anyone who has become
    • which goes on around the earth wherein the watery vapour becomes
    • soul-life become knit together in a conscious unity. The human being
    • become a unity, and a unity possessing real being. What I am here
    • group, and later become directed out of a unified organism. This real
  • Title: Genesis: Lecture VII
    Matching lines:
    • externally sense-perceptible. When does a marble sculpture become a
    • of the moon nature and of the sun nature change, become different. If
  • Title: Genesis: Lecture VIII
    Matching lines:
    • as to why animals become animals, and man becomes man. That man has
    • could become man upon the earth, appropriate conditions had to be
    • prepared for his densification. Suppose that man had become dense
    • enough to become an earth being, such as he is today, on the fifth
    • to wait until the Elohim had become Jahve-Elohim. Only then could he
    • Paradise. When you realise this it becomes almost palpable that those
  • Title: Genesis: Lecture IX
    Matching lines:
    • as he has become through the Saturn, Sun and Moon evolutions, still
    • would have become too coarse had it remained with the moon. Hence the
    • in this way the earth prepared itself to become the bearer of human
    • physical. We must become ever clearer that always behind the coarser
    • have been lost to the earth. The earth would have become a desert
    • the sun within it, then he would have become a mere cipher, fettered
    • become hardened, he would have met his death. Why had man to come
    • order that he might become free, in order that he might cut himself
    • off from the Elohim, in order that he might become an independent
    • who bear that within ourselves. What would have become of the earth
    • earth would become if the moon forces were still in it, think of a
    • that the earth would have become dust, it had the tendency to become
  • Title: Genesis: Lecture X
    Matching lines:
    • of the Elohim to become JahveElohim. We had to think of this advance
    • nature which enabled him to become a mature being. Had he come down
    • “day,” he could only have become a being resembling
    • become a creature physically resembling the animals. The group-souls
    • into what he has become today. That had to be preceded by the
    • himself becomes a living being.
    • the essential thing is that man did not become a living being in the
    • to become effective, the human soul-spiritual being, which still
    • higher levels. The male-female becomes differentiated into man and
    • promotion to become Jahve-Elohim. But we must not conceive
    • has become Jahve-Elohim continues to work on man. The other part does
    • become. But in this misty element spiritual Beings hold sway. And man
    • Whether we become better men in the intellectual, feeling and moral
    • become on the earth more and more what we were predisposed to be in
  • Title: Festivals/Easter: Lecture I: Easter: The Festival of Warning
    Matching lines:
    • is beyond the earth, man is to become free of the evolution of the
    • Christ Impulse, to become free of earthly conditions.
    • which during a certain period of earthly evolution have become more
    • which becomes intelligible to us, only when with the help of spiritual
  • Title: Festivals/Easter: Lecture II: The Blood-relationship and The Christ-relationship
    Matching lines:
    • forsaken God, had become unchristian, because a situation which had
    • dug to-day. And wherever these principles, even in a mild form, become
    • to man beyond death — this is what must become reality.
    • intolerance become more and more vehement, Them developed in Rome an
    • spiritual knowledge becomes a driving force in mankind.
  • Title: Festivals/Easter: Lecture III: The Death of A God and Its Fruits In Humanity
    Matching lines:
    • spiritual-scientific concepts, for they must become actual forces,
    • it will become increasingly material and our earth-body more and more
    • And what will be the attitude of the Buddhist who has become an
    • life, man becomes master on the physical plane. But the spirituality
    • conquered death — only then did they become true Apostles and
    • If the Christian who has become an anthroposophist were to speak of
    • the nature of Christ to a Buddhist who has become an anthroposophist,
    • future time gathers men together, now it has become something
  • Title: Festivals/Easter: Lecture IV: Spirit Triumphant
    Matching lines:
    • deeply religious man, could not accept what Christianity had become
    • become something that has dragged the greatest of Mysteries into the
    • must become an inner festival, a festival in which we celebrate in
    • punishment, become part of the world-order. Michelangelo's picture
    • become a reality. This will express itself outwardly in the fact that
    • understanding of what has been created, but that we shall become
  • Title: Festivals/Easter: Lecture V: The Teachings of The Risen Christ
    Matching lines:
    • laying aside many of the conceptions that have become part of
    • Many things concerning the Mystery of Golgotha have become known to
    •  “The human body,” He taught, “has gradually become
    • knowledge through Inspiration, finally becomes Intuition.
    • Golgotha was veiled, concealed. Men had first to become firmly rooted in
    • united, too, with all the molecules which become part of the earth
    • who we are, what we have become, where we were, whither we
  • Title: Festivals/Easter: Lecture VI: Easter: The Mystery of the Future
    Matching lines:
    • and will have become a potent spiritual influence in the whole of
    • of religion and becomes universal. When on Good Friday, in the year
    • for him in scripts, or in tradition, but had become his own,
    • being may become spiritualised and once again have vision of the
    • with the utmost perfection, the physical body, the men who have become
  • Title: Festivals/Easter: Lecture VII: Spiritual Bells of Easter, I
    Matching lines:
    • It is precisely at the time of Easter that man's soul can become
    • without losing our identity, to become one with the fountain-head of
    • to light, that the wisdom of the Mysteries is now emerging to become
    • system; then we become aware of the thought flashing through us, and we
    • striven for in Atman, that the breath should become divine to such a
    • whereby the Spirit becomes victor over matter can be found in
  • Title: Festivals/Easter: Lecture VIII: Spiritual Bells of Easter, II
    Matching lines:
    • of the fire from the clouds that shone before Saul who had now become
    • that time. When we know this, they become examples for us. How can
    • through a spiritual life the hearts of men can become mature enough to
    • kindle understanding of such secrets they become fit to recognise in
    • every human ‘I’ can become. The secret is a reality — only men
    • hallowed this physical substance that it can never become what in
    • has become through the Event of Golgotha.
  • Title: Faith, Love, Hope: The Third Revelation
    Matching lines:
    • Friedrich Rittelmeyer, who had become widely known in Germany as a
    • when it can speak but not yet think, and a third when it becomes
    • become aware — there will be more and more cases of this from now
    • they are in the physical body, when this event becomes a widespread
    • during the Atlantean Age, present-day men have become accustomed to
    • related, in effect, to what Spiritual Science is to become for
    • world-conception, have become arrogant and overbearing, now say:
    • the soul incapable of faith become withered, dried-up as the desert.
    • love he, too, becomes dried-up and withered in his inner being. We
    • night; would anyone sow seeds if he had no idea what would become of
    • incarnations. Men would gradually become a race with bodies wrinkled
    • become increasingly rickety even in the very bones. Marrow will be
  • Title: Faith, Love, Hope: Towards the Sixth Epoch
    Matching lines:
    • when awake to become conscious of these bonds. Having no knowledge of
    • increasingly accentuated, so that it becomes necessary for them to
    • become familiar with the idea of reincarnation this looking back will
    • towards Anthroposophy can say: “If I become a good
    • must gradually become widespread in the sixth culture-epoch. Then in a
    • reckoning-up of his previous incarnation, has become particularly
    • once Jeshu ben Pandira, this great teacher of mankind will have become
    • individual peoples and individual men, will become the interpreters of
    • of communication, they have become even more cheerless than when they
    • accepted the spiritual in life will have become enriched, as if on the
  • Title: Forming of Destiny: Lecture 1: Spiritual Life in the Physical World and Life Between Death and Rebirth
    Matching lines:
    • men. But they will become ever fewer; and, as we have often seen even
    • universe. And if we then study man himself, and become conscious of
    • human being can become merely through the forces of heredity, through
    • should see that with these forces alone man cannot become what he is.
    • similarly ruled and regulated. In this respect — to become aware
    • time between sleeping and waking. Whether we become stronger and more
    • at all our experiences so that they become life-fruit. You see from
    • the thirty-fifth year becomes an important epoch. Till then we are, as
    • standpoint become important bearers of spiritual truths and spiritual
  • Title: Forming of Destiny: Lecture 2: On the forming of Destiny
    Matching lines:
    • will become conscious of how very much may be connected first with
    • however, in coming against something, you know of yourself, you become
    • becomes quite different. Certainly the power of knowing oneself as an
    • distinction. For if you become acquainted with a soul that requires
    • the wish to become such that everything undesirable may be wiped out.
    • becomes acquainted more slowly but more intimately with things, and he
  • Title: Forming of Destiny: Lecture 3: The Subconscious Strata of the Soul-Life and the Life of the Spirit After Premature Death
    Matching lines:
    • relations the investigation becomes very complicated; but, in reality,
    • only then does it become fruitful for us, for it can then give many
    • body, he has become more closely united with it than the Greek could
    • be, but he has, through this, become insensible to all that the
    • culture. This personal assimilation causes knowledge to become our
    • different way from what occurs when one becomes old and slowly dies in
    • and Rebirth’), something becomes important which for a long
    • idealists impelled to the heavens, who become what they are, by going
    • that those who go early through the gates of death become in many
    • is otherwise merely an abstract idea in our materialistic age, becomes
    • with our feeling, then may things become comprehensible. Certainly our
  • Title: Forming of Destiny: Lecture 4: The Connection Between the Spiritual and the Physical Worlds, and How They Are Experienced After Death
    Matching lines:
    • without by means of its physical embodiments, becomes nothing but a
    • would become barren and desolate. Man creates here in physical
    • we can say that the outer world becomes our inner world, and what is
    • now our inner world then becomes our outer world. Hence that
    • — which has become an outer world consisting of the memory of all
    • become clear to us. Over us there is a Being that in a limited sense
    • important to become aware of this: that the moment we meet what is
    • It will become of special importance in Spiritual Science that we
    • inner life ceases to flow, when we become wrinkled and things change
    • Although somewhat of an exaggeration, we may say when we become
    • wrinkled, the etheric body becomes chubby and again becomes an image
    • gradually become necessary to coin words wherewith really to grasp the
  • Title: Forming of Destiny: Lecture 5: Concerning the Subconscious Soul Impulses
    Matching lines:
    • spiritual world that which is usually the veil of memory becomes
    • ‘Now, as this man and his name had gradually become a fixed idea
    • always sure of himself, become a wrong doer. The outer cause was this:
    • he discovered a tooth had become loose and that he could easily remove
    • clairvoyance as the memory begins to decline. Then his memory becomes
    • these secret connections become evident to the person in question. And
    • becomes the phenomenon of death, the confiscation of the physical
    • Theosophy becomes a real science and brings forth definite results,
    • these will gradually become the universal conviction of humanity. Yet
    • would become aware of many things. That is the one thing. The other is
    • Beings of the Higher Hierarchies. Man becomes, as it were, a thought
  • Title: Forming of Destiny: Lecture 6: Lecture on the Poem of Olaf Åsteson
    Matching lines:
    • cannot become conscious that a psychic distinction prevails between
    • we become aware that in all the experiences of our will there is an
    • existence of which we must become aware. We are living through a
    • It is almost incredible how rigid thought has become in our time. I
    • the fact that man may even become a mystic in the depths of his soul,
    • it joy for it has become grief, through having once more to consider
    • we should become conscious of the necessity for those who wish to be
    • And it will become more and more necessary that there should be at
    • when men have begun to think, when they have become clever, and free
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • Only when this point of time was reached did it become in any way
    • possible for beings to develop which could become separate entities.
    • something in himself. The inner relationship then becomes apparent.
    • become a higher being. This will also be so with his stages of
    • now become their servant. Not many people understand the meaning of
    • man has in himself both good and evil. In the future this will become
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • effect. If we rub our hand on a tabletop it becomes hot. The warmth is
    • becomes his karma. What he himself has worked into it must have a
    • etheric body. After Devachan one has become wiser and better because
    • insanity. It will become ever stronger and more threatening, because
    • materialistic life becomes ever more widespread. Many people who now
    • being has become rhythmical. His life is an image of the sun which in
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • simply a sense of orientation has become in man the sense of hearing,
    • soul. The consciousness only becomes ‘manasic’ when its separate forms
    • must transfer one's consciousness, into the plant. Then one becomes
    • become completely separated. Then man's consciousness must be master
    • can also take place in the brain. Then man becomes a planetary spirit,
    • consciousness becomes, as Blavatsky says, rationalised. The process of
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture IV
    Matching lines:
    • feeling and thinking become separated in the case of the esoteric
    • become completely separated.
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture V
    Matching lines:
    • solid, which becomes possible through living in waking consciousness
    • condition one transposes oneself into the sea, then one becomes imbued
    • achieved, the heart will have become the organ it was intended to be.
    • rays outwards. There is an organ which will also become the active
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture VI
    Matching lines:
    • cold-blooded animals; 4. Bodhisattvas: human beings who have become
    • called the “pure” man. Man becomes impure through the fact
    • attempts to become human forms endowed with Kama. Everything in them
    • which create life. Once man was perfect and he will become so again.
    • become. What is around him in the outer world will later become his
    • later become the faculty of being creatively active. This will then
    • have become his innermost being. One who has absorbed all earthly
    • and has thus become a creator, is called a Bodhisattva, which means a
    • position to become a Pitri. The next and even higher stage, the last
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture VII
    Matching lines:
    • these lower bodies. These beings who had now become Pitris and who no
    • become completely adapted to the other. And Karma is nothing else than
    • it. Then when one utters the word it becomes an actual being.
    • will. This latter is the word become objective. So here too, following
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture VIII
    Matching lines:
    • incarnation, so that in the next they might become eloquent speakers.
    • They were intentionally trained in this way to become eloquent
    • death Christ becomes the Redeemer of materialism.
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture X
    Matching lines:
    • body of man can be seen by everyone. The etheric body becomes visible
    • (epochs) he will have become so spiritualised that he will again have
    • Earth will have become completely transformed, so that eventually
    • present physical condition. Then, as the actual Earth, it becomes ever
    • more and more physical. In the same degree however in which it becomes
    • eggs become, as it were, pearl-like drops for human evolution.
    • individual human being becomes ever more clearly discernible the more
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture XI
    Matching lines:
    • become selfless. His day-consciousness is however not yet selfless if
    • only become conscious of self within an environment. Only when he
    • gains senses adapted to a particular world can he become
    • physical world; only by degrees did he become physical and acquire
    • Physical Plane did he become conscious of self. On the Astral Plane he
    • The objects of the physical plane compel man to become selfless and to
    • When one becomes selfless in thoughts, allowing the eternal thoughts
    • occult student can already become a Master on the Astral Plane, but on
    • ‘I’ through contemplation; it flows outwards and becomes one with the
    • become his own master. Here therefore he can only live, as he actually
    • becomes free on the Physical Plane the more, through knowledge, he has
    • become incapable of error.
    • descends, the way in which Karma takes hold becomes apparent. Avidja
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture XII
    Matching lines:
    • a teaching — today it has become different, today man must find
    • becomes as visible as an object shone upon by the sun. So for the yoga
    • etheric body. When a man dies it becomes clear that the physical body
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture XIII
    Matching lines:
    • religious sense. It is much more to the point to become livingly aware
    • later they might become educators of the evil men. Again and again a
    • them as wisdom. This enables them to become the teachers of the next
    • ordered, after man himself will have become a planetary spirit.
    • in. The Devas become Devas as soon as they are able to give back again
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture XIV
    Matching lines:
    • relationships become causes which have their effects in Devachan. This
    • existence’ means, will now become clear to us. Before we descended to
    • Formerly I was not able to speak the word ‘I’, now I have become for
    • and has therefore become a mere slagheap.
    • forces which during the next Planetary Evolution will become our own
    • World-Rounds are completed. Then everything will have become human
    • wisdom. Warmth and light will then have become wisdom. Between the
    • This he could only do in a body which had become one with ... [Gap in
    • A being can however become entangled in what should actually remain
    • destined to become later what the moon is today. This must be overcome
    • strongly with what should become slag. This will come about when the
    • become an inhabitant of this body of slag, in the same way as other
    • into Avitchi. All these Avitchi men will eventually become inhabitants
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture XV
    Matching lines:
    • men were now to become masters of their destiny. For the first time,
    • will one day become active as spiritual organs.
    • individual ego. The human being had to become a self-effacing imprint
    • transformed. When the Earth again becomes astral everything will have
    • of a cathedral, this has become a part of himself. There is a
    • new element. Man becomes more involved. It is called Vedana: Feeling.
    • become old and die (jaramarana). These are the twelve Nidanas which
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture XVI
    Matching lines:
    • of the word. So that he should become what he is, all the kingdoms of
    • feelings, belong also to his past, become his Karma. We look into a
    • With more exact investigation this usually become apparent. Only those
    • would attain to this must become completely free from Karma. He can
    • become selfless will they too become something for the whole of
    • become active in the world that came forth from Nirvana, from that
    • way he becomes an ever more universal being. There is no general norm
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture XVII
    Matching lines:
    • consists. The thought in us can only become the imprint of a higher
    • people who have not yet become Chelas, feeling has great importance
    • becomes comprehensible; when he progresses to Intuition he can advance
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture XVIII
    Matching lines:
    • it when he has become an occult pupil. This part of the etheric body
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture XIX
    Matching lines:
    • nature as its other beings. On the astral plane there becomes visible
    • of cold. If however they become stronger, if their substance is
    • intensified, they become visible as light-beings. This explains why,
    • surrounding it becomes denser and thereby brighter. The added
    • people evolve and become calmer such beings no longer arise when they
    • only developed further the forward urge of Manas, he would have become
    • becomes the Second Logos. Through the descending Kama-Principle it was
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture XX
    Matching lines:
    • the course of some thousands of years will become our self is now the
    • magician with his pupils. In order to train himself to become a black
    • the moon. Thus, after a period of time, the earth could become the
    • for the evil. It becomes the physical expression for the good powers
    • their pupils to become so strong that this should prove possible, then
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture XXI
    Matching lines:
    • it, growing with its growth, if we were able to become selfless enough
    • possessing all three will in his next incarnation become a human being
    • become inwardly deepened.
    • it has become completely imbued with feeling, only then does the
    • opinion become really effective. It is the aim of the Theosophical
    • have only such thoughts we should already have become Chelas, occult
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture XXII
    Matching lines:
    • The human astral body becomes ever finer and nobler, always throwing
    • the outer world. These mirrored pictures become a new force within him,
    • now a membered organism. The undifferentiated astral mass has become
    • What has become densest of all is the physical body; the etheric body
    • Meanwhile the astral body has become ever finer and finer, so that at
    • astral body. Through the fact that the astral body has become
    • become denser. Now the two parts approach each other. From the one
    • become so slight as to be non-existent, our life comes to an end. The
    • When someone has become a Chela he begins to establish peace in the
    • projects his actions into the surrounding world and gradually becomes
    • of being becomes more and more enlarged. Let us observe the Monad
    • now become karma. This is a new life which springs up from within. The
    • regions. Then Wisdom becomes visible and reflects itself in us:
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture XXIII
    Matching lines:
    • etheric body and an astral body. The astral body had become purified
    • reached separate development, he had not yet become sufficiently
    • himself, for the power of reproduction would have become exhausted. He
    • offspring out of herself. Now Jehovah said: Man has become like unto
    • enter into them and the Earth would have become a planetary monument
    • Sixth Root-Race, when man will have become so spiritualised that he
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture XXIV
    Matching lines:
    • developed. One has become accustomed in theosophical literature to
    • third stage of consciousness he becomes able to observe what goes on
    • to the Earth. Four times already has our Earth become physical. Three
    • times will it become so again. Every such densification and
    • the soil have become parasitic, they must still always grow on plants,
    • will be there, but the whole Earth will have become a plant. Man will
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture XXV
    Matching lines:
    • make use of the physical body; the physical body becomes clairvoyant
    • become further developed in the so-called Races. Thus gradually
    • become physical. Later the physical points of force once more became
    • will draw itself together, become atomic and form the atoms of
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture XXVI
    Matching lines:
    • Buddhi and Atma. He would have become very wise, but the wisdom would
    • would have become what Jehovah had intended, endowed that is to say
    • through Jehovah some human beings would become living statues and that
    • All our present metals have only gradually become what they are now.
    • When they are heated they become first hot, then liquid, then gaseous.
    • substances have gradually solidified. When human beings become ever
    • more spiritualised, quicksilver will also become solid. At one time
    • evolution. It will become solid when the God Mercury has fulfilled his
    • Seventh Globe everything will again become formless. Everything will
    • human being, when he emerges from it, will have become a God and will
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture XXVII
    Matching lines:
    • to become the very first outpouring of substance from the sum of
    • The concept of consciousness must become a little clearer to us. We
    • astral world and has become unaccustomed to using the physical world
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture XXVIII
    Matching lines:
    • into him. He had become self-enclosed; thereby he acquired
    • Man himself had called forth the element of fire in that he had become
    • his ether body that the conditions of Atlantis had become quite
    • beings today is merely a kind of knowledge will become actual reality,
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture XXIX
    Matching lines:
    • being of our plant kingdom did nitrogen become mingled with oxygen.
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture XXX
    Matching lines:
    • should believe that one immediately becomes an adept simply by going
    • spiritual life still exists, there are those who have become healers
    • the saying: ‘If you do not become as little children, you cannot enter
  • Title: Lecture: Foundations of Esotericism: Lecture XXXI
    Matching lines:
    • be effective, becomes the recounter of allegories.
    • of Greece and Rome (Roman law) both become great just through this
    • Asia also. In Asia W, the sound V, becomes B, Wodha = Bodha = Buddha.
  • Title: Lecture: The Four Temperaments
    Matching lines:
    • the blood. That this is so becomes clear when we consider what happens
    • member of the human organization, becomes master over the others. As a
    • he will become foolishly single-minded. For the sanguine the lesser
    • and difficulty, lest his life become too easy.
    • ourselves with numerous sources of tedium, so that we become
  • Title: Lecture: The Human Soul and the Animal Soul
    Matching lines:
    • lectures will not become completely clear until the next lecture has
    • and we try to understand how it pours into, becomes manifest, in
    • the physical body becomes a combination of purely chemical and
    • produces the structure, becomes inward, inwardly and
    • to say, becomes individual, in that same measure we can say with
    • good or bad for him. He becomes insecure. And whereas the animal
    • can become spiritually more inward. The fact that the human soul can
    • become life processes. The etheric body lives within the physical
    • in which the adult human being becomes independent of his bodily
    • teaches his organs becomes manifest in the life of soul and here his
  • Title: Lecture: The Human Spirit and the Animal Spirit
    Matching lines:
    • if we consider man as he takes his place in the world, to become what
    • he is able to become through speech, through his way of thinking and
    • described as an expression of the spirit that has become soul —
    • William James — he becomes sad. If we do not recognize how
  • Title: Lecture I: Human Questions and Cosmic Answers
    Matching lines:
    • the cosmos had already deteriorated and become corrupt, people turned
    • constantly applied himself. He tried to become spiritually receptive
    • burn within him, as once they did. He has become too intellectual, and
    • becomes inward experience, and the answer rings from your own inner
    • that is based entirely upon materialism can never become religion. And
    • conception of what will become of his soul, when, separated from the
    • to an intimate knowledge of cosmic processes that it becomes possible
    • it again) — then science becomes permeated with religion; harmony
  • Title: Lecture II: Human Questions and Cosmic Answers
    Matching lines:
    • occupied had as it were become free, and that then, in this freed
    • in the element of Light, in the Light-Ether. He would become an
    • take possession of the Air, and man would become a spectre of air. In
  • Title: Lecture III: Human Questions and Cosmic Answers
    Matching lines:
    • death is manifold enough, but it becomes even more manifold,
    • outermost planet of our system, it becomes possible — in
    • then becomes part of himself when he again passes into physical
    • life between death and a new birth, become creative forces, and
    • initiation, man becomes able to experience himself purely as a being
  • Title: Lecture IV: Human Questions and Cosmic Answers
    Matching lines:
    • animal has detached itself and has become independent of the earthly.
    • become clever. We have to rely more on deposits of clay-substance
    • formation, in order to become clever.
    • an excessive inclination towards carbon causes a man to become ill
  • Title: Initiation/Passing Moment: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • looks back into ancient Greece it becomes quite a different matter. It
    • Greece seems entirely different. These things become particularly
    • truth become far more living in the modern soul than the people of
    • us, become intermingled and then clear, finally leading up to the
    • found in Dionysos! How all that becomes living in us when we confront
    • The whole Dionysian play becomes a striving out of the darkness of
  • Title: Initiation/Passing Moment: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • making him then confess that if such can become the soul's attitude,
    • initiates, become living in our souls. With them our souls call to
    • all ages become. It would take us too far afield today to refer in
    • himself in the etheric part of the brain, he soon becomes aware of
    • the etheric spiritual counterpart of the brain. The difference becomes
    • plant is transformed and becomes leaves, flower and fruit, we can say
    • namely, what it is and what it can become through the methods given in
    • destined to become spiritual leaders in the course of time develop
    • themselves inwardly, how all becomes transformed that is at first only
    • happens externally in the World, often only becomes perceptible
    • Whoever regards the evolution of mankind in this way becomes, as a
    • become a matter of course, something remarkable is experienced that
    • has become as unknown a personality as Homer is today. Man's soul then
    • initiation and become able to turn his gaze on the great figures of
    • They can then become acquainted with Buddha, Moses and Zarathustra
    • something specific becomes related to the actual physical evolution of
  • Title: Initiation/Passing Moment: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • For this, we must become familiar with the idea that everything is
    • All this becomes quite different the moment the higher, super-sensible
    • become different. It arouses in him the activity and strength to work
    • senses become linked and fused together. Hence, other modes of feeling
    • representation because they become so complicated.
    • the one case, and ugly and untruthful in the other, become linked
    • if, during super-sensible vision, one has become capable of coherent
    • such as selfishness or egoism we possess. Then our soul becomes
    • experience. When we become conscious that we are speaking in the
    • meaning. If this becomes a living feeling, then one has a living
    • and has the effect of suddenly revealing to us what we have become as
    • yourself as you ought to become!
  • Title: Initiation/Passing Moment: Lecture IV
    Matching lines:
    • in detail, he becomes aware that he must regard his body as the
    • value our experience, we should become idle, dull, and achieve nothing
    • dread of the spiritual world can be so great that it becomes the acme
    • consciousness becomes weaker and weaker, more and more toned down, and
    • doing, one will become stronger. What has already begun to be
    • who has taken the first steps toward initiation becomes conscious of
    • has now become objective and no longer subjective. I am looking at it
    • that lead one on; they become the forces of the seer. What I have
    • becomes intensely real. I refer to the scene in which
    • love it for some quality it possesses. It becomes your task to make
    • they become what is described as the world of the Higher Hierarchies,
  • Title: Initiation/Passing Moment: Lecture V
    Matching lines:
    • seem to be almost vanishing, so indistinct do they become — the
    • experience during sleep becomes different. In the ordinary experience
    • as soon as a man falls asleep he becomes unconscious, regaining his
    • initiation, the usual unconsciousness of sleep can become lit up and
    • clairvoyant becomes clear about the fundamental mood of his soul in
    • soul, it becomes possible to find something in world literature from
    • only then does it become possible to speak with reality of a contrast
    • the temporal and transitory becomes part of his very being.”
    • become so clairvoyant that there will then appear the memory picture,
    • history. Human evolution that has been experienced becomes for us the
    • worlds, has become acquainted or not with this image of the Christ.
    • relationship to Christ, he might even become a great occultist and
    • that it is so, but in anyone who does not feel impelled to become an
  • Title: Initiation/Passing Moment: Lecture VI
    Matching lines:
    • It will become increasingly necessary to lead people away from the
    • of initiation, because his soul life has become clairvoyant by his own
    • when he becomes the instigator of man's sacrifice on the altar of
    • becomes an evil being rather, what he does becomes evil — when he
    • actual super-sensible world, and we shall not easily become his prey.
    • world of the senses is, where it becomes visible, there is Ahriman,
    • become a being of the higher world. If you meet Ahriman there, this is
    • just where he becomes dangerous because he willingly helps you to
    • it that it shall become a spiritual life. That is Ahriman's deep
    • be called either good or bad, but becomes good or bad according to how
    • can just as well be good as evil, and who can become good or evil in
    • this, you make further progress in life. Then the fact becomes clear
    • death and rebirth in super-sensible worlds becomes of real, practical
  • Title: Initiation/Passing Moment: Lecture VII
    Matching lines:
    • appeared that, as the steps are taken toward initiation, it becomes
    • remarkable thing has become known about him. He once, in the presence
    • of thought, but it only becomes perception when the brain in the
    • instrument of reflection, and whenever life is reflected it becomes
    • necessity become as believing as a Buddhist; he will know that in the
    • point when, from being a Bodhisattva, he becomes a Buddha. We find
    • darkness becomes filled with light.
    • follow it up, then it becomes apparent that Buddha was sent to the
    • its hold. Because the message of this ray of spiritual light becomes
    • lectures become increasingly numerous. If free play be given for the
  • Title: Inner Nature of Man: Lecture 1: The Four Spheres of the Inner Life
    Matching lines:
    • Thought, Feeling, Will. Perception of outer world becomes an inner
    • social life that flow into the will and thence become part of the
    • thought, we become aware that also with respect to thought we may
    • forth, my feeling would become richer and richer. I can only bring
    • definite purpose — the definite impulse to become acquainted
    • to become accustomed; it is at first a sensation which may be
    • become inner world. Not as if one now carried within one this former
    • outer world, but one has the feeling it has become one's inner
    • centre of the sensible horizon, now really becomes the world, and we
    • extent we have become the world. Only imagine what a reversal of the
    • when this now really becomes the world outside, towards which
    • oneself become the world.
    • body, which thou now seest from outside, which now becomes visible to
    • physical body is what confronts one. One becomes aware that there are
    • disintegrate this physical body. One becomes aware of that into which
    • which now has become the outer world culminates in the symbol of
    • forces, spiritual forces of which we only become aware when we arrive
    • ourselves; we become different human beings in all our feeling and
  • Title: Inner Nature of Man: Lecture 2: The Vision of the Ideal Human Being
    Matching lines:
    • temptation to become a permanent spiritual being and to remain in
    • spiritual sources and spiritual depths. Thus we gradually become able
    • more and more inwardly, and thereby our inner life becomes stronger.
    • divine forces we should become a spiritual being, but this being
    • for us to become more and more as men, along the path to the distant
    • assails us to become irreligious with respect to the spirit-land.
    • transported into the sphere of space; when he becomes connected with
    • observe life between death and rebirth and become aware of the
    • become aware of this soul-nature which is so deeply hidden within us,
    • to-day, for it becomes aware that: ‘With all I know, with all
  • Title: Inner Nature of Man: Lecture 3: The Senses and the Luciferic Temptation
    Matching lines:
    • substance, But the physical body becomes permeated with 'corpses'
    • appear alive, but sink into the etheric and become opaque spiritual
    • brain or on our senses. Religious conceptions become active forces in
    • that which it is possible for man to become if he really develops all
    • becomes like the corpse of the colour. Imagine that whenever we
    • which, if it were to enter our consciousness, could become in us
    • as we are now; we should want to become spiritual beings at the stage
    • an effort for us to become man, for to reach this goal we should have
    • possibilities yet lying in man, we prefer to become angels with all
    • expression of that which has to become entirely material in us, it is
    • it becomes somewhat like a smoke-topaz, which has darker layers in
    • those which cannot work in us as yet, but they become active forces
    • acquiring knowledge, but something that can become active after our
    • evolution that this should become more and more impossible and that
    • enter into and become a part of human nature. We must become fully
    • evolution, we become conscious of the following: — We realise
  • Title: Inner Nature of Man: Lecture 4: Wisdom in the Spiritual World
    Matching lines:
    • of it in order that the wisdom transformed may become the life forces
    • become more and more conscious of the Spirit impulse. The
    • become ever more comprehensible. When we live on the physical plane
    • towards us. Here, on the physical plane we have to become
    • transformed wisdom becomes the life-force which drives us towards the
    • this manner. It ought to become a spiritual life-blood within us.
    • exercises — possibly he does not do it in order to become a
    • soul really becomes different. No one can take up Spiritual Science
    • himself with Spiritual Science, he will become more apt and capable,
    • through our previous evolution — we have not become mature
    • which becomes a kind of creative power. There we have Spirit as here
    • thought to Meditation, Inspiration and Intuition, which becomes
    • worlds and thereby becomes similar to what we have to develop when we
    • fact, must become a living impulse in us. This impulse can only be
  • Title: Inner Nature of Man: Lecture 5: Between Death and the 'Cosmic Midnight Hour'
    Matching lines:
    • expansion beyond the blue for nothing else. We now become 'at
    • recognition is that on earth we become aware of things through our
    • senses, from the outer world. In the spirit-world we become aware by
    • We become solitary; but the contents of our soul become richer. The
    • the powers of his physical body he has become accustomed to conceive
    • contained in it that by which we have become more mature, what we
    • thought. We become aware that the thought pictures in our physical
    • memories. This treasure of memory which is ours during life becomes
    • tell us how long it is since they were formed. Time becomes space: it
    • time-signature. Under these conditions time becomes the immediate
    • loved very much. Now, when after death we have become accustomed to
    • earth-life, with which we are still connected, becomes like a sort of
    • The elemental beings thereby become real to us and we gradually
    • have no body to take care of, it becomes spiritual illuminating
    • onwards to where we become at home in the spiritual world and
    • become dimmer and darker in a spiritual sense. Thereby thou canst see
    • spiritual beings less and less. It becomes increasingly the case that
    • spiritual environment becomes dimmer and more restricted. This
  • Title: Inner Nature of Man: Lecture 6: Pleasures and Sufferings in the Life Beyond
    Matching lines:
    • ourselves to degenerate in the past pleasures. We have become debtors
    • to the world. But we become aware that the transformation will take
    • become a disease if it enters another sphere. These different views
    • intimate karma, but so as not to become one-sided the tendencies of
    • the outer world again becomes active within us, that this longing
    • it enkindles a new soul-light in us, so that it becomes possible for
    • must become a force within thee, a force in thy soul, and thou canst
    • that which has given us pleasure, we have also become debtors to the
    • every enjoyment he becomes a debtor to the universe. We arrive most
    • that this force becomes will-power. Our soul thereby becomes
    • existence. We feel and experience what our value has become through
    • The world becomes ever more and
    • The point of view becomes entirely different when the things of the
    • of which become fishes, the rest perish. We look out over the fields
    • really becomes fruit and again seed in the regular course of
    • themselves and really enter into this spiritual life, become
    • advanced and which will become ever worse and worse. That which in
    • who seeks to spread abroad spiritual truths to become a cancer when
    • do in his following incarnation in order not to become one-sided. In
    • has become necessary since the Mystery of Golgotha. But because on
  • Title: Inner Aspect of the Social Question: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • surface the real inner man. We first become aware of this inner man
    • fact of knowledge: it should become an experience — an
    • becomes for him a real cosmic soul-experience. [
    • dear friends, anthroposophical activity will become for you what
    • aims must now become ever more conscious: then they will be infused
    • child becomes — but to the other person who from a later
    • life becomes fruitful only when age seeks its highest goal through
  • Title: Inner Aspect of the Social Question: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • deal which under modern influences has become centralised. What we
    • life becomes. And the impulse towards brotherhood arises when we
    • untruthful. It would become truthful only if it were hebraicised
    • that he becomes an atheist. But to come to that generalised
  • Title: Inner Aspect of the Social Question: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • to become a familiar thought for people to-day is this: not
    • he strives to become familiar with the spiritual-scientific
    • become more and more obvious that a healthy social organism must be
    • have become estranged from it, and lonely in their inner lives. And
    • capitalism. The human soul has indeed become a desert. But out of the
    • become critical of merely external representations and judgments, and
    • different social order — what might they have become, with
    • modern materialism it has become what you know it to be.
    • his death at most. Then it becomes public property. We have only to
    • modern times labour-power has become a commodity. Ordinary wage
  • Title: Second Lecture (First Scientific Lecture-Course)
    Matching lines:
    • on that side. By immersion in water the object has become lighter,
    • balance. We find the object has become lighter to the extent of the
    • body becomes as much lighter as is represented by the weight of
    • on the other hand becomes light and clear inasmuch as we are able to
    • his consciousness actually becomes more awake — awake to take
  • Title: Third Lecture (First Scientific Lecture-Course)
    Matching lines:
    • “light-rays” have become the very basis of materialistic
  • Title: Fifth Lecture (First Scientific Lecture-Course)
    Matching lines:
    • room with light, the space becomes filled with something — call
  • Title: Sixth Lecture (First Scientific Lecture-Course)
    Matching lines:
    • become united with the warmth-conditions of our environment, —
    • proneness to confuse what we become aware of through our ether-body
    • and what we become aware of through our physical body — has
  • Title: Seventh Lecture (First Scientific Lecture-Course)
    Matching lines:
    • the right becomes green. It becomes green just as a purely white
    • source of light to green, — the shadow becomes red. And when
    • one with it. It is but an incidental difference, whether you become
    • in realizing this we may also become aware of something more.
    • hand, having become hot, perceives as cold what your right hand,
    • having become cold, perceives as warmth. Before, you felt the same
    • ourselves in some way, become the sense-organ. And we dive down
    • outer air. Here once again the “conversation” becomes
    • becomes at last a mere collection of words. For in their books they
    • rate it receives an impression. This then becomes subjective inner
  • Title: Eighth Lecture (First Scientific Lecture-Course)
    Matching lines:
    • subjective. In course of time it has become part of their very
    • conclusion. What would become of it if I treated you, who are now
    • you once become aware that in the eye two things are welded
    • — only becomes the full experience of sight, in that we
    • far astray materialistic Physics goes and how unreal it becomes in
  • Title: Ninth Lecture (First Scientific Lecture-Course)
    Matching lines:
    • some material. The rod becomes, as we say, electrified; it will
    • coating thereby becomes electrified negatively. Then, as you know,
    • which has become notably fruitful in the materialistic evolution of
    • finds release, becomes to all appearances very like flowing
    • when it goes through the highly attenuated air. It becomes even
    • become luminous under their influence. Evidently, said the
  • Title: Tenth Lecture (First Scientific Lecture-Course)
    Matching lines:
    • the cross becomes visible upon the wall of the vessel behind it. I
    • revealed in that the glass becomes fluorescent when we send the
    • changes into helium, for example; so it becomes something quite
    • may become for you an essential way, not only into these phenomena
    • flowing electricity has become manifest to some extent, as a form
    • have been obliging human thought to become rather more mobile
    • thinking must in themselves become more saturated with reality. It
    • indeed; and to do this, my dear Friends, we must become aware of
    • Yet as you do so you become aware; herein is something far more
    • Figure Xb) — you become aware of the undulations. You
    • become the inner structure of our understanding of the phenomena of
    • Nature. It can indeed become so if we follow up all that is latent
    • need for the Waldorf School. In Physics especially it becomes
  • Title: Macrocosm/Microcosm: Lecture 1: The World Behind the Tapestry of Sense-perceptions. Ecstasy and Mystical Experience.
    Matching lines:
    • immediately around him. In contemplating this world we become aware,
    • substance, it soon becomes obvious that what is thus assumed to lie
    • momentarily to become oblivious to the impressions of the sense-world,
    • not be called ecstasy. In one of two possible conditions a man becomes
    • by dense darkness, but this darkness becomes filled with a world
    • state of ecstasy a man becomes aware of beings and happenings hitherto
    • reality will become evident at a later stage.
    • ecstasy. Every morning we become aware of the effects of the world we
    • microcosmic existence into the Macrocosm and becomes one with the
    • lying in bed; otherwise he cannot become aware of any such
    • into the Macrocosm and gives rise to our inner experiences, becomes
    • do not actually descend into these bodies in such a way that we become
    • of soul and our sense-perceptions. Why is it that on waking we become
    • Ego in the state of ecstasy. In the latter case the Ego becomes
    • becomes aware of this through the fact that the principle adopted by
  • Title: Macrocosm/Microcosm: Lecture 2: Sleeping and Waking Life in Relation to the Planets
    Matching lines:
    • dream would be the result; but another influence becomes evident when
    • become able to cope with his life in the physical world. What has
    • Sentient Soul. Everything connected with the Sentient Soul has become
    • become causes of interest, pain or pleasure, inspire sympathy or
    • man becomes a sleep-walker; he speaks and acts in his sleep. In the
    • relationships. The position of every planet will become the expression
    • the solar system then becomes full of significance. Otherwise the
    • planetary system becomes for us a kind of cosmic clock, a means of
  • Title: Macrocosm/Microcosm: Lecture 3: The Inner Path Followed by the Mystic. Experience of the Cycle of the Year.
    Matching lines:
    • become aware of the perfection of his physical and etheric bodies
    • before he becomes capable of penetrating into his inmost being. To
    • of shame. This feeling would intensify to such an extent as to become
    • may become, but I shall try to develop the strength that will make me
    • soul of the mystic if he is to become fit to descend into his inner
    • word, to the tapestry of sense-phenomena. Normal consciousness becomes
    • centuries, present-day man has become incapable of undergoing the
    • extinguished by the Earth's substance, for this had become transparent
    • gradually becomes capable of fearlessly approaching that spiritual
    • before the spiritual Macrocosm. He becomes more and more perceptible
    • that can be acquired by man but it does not yet become insight into
  • Title: Macrocosm/Microcosm: Lecture 4: Faculties of the Human Soul and Their Development
    Matching lines:
    • waking it becomes impossible for us to perceive or be aware of our own
    • — is transformed during sleep in such a way that it becomes our
    • in our conscious life become active during sleep; experiences are
    • transformed into faculties and the soul becomes more and more mature.
    • to continue. We see at the moment of death what becomes of the
    • We become conscious of the driving forces of our manhood when we are
    • strengthening our will we become capable of taking vigorous and
    • When we first become conscious of having absorbed Cosmic Will, Cosmic
    • We become aware that what we know in our souls as will is only
    • from the Cosmic Will becomes visible in the movement of our limbs, in
    • universe and through us, that we become mobile beings and have
    • we feel that we have become one with the Cosmic Will, that we are
    • streams into us and is so transformed as to become inwardly
    • with what is called light. We become inwardly illumined; what
    • give, only give. What should we ourselves have become if they had done
    • Macrocosm has become a true mystic.
    • give, and become able to pour out forces such as are poured
    • in a remarkable way, that what we commonly know as gratitude becomes
    • as duty becomes a feeling of infinite obligation.
    • We must also become aware of the reverse side of what has been
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Macrocosm/Microcosm: Lecture 5: The Egyptian Mysteries of Osiris and Isis
    Matching lines:
    • entails, will only become clear in the course of these lectures. For
    • teacher's thoughts and to become a kind of external object to himself.
    • had actually seen. Only in the following way can this become
    • body; it then becomes evident to him that the etheric body has a long
    • past life; as it becomes more and more definitely formed, its
    • himself in an act of spiritual vision with what he had become in his
    • essential nature of the etheric body can only become known by
    • body from within, we become aware that at that time the Earth has just
    • profusely; they become underhand, more intensely selfish than others.
    • intensity: Now you are no longer yourself; you have become a different
  • Title: Macrocosm/Microcosm: Lecture 6: Experiences of Initiation in the Northern Mysteries
    Matching lines:
    • descending into his inner being, a man becomes almost entirely filled
    • — although not for long. In the case of those who were to become
    • transmitted to him. His own Ego-force would otherwise have become
    • possible, through particularly abnormal conditions, to become
    • become aware of when we touch the surfaces of objects or feel a
    • connected with the Elementary World, had become capable of realizing
    • but it becomes more and more difficult to convey any idea of these
    • worlds. The higher the ascent, the more difficult this becomes. If we
    • worlds. Man has become the being he is because he has evolved out of
    • being, his external, bodily nature too, has become possible only
    • we are speaking now of the physical world, not of what becomes of our
    • that has formed the brain in such a way that it could become an
    • existence. In order that man could become a being able to walk
  • Title: Macrocosm/Microcosm: Lecture 7: The Four Spheres of the Higher Worlds
    Matching lines:
    • air and fire — he also becomes aware that his own corporeality
    • World this distinction becomes essentially more difficult because, to
    • we become aware of fire in the Elementary World it blends with us, we
    • becomes possible for us to take the first step towards emerging from
    • example, becomes merged in the element of fire. And we can no longer
    • become aware of his own shortcomings, his own immaturity. This
    • also be able to sustain the vision of what he may become after
    • lying in your deeper nature, then you can become a being such as the
    • his training it will then become evident that the strength of soul he
    • can become and what we ought to be. For this reason consciousness is
    • becomes thinner and thinner and finally there stands before us —
    • likeness of ourselves as we are, and by its side we become
    • aware of the other figure who shows us what we can become by
    • writer betrays how much he knows; but it begins to become doubtful
    • imperfect we are, we will never cease striving to become more and more
    • being we may have been choleric in an earlier life and may become
    • Cherubim or of whatever rank it may be. But from the moment we become
    • Reason? When clairvoyant consciousness awakens in a man, he becomes in
    • grow into the higher worlds, how he can become a citizen of those
  • Title: Macrocosm/Microcosm: Lecture 8: Mirror-images of the Macrocosm in Man. Rosicrucian Symbols.
    Matching lines:
    • By being able to hold it back. We become aware of a part of the
    • activity and functioning of our senses we become aware of the
    • Elementary World. We are a product of the World of Spirit and become
    • become aware of the world connected with our nerves. What does man
    • become as chaste as the sap of the plant when it reddens in the rose.
    • become when he masters his lower nature. We see the rose as an emblem,
    • present in normal consciousness; that we shall become capable of
    • must, of course, be experienced every day if he is actually to become
    • In anyone who practises such exercises, new organs may actually become
    • becomes filled with life.
    • Nature. We now become conscious of the Beings and their activities
    • one that is followed when a man simply becomes conscious of entering
    • development can go forward. But because man has become a conscious
    • and to-morrow we shall speak of what he becomes and what is eventually
  • Title: Macrocosm/Microcosm: Lecture 9: Organs of Spiritual Perception. Contemplation of the Ego from Twelve Vantage-points. The Thinking of the Heart.
    Matching lines:
    • feeling about the thinking that becomes possible when we have made a
    • organ becomes a kind of organ of thinking in one who achieves inner
    • But the matter becomes much more complicated when we rise into the
    • become a ‘you’, just as we say ‘you’ to another
    • person. This must become an actual experience; it is attainable in the
    • surrender of our own personality. We become more and more intensely
    • experiences, like intellectual experiences, must become the common
    • become more and more effective as time goes on.
  • Title: Macrocosm/Microcosm: Lecture 10: Transformation of Soul-forces and Stages in the Evolution of Physical Organs. Reading in the Akasha Chronicle.
    Matching lines:
    • thinking changes when from being thinking of the head it becomes, at a
    • becomes heart-thinking and his ordinary memory changes into a
    • in the spiritual world we must become one with the beings there. We
    • Memory has become an essentially new faculty. We see something
    • has become Space. Just as our own world is known as the physical, so
    • the world in which Time has become Space can be termed the Akasha
    • when viewed from the right standpoint. What would become of man in
    • inscribed at all, for there Time becomes Space; we pass from one point
    • become dangerous. He will have great difficulty if he has to recollect
    • corresponds to this faculty and what it can become a kind of clouding
    • he is today; he has become what he is, gradually and by degrees. He
    • spiritual realm. It thereby becomes intelligible that the present
    • this logic of the heart which functions in the subconscious becomes
    • active in both cases. When our Earth becomes Jupiter the whole solar
  • Title: Macrocosm/Microcosm: Lecture 11: Man and Planetary Evolution
    Matching lines:
    • becomes an active force. — In this sense certain supplementary
    • etheric body leaves it at death. It then becomes subject to purely
    • death; the latter then becomes subject to purely physical and chemical
    • Man can very easily become aware of this moral and spiritual
    • deficiency in the human soul soon becomes apparent if it is shut off
    • could become what he is today in his higher members, his physical and
    • become possible in some past age for man's physical and etheric bodies
    • itself. What is visible to the eye of clairvoyance now becomes
    • aeriform and fiery state. Man has become what he is today after the
    • warmth permeating all space and then you will feel how warmth becomes
    • physical and we become physically warm as well. The blood is warmed
    • a higher form when he becomes the future Jupiter-man. One such organ
    • It reveals itself in a germinal state and will become something quite
    • knowledge becomes prayer. Instructions in these profound matters
    • too, as well as our feeling, becomes devout when we reach the last
  • Title: Man/Being/Spirit/Soul: Lecture I: Man as a Being of Spirit and Soul
    Matching lines:
    • nature. On the other hand it has become absolutely necessary to
    • on the other, becomes clear in looking at the way the physical
    • normal experience. In order not to become lost when we reach
    • renunciation becomes an inner intellectual virtue,
    • from the sense world becomes a virtue and permeates the entire
    • to become a scientist of spirit. He has to try
    • life of images and ideas. We do not become acquainted with this
    • become quite different. This happens, above all, when, by means
    • self-observation the will becomes an instrument
    • the ordinary outlook its due in its own sphere and not become
    • have to become more and more a part of this outlook. If we
    • self-orientation and becomes gradually separated from the
    • development proceeds, it separates itself off and becomes in a
  • Title: Man/Being/Spirit/Soul: Lecture II: The Psychological Expression of the Unconscious
    Matching lines:
    • of the senses. People have gradually become convinced that it
    • it. It is the region that we have more recently become
    • become well known since the 1860's through the popular
    • become the child of all those who seek to penetrate into
    • sense world, then he would naturally become suspicious of the
    • the contrary, with repetition it becomes increasingly more
    • become accustomed to a quite different kind
    • The beat of our heart has become stronger, and
    • becomes the symbol in us of the roaring hot stove. We
    • life can be dreamed again, but it does not become logical in
    • penetrated it like a fast moving arrow it becomes active and
    • they see how it becomes increasingly full of meaning, and that
    • his dreams out of their temporality through what he has become
    • most becomes conscious for our ordinary consciousness in the
    • have assimilated and has become part of our ability,
    • would become unfit to live properly
    • on earth and becomes a seed for future lives,
    • becomes clear for the science of spirit that the human being is
  • Title: Man/Being/Spirit/Soul: Lecture III: The Science of the Spirit and Modern Questions
    Matching lines:
    • this existence which has become so complicated and the whole
    • human beings in the whole civilized world have become quite
    • he must then become aware and feel that today there are many
    • to these questions which modern life has caused to become
    • atoms and molecules on the way. First of all, we become
    • investigation is that we become aware of spirit, of soul, and
    • development of these capacities the child becomes different
    • basis of the world. We have become rather proud of ourselves in
    • latent in our soul and of which we become aware
    • experienced years before. Images become permanent in us through
    • concentration, when we want to become scientists of the spirit.
    • become what one can call a higher form of the power of memory.
    • We then become aware of something in our soul which lives in
    • become aware that these Imaginations are related to something
    • events in time now form a coherent whole. When we have become
    • become one with the outer objects. If we perform an action in
    • perceiving how we become a new person each day. For each
    • Spirit, every branch of science becomes more
    • work like this it will become a social force
    • meaning of Christianity. For what has become of the Christ
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Occult Science and Occult Development
    Matching lines:
    • inscribed into the Akasha-substance, he becomes visible to the souls
    • reading becomes very real to them, because such thoughts are
    • is capable, even before he becomes a seer, of recognising the truths
    • fear would have said: ‘Now that we have become stronger souls
    • will later on become the common property of mankind. Our modern
    • physical organ, but this knowledge can become the common property of
    • Through Anthroposophy we become able to use in the right way the
    • through such development it becomes possible for the soul to
    • can become effective only if feeling is brought into the
    • feeling become active in the brain, and build the organ that is the
    • spiritual life of our planet. We become able to behold the Beings of
    • 256–61.] by means of which he can become aware of his
    • feeling becomes gradually conscious, through this developed force
    • which would otherwise have become speech, of the so-called
    • is certainly no need to become fanatical in order to recognise the
  • Title: Lecture: Christ at the Time of the Mystery of Golgotha and Christ in the Twentieth Century
    Matching lines:
    • different nations and peoples, but because they become leaders of
    • they have become in a certain sense also the leaders of mankind as a
    • has become the messenger of Christ Himself. Just as in the times of
    • Jehovah has become the messenger of Christ — in order to
    • become freer than in former times, we shall be able, through our own
    • that which since the 16th century had become necessary for the
    • revival becomes clairvoyant vision of humanity in the twentieth century.
    • acknowledge it; we will belong to the few who will help it to become
    • more powerful, to become lasting; we will base ourselves upon the inner
  • Title: Origins of Natural Science: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • person. This feeling, Steiner says, will become the most important
    • If this ideal increasingly becomes a reality, if the efforts of
    • that time. They did not want to become estranged from the world as
    • He was therefore, as a matter of course, destined to become a
    • but a latter-day observer finds him hard to understand. This becomes
    • this realm to the divinity of thoughts; and how, there, it becomes
    • attain the spirit, then it achieves its highest form, it becomes
    • an I; through nothing, I become an I. In all eternity, I must etch
    • lead us in our exploration of the world become lame, become as
    • human knowledge. Man must become ignorant in the innermost sense in
  • Title: Origins of Natural Science: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • person. This feeling, Steiner says, will become the most important
    • the naught of the divine, and out of nothing become an I in
    • been an image of spirit, now it had become forces flowing out of the
    • become more tenuous, while the body, the external corporeal world,
    • that has become dense, has turned into force, into a complex of
    • abstractions. The soul has become even more tenuous. A third phase
    • Now, in the third phase, the soul becomes, as it were, a vessel for
    • has become still more robust. Man now denies the spirit altogether.
    • becomes possible the moment that nature vanishes from man's
    • and spirit. But it has become lifeless for us and the most certain of
  • Title: Origins of Natural Science: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • person. This feeling, Steiner says, will become the most important
    • mathematics relates to reality. Mathematics had gradually become what
    • age in which numbers had already become an abstract ads they are
    • becomes qualitative inward experience. We arrive back at a time when
    • triangle, a square, a pentagram; he becomes acquainted with the
    • his body and it becomes something abstract. He loses his
  • Title: Origins of Natural Science: Lecture IV
    Matching lines:
    • person. This feeling, Steiner says, will become the most important
    • kind of successor to Copernicus, Newton becomes the real founder of
    • difficult to come to terms with this revolutionary change. It becomes
    • clear. They become unclear not in outward experience, but in the
    • By Newton's time mathematics has become abstracted. Man has
    • easy to see if one is familiar with his works. Newton becomes ill at
    • god. Newton becomes uneasy, now that he has torn space away form the
    • vigorously that all corporeality become for him no more than a
    • mathematics had become for both Newton and Leibnitz,
    • atomizes. From this moment onward it becomes possible to dissipate
    • again into a whole. But they do not thereby become alive again, after
  • Title: Origins of Natural Science: Lecture V
    Matching lines:
    • person. This feeling, Steiner says, will become the most important
    • my eye and thus becomes my experience of light or color. It is the
    • In former ages, when what had become the content of knowledge was
    • sound, color, and warmth experience, had become, as it were, fair
    • scientific discussions that the issues become confused and there is
  • Title: Origins of Natural Science: Lecture VI
    Matching lines:
    • person. This feeling, Steiner says, will become the most important
  • Title: Origins of Natural Science: Lecture VII
    Matching lines:
    • person. This feeling, Steiner says, will become the most important
    • Inertia is something that can be inwardly felt but what has become of
    • decreases in proportion to the square of the distance. It becomes
    • mode of conception becomes generalized so far that is applied to the
    • unsuccessful to this day. Chemistry could have become a science that
    • words, become aware of an inward experience. If I completely leave
  • Title: Origins of Natural Science: Lecture VIII
    Matching lines:
    • person. This feeling, Steiner says, will become the most important
    • become illusions.
    • philosopher strove in his exercises to become conscious of the fact
    • from man, and alchemy has become the subject of derision. Of course,
    • of. All that is left is psychology, which has become confined to
    • the context of history it becomes comprehensible. The theory was that
    • become external objective chemistry was only in its beginnings. Men
    • man. Man had become an empty bag because he no longer experienced
    • points begin to show up; and psychology becomes completely abstract.
  • Title: Origins of Natural Science: Lecture IX
    Matching lines:
    • person. This feeling, Steiner says, will become the most important
    • (which leaves us in sleep) has become the subject of psychology. What
    • soul. Take physics, for example, which in recent times has become
    • chemistry has advanced too little. We have to become clear about what
    • The other point is that our psychology has become very thin, while
    • semblance, inherent in pure thinking, becomes the impulse of freedom
    • especially in the case of the nervous system — and become
    • chemistry. Due to this, a bastard science has arisen that has become
    • disappear as the last remnant of former conceptions that have become
    • continued so that he will become mature. Science will mature, if
    • become one. What physics and chemistry study in nature as the final
    • this is the second task — we must see to it that this becomes
    • the processing of the inanimate, the dead. This feeling will become
  • Title: Warmth Course: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • This may become zero. In other words, we may have empty space. But the
    • become parallel. When these are picked up by another concave mirror
  • Title: Warmth Course: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • occupied by the quicksilver becomes greater. It sinks at first, and
    • people had become unaccustomed to construct concepts about things.
    • then it becomes a matter of great importance that entirely different
    • fluid, as when ice becomes fluid — changes to water — since
  • Title: Warmth Course: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • we select any solid body and heat it, it will become warmer and warmer
    • the body begins to melt, to become fluid, the thermometer ceases
    • rising. It remains stationary until the entire body has become fluid,
  • Title: Warmth Course: Lecture IV
    Matching lines:
    • phenomena. We have become acquainted in a general way with certain
    • of modern physics and on the other, we must become acquainted with
    • conceptual life, and you will become aware that the words themselves
    • why it is not necessary to become so), it may be said that our
  • Title: Warmth Course: Lecture V
    Matching lines:
    • find it necessary to become acquainted with the ideas that underlie
    • becomes higher. We can see this on the thermometer. When the body
    • enter the higher region of human soul life. There thoughts become
    • guards against this, but the tendency to become materialistic is quite
    • inspirational ideas, he becomes able really to observe the parallel
    • brain becomes really visible. Aside from the fact that it is extremely
    • activity of the human brain has become observable. Only one is, as has
    • we become involved in nothing less than astronomical considerations.
    • fluid condition its temperature rises, and it contracts and becomes
    • increases, namely that bodies become less and less dense as they are
  • Title: Warmth Course: Lecture VI
    Matching lines:
    • experiment with heat. You will see that the pressure becomes
    • Thus it can become liquid at a lower temperature than the one at which
    • is exerted, it solidifies and the block of ice becomes whole again.
    • the bridge for thought from gases to heat. It will become clearer
  • Title: Warmth Course: Lecture VII
    Matching lines:
    • should become acquainted with the effect on methods of entering into
    • relations become negative and a negative body appears. As the
    • form, that is the sphere, and becomes a gas. If we wish to look
    • motion of the earth turns it away from the sun, a tendency to become a
  • Title: Warmth Course: Lecture VIII
    Matching lines:
    • become more and more sluggish and finally to lapse into a state of
    • in order to become a closed system.
    • body, at that instant the environment becomes jealous, if I may borrow
    • dissolved, disappears, when solids become liquids. In the gaseous
    • you begin with a definitely formed body, then imagine it to become
    • of similarity between matter and heat becomes greater and greater as I
    • Passage through the heat realm, however, where matter becomes, so to
    • indigo, and violet. On this side the violet becomes ever more and more
    • until they finally disappear. The lower arc becomes practically a
  • Title: Warmth Course: Lecture IX
    Matching lines:
    • human organization. You see that it has only to become warmer and the
    • other colors. When we can imagine the circle to become larger and
    • come back from the other end of the series and the system becomes a
    • these lectures, gravity becomes negative. We have, let us say, arrived
  • Title: Warmth Course: Lecture X
    Matching lines:
    • second body will become warmer than it formerly was. In modern physics
    • temperature) becomes red in the following order: copper, nickel, zinc,
    • them? In this way, that they become ideas within us. Now we are at the
    • dissolves into ideas, where it becomes ideas. In our ideas we
    • willing is to become a reality. We have to consider will related to
    • impossibility arises, that that which becomes non-spatial can still be
    • essentiality of form becomes negative when we follow it into man.
  • Title: Warmth Course: Lecture XI
    Matching lines:
    • spectrum is altered by magnetic forces, it becomes quite evident that
    • When form itself becomes fluid, when we have a changing form in a
    • matter itself informs us what happens to it when it becomes more and
    • matter becomes more and more rarefied, the light does pass through.
    • they become suction forces. Attention must be paid to the fact that in
  • Title: Warmth Course: Lecture XII
    Matching lines:
    • light that fall on it and thus become a visible body. I cannot use
  • Title: Warmth Course: Lecture XIV
    Matching lines:
    • realm, what we become aware of in the outer world always pertains to
    • difference which becomes active in the case where gravity is used to
    • space (see figure). We must become accustomed to thinking of an
    • here so that they become saturated with reality, as it were. Let me
    • what these chemical processes reflect from tone. And we become aware
    • old way of thinking, for it has become old, it has had its day —
    • must become fundamentally convinced that a genuine new world is
    • endeavor. These things have become urgent in our era and there is no
  • Title: Philosophy/Cosmology/Religion: Lecture I: The Three Steps of Anthroposophy
    Matching lines:
    • refer? That has to-day become an important question. We find in these
    • the warmth of the soul, has become dry, cold knowledge: and we no
    • become only a superstructure of Natural Science gained by Mathematics,
    • Religion in this way becomes the content of a Faith which is to
    • Knowledge and Faith become two separate kinds of
    • then Science will become the basis of religious life.
  • Title: Philosophy/Cosmology/Religion: Lecture II: Exercises of Thought, Feeling and Volition
    Matching lines:
    • its experience becomes free from the body. We see clearly that
    • activity which remains unconscious as such, after having become so by
    • and Inspiration and Intuition themselves, becomes abstract thought
  • Title: Philosophy/Cosmology/Religion: Lecture III: Methods of Imaginative, Inspired and Intuitive Knowledge or Cognition
    Matching lines:
    • full thoughtfulness the soul becomes filled with spiritual facts, as
    • of these cosmic essences. The physical organism of man now becomes
    • Cosmologist must become in a fully conscious way a man of past ages,
  • Title: Philosophy/Cosmology/Religion: Lecture IV: Exercises of Cognition and Will
    Matching lines:
    • In continuing these exercises of inspiration it becomes clear that the
    • later becomes so great that the whole picture of one's life's
    • which had become very abstract, which had by tradition subsisted from
  • Title: Philosophy/Cosmology/Religion: Lecture V: Experiences of the Soul in Sleep
    Matching lines:
    • Taken up into the imaginative consciousness, this experience becomes
    • becomes an unconscious philosopher, cosmologist, and God-filled being.
    • Cosmos and how he becomes one with God.
  • Title: Philosophy/Cosmology/Religion: Lecture VI: Transference from the Psycho-Spiritual to the Physical Sense-life in man's Development
    Matching lines:
    • reconstructions during sleep. Man's inner world becomes the external
    • becomes an inner world.
    • in the same way in which, in waking, they can become again the
    • recognition of the growth of the future earth-organism becomes
    • complete fusion with the spiritual beings of the cosmos now becomes
    • cosmos, which becomes less clear to the ‘spiritual eye’. On
    • In this phase she becomes ripe to satisfy with the etheric cosmos that
  • Title: Philosophy/Cosmology/Religion: Lecture VII: The Relationship of Christ with Humanity
    Matching lines:
    • experience as to become manifest in the physical world of the senses,
    • consciousness, and the Christ who lived in him, had become an object
  • Title: Philosophy/Cosmology/Religion: Lecture VIII: The Event of Death and Its Relationship with the Christ
    Matching lines:
    • comprehend it through active thought. This only becomes possible by
    • happening at the same time. A process of growth becomes something
    • pass through death and to become ready once more to help in a future
  • Title: Philosophy/Cosmology/Religion: Lecture IX: The Destination of the Ego-Consciousness in Conjunction with the Christ-problem
    Matching lines:
    • when after death man becomes conscious of his etheric organism this
    • then its significance will become part of life on earth and will
  • Title: Philosophy/Cosmology/Religion: Lecture X: On Experiencing the Will-Part of the Soul
    Matching lines:
    • become an experience of pain. The man who succeeds in raising his will
    • described. If this desire becomes so strong that the physical organism
  • Title: Lecture: Rosicrucian Esotericism: Lecture I: Rosicrucian Esotericism
    Matching lines:
    • But progress consists in the fact that more and more human beings become
    • this wisdom. Hence it has become necessary for what was formerly kept
    • to become ever more familiar with outer, physical reality. Look back
    • it will become clear. As a matter of fact, Rosicrucian wisdom has been
    • that already in that period it had become necessary to promulgate all
    • itself will become rigid. Today we are living in an age of transition but
    • theosophy, which must not remain theory but become a helping hand in
    • higher and higher stages and become more and more powerful. This
    • the forces radiate in a living play of light to become an astral-etheric
  • Title: Lecture: Rosicrucian Esotericism: Lecture II: Soul in the World around Us
    Matching lines:
    • spiritual world sees to it that nobody can become a law unto himself,
    • time from now, many individuals will become clairvoyant, but they would
    • of how the spiritual becomes manifest in each domain. Today one can
    • arise; actual pleasure becomes evident when the salt permeates the water
    • such, the etheric body has densified to such a degree that it has become
  • Title: Lecture: Rosicrucian Esotericism: Lecture III: The Nature and Being of Man
    Matching lines:
    • But the ego bearer distinguishes him from these kingdoms and he becomes
    • himself to do what is good, because it will become habit. There is
    • indeed working upon his astral body, but if doing the good becomes a
    • What happens if the ego eventually becomes able to work consciously
    • as it were to the level of the plant by day. He has become a twofold
    • if he has not yet become clairvoyant, has no organs, hence during the
    • make use of his physical senses, he becomes aware of the world around
    • this memory now becomes free. As long as the etheric body is in the
    • becomes free of the physical body and can unfold what has been inscribed
  • Title: Lecture: Rosicrucian Esotericism: Lecture IV: Man Between Death and Rebirth
    Matching lines:
    • of genuine training or of pathological conditions, someone becomes
    • and approach him in rays from all sides. Whoever becomes clairvoyant in
    • who become clairvoyant but know nothing of it. It will become less and
    • lead human beings into the spiritual world. For many who become clairvoyant
    • ye become as little children ye cannot enter into the Kingdom of
    • consciousness become. In Devachan a man's experiences are conscious, not
    • in its form you become conscious of it when you enter Devachan and you
    • that then densified to become physical man. Now, when he has lived through
    • Physical life becomes
  • Title: Lecture: Rosicrucian Esotericism: Lecture V: The Physical World as an Expression of Spiritual Forces and Beings
    Matching lines:
    • nature; it becomes more spiritual as time goes on, until finally the
    • underlies the physical creation, a great deal will become intelligible
    • sexes has it become possible for human individuality to develop, for
    • influence and thereby becomes the producer of the new human individuality.
    • physical body it becomes subject to the laws of physical existence and
    • that becomes free; the etheric body — the clairvoyant sees this
    • as such is born, it becomes free. This is an event of great significance
    • everything that from outside is to become a formative influence on the
    • life, then, the etheric body becomes free. It is the bearer of memories.
    • becomes free; a third birth, so to speak, takes place. The astral body
  • Title: Lecture: Rosicrucian Esotericism: Lecture VI: The Configuration and Metamorphoses of Man's Physical Body
    Matching lines:
    • become possible. The consciousness of human beings on Saturn was dull
    • has become fluid or “watery” goes forth as Moon, condenses
    • further and becomes a kind of secondary planet. At that time on Old
    • period, again separates and becomes a fixed star, higher in rank than
    • become backward on Old Sun, produced as human bodies structures that
  • Title: Lecture: Rosicrucian Esotericism: Lecture VII: Evolutionary Stages of our Earth before the Lemurian Epoch
    Matching lines:
    • of our earth today has become comparatively static; volcanic activity
    • they are, become retarded. Thus, on the earth itself there were still
    • have hardened to the stage of mummification. The earth would have become
    • these bodies had become so decadent that the souls would have said:
    • had gradually become so degenerate that the bodies were simply useless
    • earth was depopulated. We have heard that the bodies had become so
  • Title: Lecture: Rosicrucian Esotericism: Lecture VIII: Stages in the Evolution of our Earth. Lemurian, Atlantean, Post-Atlantean Epochs.
    Matching lines:
    • substance has become rigid. The bodies of men developed in accordance
    • influence was gradually able to become so strong that man could no longer
    • becomes evil, the worst forces of black magic are generated and evoked.
    • become physical too soon the most stunted human figures have come into
  • Title: Lecture: Rosicrucian Esotericism: Lecture IX: Man's Experience after Death
    Matching lines:
    • world that had become so dear to them. The teachers could bring with
    • who had become clairvoyant through grace; his was a premature birth
    • Golgotha first becomes radiant and clear in the fullest sense.
    • with light. Just as the objects in a dark room suddenly become visible
    • But whereas man's body becomes frail and infirm, in his real self he
    • But through Christ the corpse has become the symbol of the fact that
  • Title: Lecture: Rosicrucian Esotericism: Lecture X: On Karma, Reincarnation and Initiation
    Matching lines:
    • detected in the science of today, which has become irrevocably entangled
    • his offspring into existence, for the larynx will become a creative organ.
  • Title: The Story of the Green Serpent and the Beautiful Lily: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • are going over my works. They will never become popular; there will
    • shall have become different people; we shall then love with real,
    • in order to become.” If we do not possess this power we do not
    • himself took a great deal of trouble to become acquainted with the
    • side, and had really become Man, hence the Persians called one
    • become capable of good and evil. This world which is inserted between
    • through further development he becomes like the Will-o'-the-wisp.
    • entirely permeated with wisdom, and becomes luminous. Then the
    • become light, he then learns to recognise the highest Spiritual
    • fourth King becomes apparent — the King who is composed of the
    • forces of passion will have become so pure and noble that the highest
    • to throw into the River of passions becomes invisible, like the hand
    • because the Serpent sacrificed itself. The Self of man has become
    • becomes selfless, by a sacrifice of himself, such as was made by the
    • — into pure molten silver so that it becomes a small altar, a
    • to his lower nature and has become entirely spiritualised, then the
    • day become the highest act of man — the transformation of the
  • Title: The Story of the Green Serpent and the Beautiful Lily: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • When you become
    • into the uncleansed passions, they become fanatical; and a man then
    • become self-seeking, not to raise itself up in pride to an upright
    • Lamp. The Serpent, through the gold it had swallowed, has become
    • illumination every thing in the Temple becomes visible. In the four
    • now become visible through their own light. They are the three higher
    • Maya. The three higher principles of man now become visible to the
    • upwards, must become harmonious, must strive after the higher
    • become an open secret. The wanderers are to cross the river, must
    • recognising that man must die, in order to become.” (‘Denn
    • “To become”,
    • man becomes invisible; because the Old Woman was not able to pay her
    • debt she becomes invisible. The Ego can only be seen in the light of
    • becomes invisible if it is not purified by his Karma.
    • go through various stages of purification before he could become a
    • principles work together harmoniously in Man. He then becomes strong
    • rejuvenated; old age has passed away and everything has become new.
  • Title: Signs and Symbols: Lecture 1: The Birth of the Light
    Matching lines:
    • Persons. Christ had now become a Person, thus proving that the Divine
    • had dwelled, and henceforth this could become a constant,
    • but the Fourfoldness has become sanctified, that Holiness has
    • has dwelled among men, that it has become Personality, however, was
  • Title: Signs and Symbols: Lecture 2: The Christmas Festival as a Symbol of the Sun Victory
    Matching lines:
    • Show'st me myself, and my own heart becomes
    • the great festivals. Now they have become abstractions, and the soul
    • originally represented. What has become an external, literal word was
    • the earth was now to become its field of action, its dwelling place.
    • universe and understood that we have become human beings through what
    • the image of what the soul born in me will become.” The divine world
    • become what is called Buddhi or Chrestos, when they will have reached
    • have become so purified that they sound harmoniously together with
    • the darkness of the soul, the soul will become filled with light. In
    • this is felt again, the festivals become something different from what
    • they are today. They will become implanted in soul and heart in a
    • living way, and they will become what they are intended to be for us,
    • of the spirit will have become an everyday affair. Moreover, spiritual
  • Title: Signs and Symbols: Lecture 3: Signs and Symbols of the Christmas Festival
    Matching lines:
    • Christmas festival is a sun festival, and as such we shall become
    • thoughts toward the time when the earth had not yet become what it is
    • man had become dark. This was the beginning of his evolution toward
    • but the spiritual essence will remain with all men who have become
    • become master over death and night and darkness.
    • become the wood of the Cross, but the power to become this wood begins
  • Title: Lecture 1: Spiritual Beings in the Heavenly Bodies and in the Kingdoms of Nature
    Matching lines:
    • when he takes the trouble, at least to a small extent, to become other
    • Then the immensity of Infinity so works upon us that we become imbued
    • But as occultists we become acquainted in yet another way with these
    • earth may become visible to the outer surrounding world, to the
    • become clearer. When we set about making observations such as these,
  • Title: Lecture 2: Spiritual Beings in the Heavenly Bodies and in the Kingdoms of Nature
    Matching lines:
    • category of such spiritual beings with which occult vision can become
    • have become acquainted with four categories of nature-spirits, having
    • lies directly behind this veil becomes visible. Now, how is it, when
    • These beings are such that when man can become acquainted with them by
    • esoterically becomes aware of this, because in the spiritual world
    • become; not according to any reliance on the future, or on what we are
    • becomes conscious of his ego, he has nothing to do with them. He then
    • becomes conscious of all the conditions which his planet can go
    • planetary spirit. When I say that a man becomes one with the planetary
  • Title: Lecture 3: Spiritual Beings in the Heavenly Bodies and in the Kingdoms of Nature
    Matching lines:
    • IN the course of the two lectures already given, we have become
    • few footholds through which he can become free from himself, and
    • Probably to become free from what we call usually egoistic impulses is
    • become aware how dependent our inner world is on what we experience
    • become ever stronger and stronger, so that he feels overpowered by his
    • something to that other person; but he does not on that account become
    • he becomes fuller, he has still more, and if he performs the loving
    • action a second time he will again receive more. One does not become
    • contrary, one becomes richer, one becomes fuller. One pours forth
    • glasses to the outpouring of love, it becomes applicable; we can then
    • — a glass of water which, when it is poured out becomes ever
    • with the Spirit. Occult vision becomes aware of this when it is able
    • of fire or heat we have still to become acquainted. Thus we see that
  • Title: Lecture 4: Spiritual Beings in the Heavenly Bodies and in the Kingdoms of Nature
    Matching lines:
    • become acquainted with these spiritual beings themselves, as we have
    • externally, but detaches something which then becomes objective and
    • higher we ascend the more difficult it becomes. We must in the course
    • second stage becomes aware of what we call the category of the Spirits
    • first train itself as to how man himself becomes, in his outer form,
    • All this becomes as livingly speaking as the physiognomy of the human
    • who then become, as it were, the master-builders and foremen in
  • Title: Lecture 5: Spiritual Beings in the Heavenly Bodies and in the Kingdoms of Nature
    Matching lines:
    • gestures or its mimicry, as described yesterday — but become one
    • by means of which they have, in a certain sense become quite
    • for the higher we ascend the more impossible does it become to make
    • “We become familiar with Will, for Will is the lowest substance
    • them. The creations would become lifeless and disintegrate, if they
    • they create and which becomes a world, and it is not when they look
    • If we want to proceed further in the task before us we must now become
    • occultist gradually rises and which, when one first becomes acquainted
    • systems discuss with one another in cosmic space in order to become a
  • Title: Lecture 6: Spiritual Beings in the Heavenly Bodies and in the Kingdoms of Nature
    Matching lines:
    • they had to take the consequence, they had to become Spirits of
    • Hierarchy have become quite different beings — Luciferic Spirits.
    • which finally becomes detached, and that is the physical planet
    • Cherubim, become the bearers of light, they have now the same relation
    • these leaders of humanity. Then only do they become living to us, then
  • Title: Lecture 7: Spiritual Beings in the Heavenly Bodies and in the Kingdoms of Nature
    Matching lines:
    • words, we had to become acquainted with the various beings of the
    • The differences certainly become ever greater and greater. The
    • resemblance becomes infinitely greater if we now demand from occult
    • increases and becomes almost as complete as that between the physical
    • matter at all: Nevertheless with regard to cometary life things become
  • Title: Lecture 8: Spiritual Beings in the Heavenly Bodies and in the Kingdoms of Nature
    Matching lines:
    • with what he has become. In this way we can in a certain sense
    • the moon as a sort of memory — we have also become accustomed to
    • planets of our planetary system, can become aware of the impressions
    • physical body; so that we actually become acquainted with a completely
    • nothing but lamb; now try to find out whether the wolf has become a
    • met with until we enter the super-sensible world; there it becomes
    • the ores and the like; — in short, on the astral plane we become
    • together in order that human life might become possible on the planet.
  • Title: Lecture 9: Spiritual Beings in the Heavenly Bodies and in the Kingdoms of Nature
    Matching lines:
    • that they have become the group-souls of the animals; those that
  • Title: Lecture 10: Spiritual Beings in the Heavenly Bodies and in the Kingdoms of Nature
    Matching lines:
    • of Wisdom have become Luciferic. We have designated this
    • it were, held captive through a bearer. For a fixed star to become
    • remained behind and who have become
    • Spirits of Will or their offspring give forth that which becomes the
    • see these Spirits of Will when, having become Luciferic, they reveal
    • continue to work from the moon until humanity has become inwardly
    • of that Spiritual Being Who, when man shall have become sufficiently
    • in cosmic space. Then do we become free from that which otherwise
    • northern and the stars of our northern heavens become visible, and
    • into our hearts that it becomes a life-force within us, a living hope;
    • and, above all, will become moral energy, and really make us what we
    • man become more and more conscious that at the very beginning as well
    • consideration ought at the same time to become in us a source of
  • Title: Lecture: The Ten Commandments
    Matching lines:
    • It can become increasingly evident in such a document as the Ten
    • and great grandchildren, and their bodies will become waste. If you
    • order that your existence may become an image of My existence. For
    • but the effect of the work of spiritual beings can only become
    • and I will let the number of your days become full.”
    • That means that when the ego has become permeated with the essence of
    • physical, that will cause the number of your days to become full, that
    • this in the very first Commandment: When you become aware of this ego
    • elixirs of health. But now that was to change. The Jews were to become
    • the ego, man will of himself become a source of radiating health, so
    • that the whole nation will become a healthy people ‘unto the
    • in the right way, the body withers, becomes weak and sickly. If the father
    • becomes weak and sickly, the ego slowly withdraws itself, the son
    • becomes sicklier, the grandson more sickly and finally there is
    • their bodies will become waste. If you recognize Me in you, I shall
    • cause your body to become wasted!” Thus it was inculcated into every
    • deeds work as would your God.” It is an admonition to become more and
    • existence may become an image of My existence. For what lives in you
    • becomes necessary for man to take hold of what is outside and around
    • therefore said: “Let the ego become so strong in you that it continues
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: The Sermon on the Mount
    Matching lines:
    • him from spiritual realms, but he had the capacity to become
    • spiritual world has gradually become completely closed to man's normal
    • ancient times, could become God-imbued during states of ecstasy. While
    • become God-imbued who becomes permeated within himself with the God
    • was a rare personality. The majority of the people had become beggars
    • will become permeated with the Christ. In his heart he will thirst for
    • righteousness; he will become pervaded with godliness and his ego will
    • become sufficient unto itself.
    • Through it the ego comes into being as pure ego and becomes capable of
    • themselves, for they shall become the children of God.” This points
    • before Damascus. This will then become the normal condition for many
    • Thus, in future, Christ will become visible to mankind in the etheric
    • thought that he wished to become Tauler's pupil. But he soon became his
  • Title: Three Paths: Lecture I: The Path through the Gospels and The Path of Inner Experience
    Matching lines:
    • That the bearer of the Ego first becomes really capable of living in
    • does it mean that the bearer of the Ego first becomes really active in
    • into his life-dreams would have become immensely significant for him.
    • evolution; it was necessary because man would never have become really
    • feeling that the Ego has become incapable, out of its own powers, of
    • nothing else in the field of earth-existence, man could only become
    • become ever more infirm, more dried up; the cleavage would necessarily
    • become always greater. If man only once reaches the point of intensely
    • independently, it becomes sick and infirm and finally dies.” In
    • becomes united with the Osiris-principle (so did the ancient Egyptian
    • be united with Osiris. Then, in death, the soul becomes a piece of
    • Osiris, it becomes itself a sort of Osiris. The world outside has
    • become such that it dismembers Osiris through his enemy; that is,
  • Title: Three Paths: Lecture II: The Path of Initiation
    Matching lines:
    • Let us assume that he now becomes acquainted with another religion,
    • “When the Bodhisatva becomes Buddha in a human incarnation, then
    • would allow it to become clear to him that in another region of the
    • which becomes clear to anyone who goes through the requisite
    • these events can be won. What happened becomes clear through
    • affair of men on earth, no matter how spiritualized it might become.
    • Lucifer had become rebellious, that he had taken up a position hostile
    • to them. Thus the gods were compelled to see that Lucifer had become
    • mankind would have had to become more and more corrupt without the
    • has become the objective property of mankind. Thus everything personal
  • Title: The Mission of Savonarola
    Matching lines:
    • and see it become a reality up to the highest steps of the
  • Title: Lecture: Waking of the Human Soul and the Forming of Destiny: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • of this threefoldness really becomes clear to one only when it is
    • it were, during the germinal life but later becomes manifest as the
    • system becomes the bearer of a denser manifestation, — this force
    • Angelic Being, how united they become during sleep with the Angelic
    • Archai. But it is something which may become extremely bad for future
    • elemental Beings, if materialistic thinking, speaking, action become
    • this we carry through the portal of death, and it later becomes
  • Title: Lecture: Waking of the Human Soul and the Forming of Destiny: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • the utmost importance that we become aware that the forces of thought
    • — and what becomes effective in us as forces of thinking is the
    • become entirely abstract. Indeed, it can be said in a certain sense
    • civilized humanity. The fact that man has been able to become free he
    • thinking. Thus man had to advance to dead thinking in order to become
    • human soul life, it becomes clear to us that there is meaning in the
    • thinking had not yet been entirely paralysed, had not become entirely
    • really become a human being, had really taken upon himself human
    • Now, however, it is necessary that the truth become clear to the human
    • a term which has become almost contemptuous, have been almost
    • need only observe how external the festivals of the year have become.
    • How external the Easter festival has become for human beings of the
    • But this would become merely external if the relation with the Christ
    • more become understandable to us which in an earlier time was
    • conspicuous that people have become extraordinarily clever at the
    • earth — that the body becomes dust, but the spirit lives further
  • Title: Lecture: Younger Generation: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • but in the near future they will become ever more apparent. In the
    • become “out of date” by the last third of the nineteenth
    • that has become out of date, and yet was still alive in the last
    • the former generation and had become old. First they discarded the
    • have become unsocial. Because they no longer have any feeling for
    • humanity of Middle Europe has really become very weak-willed —
    • now, my dear friends, when it is said that thoughts have become
    • routine, the standpoint had become a crust of ice. The spiritual
    • human science, according to Nature, would have to become an artist,
    • become a teacher or adopt some other profession — that is not
    • the point. Everything which those who want again to become whole men
    • then sheer routine will dissipate and life will become human once
  • Title: Lecture: Younger Generation: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • so-called treasures of science become an accumulation, something
    • can decently assimilate what will enable them to become old in a
    • century the earth has become new for the first time. Before then
    • the once concrete Muses had become dreadfully withered ladies!
    • Nothingness. People began to sense: The earth has in fact become new.
    • have become of the earth without the Christ Event. — Suppose
    • Nothingness. It has even become impossible for theologians to
    • those who were born on earth to become the young of recent decades,
    • and the anxious question is: How can I once again become alive in my
    • become reactionaries. Nevertheless it is a fact that up to the
    • Golgotha must become a living experience again. In the Mystery of
  • Title: Lecture: Younger Generation: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • obliged to be always awake we should very soon become old-at least by
    • framework it becomes. The portly banker becomes quite an
    • also given his opinion on Anthroposophy. And now he becomes the
    • activity once again. It must become such that it fills the human
  • Title: Lecture: Younger Generation: Lecture IV
    Matching lines:
    • impulses will become gradually less decisive than the moral
    • moral intuition within the soul, when the individual becomes more and
    • experience of the Spiritual, wherever we meet it, always becomes
    • individualism. Definition inevitably becomes generalization. In going
    • when he becomes active, comes up against others. Certain of these
    • branded as “Evil.” Life becomes more complicated all the
    • finally what has arisen has become instinct, has recast itself as
    • such judgments becomes instinct. People know how they raise their
    • become instinct, and because its origin has been forgotten, it speaks
    • he had become familiar with the idea of evolution. But as he steeped
  • Title: Lecture: Younger Generation: Lecture V
    Matching lines:
    • us consider the moral intuitions of olden times. History has become
    • consistent, one would have had to become a kind of Spengler, and to
    • alternative but to wither up and become senile, not to have youth any
    • would have become an impulse carried into practice. That was one
    • other alternative was to become fully conscious of the following:
    • call upon this pure thinking which becomes pure will; it arises as a
    • back before the fifteenth century, it becomes evident that thinking
    • what is dead becomes the teacher of the living, the youthful feel it
    • certain Bible words become alive on a higher level. I do not want to
    • words. from the Bible: “Except ye become as little children ye
    • does not become like the child before puberty, one cannot enter the
    • dead thinking. Thereby it becomes alive, it comes once more to
    • written, moral intuitions not only become dumb, but actually all talk
    • language we learn in the first years of childhood gradually becomes
    • be moved by the Spirit. Then we shall become children again, that is
  • Title: Lecture: Younger Generation: Lecture VI
    Matching lines:
    • to week, from year to year. Observed in this way, the child becomes a
    • you see how in our times we have a parting of the ways! It becomes
    • love for what is to become action and deed. For however often in
    • but which fills us with confidence — this must become the very
    • in God.” Yes, in face of the child, confidence in man becomes
    • the moral becomes the religious. And in future the moral deeds of
  • Title: Lecture: Younger Generation: Lecture VII
    Matching lines:
    • capacity to become tired-out by the phenomena meeting us in life is
    • becomes dim. We feel him as it were in a fiery, luminous cloud, and
    • in such a way that this job of his had become as objective as the
    • imperative to become familiar with these moods by looking from every
    • within us and towards which we are still striving, must become fully
    • the human being did not become conscious of the way in which it came
    • become a theologian, for theology is judged in a different way. What
  • Title: Lecture: Younger Generation: Lecture VIII
    Matching lines:
    • of thought had become subject to the gravest doubts, or had indeed
    • on external conditions does not immediately become apparent. For even
    • thinking about Nature has become an impossibility for later science.
    • become dried up by the prejudice that in science one must be
    • longer listened to; they no longer found the opportunity to become
    • scientific tradition that continued to become ever emptier and
  • Title: Lecture: Younger Generation: Lecture IX
    Matching lines:
    • only in the course of time that grammar has become the present
    • They preferred, instead of being school boys and girls, to become
    • out of artistic experience of the soul. Art must become the life
    • have become free of them, and the simplest way of breaking free is
    • a mere revolt against the older generation, for then it becomes like
  • Title: Lecture: Younger Generation: Lecture X
    Matching lines:
    • arts what today has become entirely abstract and scientific, namely,
    • eighth year. Man's soul becomes different, and again it changes
    • occasion it is noticed that man's soul becomes different in the
    • while certain products of metabolism become deposited through
    • sluggishness in the organism and the physical organism becomes
    • on the body. The body withers, but the soul becomes free.
    • has become possible only by the withdrawal of Nature. To the extent
    • Nature ceases freedom becomes possible. Through his own striving,
    • emphasis is no longer placed on what the old become merely by growing
    • things must be emphasized to become intelligible. I do not wish to
    • twinkling of a thought — it has become something different.
    • This rightly named pure thinking has at the same time become pure
    • perception, it has become at the same time pure will. You hover with
    • artificially. You notice that as thinking becomes more and more an
    • becomes that of an artist.
    • become an artist in education when he finds his way into this mood.
    • the spiritual which carries thought so far that it becomes will, that
    • it becomes the innermost human impulse.
  • Title: Lecture: Younger Generation: Lecture XI
    Matching lines:
    • gradually become an insatiable glutton. It wants everything that
    • has felt becomes part of his own nature. But this living ourselves
    • humanity. Men had to become like this to find through inner effort,
    • He need not suddenly become clairvoyant; that will
    • teacher, of educator. Through study we cannot become teachers. We
    • predestined to become cleverer than he is himself. Now our task of
    • acts but through their being, have become a blessing to those around
    • because they were able to revere, after many years they become a
    • child must be given pictures capable of growth, pictures which become
    • only if we meet them in such a way that they become for us an
    • become for us? Do we judge today as humanly as this? No, for the most
  • Title: Lecture: Younger Generation: Lecture XII
    Matching lines:
    • Nature. The outer had become clearly perceptible and man is beginning
    • State, saying: Morality must be such that the State becomes
    • reins and gradually becomes entirely superfluous. It would hardly be
    • become impoverished. Yet it is of the greatest importance that we
    • experience through true knowledge of man. We really become childlike
    • happens today: “Except ye become as little children ye cannot
    • this way one does not become empty of thought. Pedagogics that makes
    • have a right Pedagogy, otherwise it would have to become a Pedagogy
  • Title: Lecture: Younger Generation: Lecture XIII
    Matching lines:
    • scientifically and verified by Nature, it becomes the ideal towards
    • If we fill our soul with what our thinking has become through Nature,
    • the dragon has become sternly objective; he meets us from outside and
    • to complete belief in the material world. As a result it had become
    • of intellectualism. Nowadays the dragon has become quite external.
    • man can again become man in a real sense. Today we dare not; for so
    • happened in modern civilization? Well, every science has become a
    • dragon. This had become so acute in the last third of the nineteenth
    • time become real, to the highest degree. When we penetrate into the
    • stand before us; for the first time it has become our essential
    • of the past because the air had become unwholesome where it was
    • nineteenth, which has developed the human being so that he has become
    • dragon must now begin, for the power of the dragon has become great!
    • it is this above all that we must set going if we want to become true
    • what becomes the chariot by means of which Michael will enter our
    • Michael if we want to become true teachers. More is accomplished for
    • but now in full consciousness, must become living again, that we do
    • become Michael's companions. And what you seek, my dear
    • become companions of Michael.
    • the child becomes our educator by bringing his message to us from the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Mission of Michael: Lecture I: The Power and Mission of Michael
    Matching lines:
    • their particular being. In regard to his head, man has become
    • position man has in the world; only then will it become clear to us
    • arises in us the tendency to become fantastic, when we yield
    • terms, the blood may become feverish. Then the human being is
    • over the rest of the organism. Then the human being becomes ossified,
    • becomes sclerotic, as nearly everyone does to a certain degree in old
    • triad and become clear about the fact that human life is the
    • This does not mean that we ourselves have to become denouncers of
  • Title: Lecture: Mission of Michael: Lecture II: The Michael revelation.
    Matching lines:
    • The Word Becomes Flesh and the Flesh Becomes Spirit
    • The Michael Revelation. The Word Becomes Flesh and the Flesh Becomes Spirit
    • evolution. Through the culture of the centuries we have become
    • had an animal form has become what is today the human head, and that
    • In a certain respect our head has become our organ of thinking. Our
    • From this it will become clear to you that this divine impulse could
    • the revealer through the night and in our age he must become the
    • become a spirit of day. For him the Mystery of Golgotha signifies the
    • by many people today. The origin of the human head has become
    • connected with the human head has become completely veiled. The human
    • Through that which Michael has become, the Ahrimanic element must now,
    • must become capable of looking at the human being in such a way that
    • with the bodily element. We must become aware that the blood which
    • of breaking down, and so forth. We must become able to see the
    • come when the flesh will again become the Word and learn to dwell in
    • man must again become spiritualized that it may be able to dwell in
  • Title: Lecture: Mission of Michael: Lecture III. Michaelic Thinking.
    Matching lines:
    • outside this atmosphere. But we have become accustomed to believe that
    • become such that, regardless of how many human beings, independently
    • Christ impulse, through its very nature, will become the same for
    • our fantasies become realities is connected with our human nature, and
    • minerals are excepted, and to become conscious of the fact that we
    • The fact that we have to become clear about the effects of Ahriman and
    • when progressive evolution begins to become retrogressive, the
    • physical begins to become retrogressive, there is room for spiritual
    • ourselves so that he sends into us the strongest forces and we become
    • if thinking were not merely an image. We must become conscious of the
    • thoughts. The moment we become conscious of this mirror character we
    • and by doing so have become weak human beings because we have
  • Title: Lecture: Mission of Michael: Lecture IV: The Culture of the Mysteries and the Michael Impulse.
    Matching lines:
    • fashion are they still contained in that which has become historically
    • pupils has remained and has become historical, first, in Greek
    • shall proceed step by step — then becomes logic in Greece, up to
    • become ripe for this in our age — is memory prepared for the next
    • they are lacking, because mankind in the meantime will have become
    • become more and more prevalent are indicated only in a few human
    • become accustomed to that which nature teaches. Most people who find
    • are not aware of it will become ever more present. Human beings will
    • coincide with nature herself. Then, as I become more familiar with
    • in this duality of his soul life. He will always become aware of the
    • The human being of the present day ought to become thoroughly
    • familiarizing himself with such a thing does he become aware of the
    • real inner mediation. And the great question will become ever more
    • clear world cognition, then we become aware of the fact that wisdom is
    • this inner experiencing that one becomes aware of the fact that,
    • dreamlike fashion — one becomes aware of the fact that something
    • Comparatively soon the human being may become aware of this arising of
    • a new reality. And also comparatively soon may he become aware that
    • for which he does not feel himself mature enough to become fully
    • understand it. But he becomes aware, or at least, may become aware of
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture: Mission of Michael: Lecture V: The Michael Deed and the Michael Influence as Counter-pole of the Ahrimanic Influence
    Matching lines:
    • is the moment when we have to become conscious of certain things, and
    • centuries, one will become aware of the fact that a quite definite
    • sub-current which prepares precisely in our time to become an upper
    • henceforth become an upper current. But if we wish to acquire a
    • that has not become Christ-permeated. This they can reach: this they
    • become convenient for human beings to think differently, that is, not
    • necessity, weakens the human head, and human beings become thereby so
  • Title: Lecture: Mission of Michael: Lecture VI: The Ancient Yoga Culture and the New Yoga Will.
    Matching lines:
    • evolution of earth humanity in a way which becomes comprehensible only
    • Matters become different in the fourth age, in the Graeco-Latin
    • the breathing process has become a different one since the third
    • become materialistic; reality itself has lost its soul.
    • is the right thing for today if we become conscious of a much more
    • become a certainty for us that with every ray of light, with every
    • soul-intercourse with the world, and this soul-intercourse must become
    • that the air of the earth has become soul-void, making it impossible
    • mankind must first become mature in order to comprehend it. At the
    • consciousness of pre-existence as a force, the air having become
    • sense processes will become ensouled again, we shall have
    • must become much more soul-like, much more spiritual.
    • become but conscious of it. If I look at a flame, close my eyes, let
    • the objective world, so mankind must become aware in the future that
    • so must it become self-evident for us to think of light as
    • consciousness, physics and people in general speak. We must become
    • would become nervously ill. And they added: Should there be such
    • have become nervous. Perhaps the Medical College has exaggerated the
    • matter a bit, but people did become nervous. Now, in regard to the
    • that which wishes to enter mankind's evolution, then one becomes aware
  • Title: Lecture: Signs of the Times: Michaels Battle and Its Reflection On Earth -- I
    Matching lines:
    • It is important today to become acquainted with the concepts of
    • evolution and progress of human life these ideas should become a
    • concepts of daily waking life. This does not become evident when
    • become accustomed to this, my dear friends. We must accustom ourselves
    • connection with the dead, but he does not become aware of it because
    • become aware of such things we need a certain wakefulness of thinking.
    • Now we know that quite a number of people will become convinced
    • “relationship' is a “core” which becomes a
    • carried out: this is the first demand if we wish to become aware of
    • us and that he loves to become familiar with that which we would have
    • reject this. But they will have to learn it; for this age will become
  • Title: Lecture: Signs of the Times: Michaels Battle and Its Reflection On Earth -- II
    Matching lines:
    • only becomes apparent if one is able to observe the differences from a
    • these beings alone had been active, mankind would have become one
    • who was to become the time spirit of the modern age that from the
    • soul dwelt in the body, and that it now becomes a nature-being, given
    • What is it that in our time wishes to become reality? Then, if one has
    • catastrophic age, our present difficult times have become a necessity.
    • into consciousness becomes aware of these facts. It would be
  • Title: Psychoanalysis: Lecture I: Anthroposophy and Psychoanalysis I
    Matching lines:
    • human beings. Today they must become aware of such
    • house, who had become nervous and was about to leave for a
    • connection must become conscious, and it must be
    • become a cause of illness.
    • man is unconsciously related, become angry and revenge
    • does the poor modern man do then, if he becomes ill from this
    • consciousness, they become therefore tormenting spirits
    • happen, for example, that someone becomes hysterically blind,
    • human relationship becomes hopeless. If, however, the patient
    • it, for it becomes ill without them. Therefore it has always
    • that man becomes ill and useless without his God, but says that
    • science that men may become aware of these things, many
    • thinking is not only to become therapy, but take the lead in
  • Title: Psychoanalysis: Lecture II: Anthroposophy and Psychoanalysis II
    Matching lines:
    • anthroposophical spiritual science. But passive waiting becomes
    • become the foundation of a teaching system. This forces
    • treatment especially to people who had become nervous or
    • had become hysterical — forgive me! — it would be
    • hardly be separated, become independent of each other. If I
    • have to show how thinking (yellow) becomes independent upon the
    • thinking, will becomes independent too (red, right), as I
    • feeling with inadequate concepts, and so he must become
    • and allowed him to become mentally deranged at exactly the
    • upward must become the milieu — not a transaction
    • begin to become absolute, men get into a blind alley, or reach
  • Title: Psychoanalysis: Lecture III: Reflections in the Mirror of Consciousness, Superconsciousness and Subconsciousness
    Matching lines:
    • can perceive ourselves without a mirror. We become aware of
    • soul. We become healthy or ill, moody or gay, not due
    • soul this sunken something works, and makes us what we become
    • observe and become acquainted with all the driving forces that
    • errors. For he cannot become aware of this in any way
    • quite new and do not resemble those with which he has become
    • descending into herself. She might not become aware of a desire
    • itself and radically. It changes so that at last it becomes
    • becomes something of which we are forced to say “it
    • has become — is a part of what is within us. Now this is
    • use of all the inner forces with which you have become
    • represents what vitalizes us, that we must become acquainted
    • attitude towards it becomes the opposite to what it has been,
    • that he becomes an expression of the qualities which he brought
    • we become in life. Only when we emerge from the physical plane
    • to become pupils again? Feeling is all that
    • admitted that one could become a composer without learning
    • study, they have become true. Then you are not far from the
    • truly worked out they become a power of perception.
    • outside of all sensation, their meeting places become
  • Title: Psychoanalysis: Lecture IV: Hidden Soul Powers
    Matching lines:
    • of death he will have become stunted, poorer in forces,
    • destructive and beneficent forces, he will become ever
    • himself becomes an objective vision. In ordinary life of
    • does not always become vision and imagination. It becomes
    • the gate of death his collective inner self becomes at once an
    • becomes at once a living vision and in this way affects the
    • becomes a power in the elemental world. This power follows the
  • Title: Psychoanalysis: Lecture V: Connections Between Organic Processes and the Mental Life of Man
    Matching lines:
    • incarnation which have now become form. Thus we
    • spiritual essentiality. The outer world becomes ever more
    • become acquainted with each single organ. He learns to know the
    • etc. Certain organs take up instead something which becomes
    • science becomes valuable only when in this way we penetrate
    • The present natural scientists become very angry if you speak
    • become spiritualized when they reach the outer surface of
    • overflowing of organic forces may become hallucinatory
    • see the human being becomes a part of the whole world organism;
    • primeval nebula, and human life really becomes a sort of fifth
  • Title: The Ego: Lecture 1
    Matching lines:
    • movement should serve to this end, that human beings become
    • the child become ten years old, and then it will reckon. It is thus
    • scientific speech — has become a speech which is only able to
    • i.e., man becomes in this way more and more capable of really
    • Everything else which one can take up as ideas today, will become more
    • the two become one, when the external becomes like the inner, then man
  • Title: The Ego: Lecture 2
    Matching lines:
    • quite different from what it has become in recent times. The Gospels
    • This old clairvoyance had to become weaker and weaker, so that man
    • from one individuality. Faculties which are to become common to a
    • in order to become ever more perfect in the course of physical
    • arise as inspirations. This had now become different in that people
    • within. I turn my gaze away from outside, and the God becomes present
    • becomes independent. Thus the life of the individual runs its course
  • Title: The Ego: Lecture 3
    Matching lines:
    • all its depths, one must become acquainted with the quite different
    • I must represent in contrast; that we in our time have become to a
    • each one thinks he must write something, when everything becomes an
    • speech which has become abstract, empty, pedantic — in contrast
    • become fully man in the astral body; but on the moon, only the angel
    • could become man in the astral body. Therefore — just as in the
    • really should become through the reception of the Christ-Impulse
    • only later has to become. And so, at this place, there should be said:
    • call to mind the whole historic world-situation. How had things become
    • order that he could become the bearer of the Angelos, had that
    • order to become the bearer of the angel, while he received the force
  • Title: Bridge between the Ideal and the Real: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • suffering.” It becomes an axiom with the Buddha, that
    • age it has however become important, far more important than
    • life. Consciousness has become more important than life,
    • earthly development which has now become the most important
    • thing was to recognise the origin of Life, it has now become
    • become a fruit which animates our next incarnation, as the seed
    • world. We should never become free. There could be no question
    • experience in our inner soul and which will only become
    • incarnation, becomes a concrete reality in the next. We
    • this results: — The one who most easily becomes a
    • person who most easily becomes a believer in Metaphysics is the
    • most easily becomes a believer in Positivistic Science is the
  • Title: Bridge between the Ideal and the Real: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • — if man could thus become conscious through his sleeping
    • become conscious that all the time there in working into his
    • earthly humanity, for it becomes clear to us that in the 5th
    • become aware, if he were intensely enough to attain Imaginative
    • become Nature in the next epoch. So we can say, to-day we
    • the Ideals of modern humanity to become the external Ordering
    • had become too mystical; and the disciples of Auguste Comte
    • on the soil of this Ahrimanic Science; and yet they become
  • Title: Lecture: Greek and Germanic Mythology: Lecture I - The Prometheus Saga
    Matching lines:
    • Now Zeus had created the human race. But humanity had become
    • Masters, and others who strive to become such Leaders. Within the
    • becomes an inventor or a discoverer, to that extent he is a
    • become more and more widespread.
    • one stage higher, his work has become one stage lower. That is a law.
    • into matter, and thereby stepped into Time. Chronos (Time) becomes the
  • Title: Lecture: Greek and Germanic Mythology: Lecture II - The Argonaut Saga and the Odyssey
    Matching lines:
    • evolution occurs, it becomes possible for new Beings, Beings who up to
  • Title: Lecture: Greek and Germanic Mythology: Lecture III - The Sigfried Saga
    Matching lines:
    • become mature, will really develop up to the level of the
    • fights at his side, and is glad that she becomes Gunther's wife. Now
    • wooing Attila's following to her cause. She becomes Attila's wife.
    • man-become-god. In the north we encounter the divine man — the
  • Title: Lecture: Greek and Germanic Mythology: Lecture IV - The Trojan War
    Matching lines:
    • them to become the leaders of mankind, on other planets. But during
    • is to become a temporal one, it occurs in the ratio of four to seven,
    • first see worldly kings, and, as the Greek colonies become
    • become “Pontius”. When Thales states that everything has
    • becomes clear what is at stake. What is it that we have to face
    • unites itself with manas, and the deed becomes conscious. You know
    • root-race will become the true sons of the Kundalini fire. They will
    • brotherliness it will become the divine love. But so long as it makes
    • which they will become ripe enough to adapt themselves to the
    • under quite different conditions become common property, but it must
  • Title: Lecture: Lecture I: Occult Signs and Symbols
    Matching lines:
    • will appear vague will later become clear and understandable.
    • methods are necessary. Then it will become evident that the
    • and spiritually, then the astral body becomes the spirit self or
    • astral body, then will his astral body become physically luminous.
    • become that being of light of whom we spoke is called the
    • will become visible, not to the physical eye, but to finer organs of
    • meditation, the light will truly become for him garments of spiritual
    • light, such as the human being will one day also become, are even now
    • will become Jupiter, Venus and Vulcan (see
    • an old man. One day Saturn will become an earth. Just as unlikely as
  • Title: Lecture: Lecture II: Occult Signs and Symbols
    Matching lines:
    • cupola. Of course, man does not become conscious of the fact that
    • then will the practical effect become noticeable in public life. I
    • becomes a force in him. In accordance with it, he forms himself.
    • meant to become. Hence it is that at a definite time, they form
  • Title: Lecture: Lecture III: Occult Signs and Symbols
    Matching lines:
    • it will become clearer how far the number one symbolizes what I shall
    • here that a man first becomes a being who knew something of himself
    • thought has become so incorporated into human thinking that whoever
    • The intellect comes steadily to the fore and men become more
    • entrance into the fourth condition a being becomes fully visible to
    • evil. This will become clear to us if we again consider human beings.
    • In their development men have become fourfold beings and thereby
    • develop their independence. They have become free through the gift of
    • become a regression if he is turned loose in life with complete
    • within him, he will become a seven-membered being, perfect in its
    • God is separated from Him and becomes manifest, the remainder exists
  • Title: Lecture: Lecture IV: Occult Signs and Symbols
    Matching lines:
    • effect on our environment. But men will progress and will also become
    • he will again have taken into himself, and his form will become
    • more with the world; thus it will become possible to represent them
    • that future time, the human being will have become self-creative. As
    • sun will once again be united with the earth. Men will become sun
    • man becomes united with the sun, he will have overcome the moon.
    • first. Later, it becomes something else. It becomes ever more
    • and his larynx will become his generative organ. What the human being
    • upwards, but from above downwards. The transformed larynx will become
  • Title: Spiritual Hierarchies: Lecture 1
    Matching lines:
    • not become something different from what it used to be, because one
    • the separate lights are visible, but their aura becomes invisible ...
  • Title: Spiritual Hierarchies: Lecture 2
    Matching lines:
    • important, but which must become important for us if we want to study
    • matter begins to become soul. And so in the true sense of the word —
    • becomes acquainted with fire, which streams towards us from outside
    • become a source of light it yields something invisible, something
    • becomes differentiated, how it divides. On one side it divides itself
    • evolution that it has become solid and the liquid was once upon a
    • lowest order, of the messengers. When night becomes day and day
    • and discontented, becomes through his depression the gaoler of
    • real devotional feeling, do they become what in the true sense of the
    • problem of humanity first becomes important for us, when we know that
  • Title: Spiritual Hierarchies: Lecture 3
    Matching lines:
    • that through them man may become an I-being, an Ego being. This was
    • only become human, in the present sense of the word, on earth. The
    • drew the inference that he too would become a god some day. It was
    • also possible for man to say to himself: ‘A man can only become
    • is sucked in, it becomes the inner Self, an Ego, of the Spirits of
    • that? They had to do it; if they had not they would never have become
    • men on Saturn. What does it mean to become men? It means to attain
    • Archangels, or Archangeloi could become human. In fact, if you could
    • The Archangels, who were first able to become human on the Sun, found
    • ‘Archai-Angels’ which, in English, has become Archangels.
  • Title: Spiritual Hierarchies: Lecture 4
    Matching lines:
    • we spoke of yesterday had not as yet become so complicated.
    • man himself, for man will also, some day, become a divine being.
    • has complete power over it, we say: this astral body has become of
    • becomes still more effective, it masters also the resisting forces of
    • or Budhi. And last of all, when the ‘I’ becomes ruler of
    • has now become the general Ruler. Thus man pushes onwards to higher
    • spiritual heights, to super-human beings, and these become ever
    • become a helper in its turn. So too in the great universal evolution
  • Title: Spiritual Hierarchies: Lecture 5
    Matching lines:
    • system and to ask ourselves: What will some day become of our solar
    • become a circle of Beings like the Thrones, Cherubim, Seraphim, which
    • planets, it becomes itself a circle — a Zodiacal circle. That
    • can be carried out, and these impulses become realities. The Spirits
    • ancient Saturn becomes Sun, is that the primeval fire changes into a
    • become like honey or tar, I will willingly allow to wander about in
  • Title: Spiritual Hierarchies: Lecture 6
    Matching lines:
    • its centre, we then get other boundary lines; the planets then become
    • something quite different, they become limits for the region over
  • Title: Spiritual Hierarchies: Lecture 7
    Matching lines:
    • becomes the centre point. We must do the same with the other heavenly
    • spirit: when the whole of it is transformed it becomes completely
    • there be trained to become priests and servants of men.
    • become an Angel. These leaders, who were born out of the ordinary
    • they needed, so that they might become Teachers and Leaders of men.
  • Title: Spiritual Hierarchies: Lecture 8
    Matching lines:
    • less than that other fact, that water can be made to become as hard
    • as a stone — to become ice. Ice is certainly water, but the
    • formed, and become differentiated from the surrounding much thinner
    • into a body, and this becomes the visible Planet. In fact, any such
  • Title: Spiritual Hierarchies: Lecture 9
    Matching lines:
    • through all the transformations it experienced later, it could become
    • their goal, then other Beings have to become the leaders and guides
    • themselves up of their own free will to become the bearers of higher
    • spiritual Beings; only then does it become possible to lead the
    • and partly of the old astrality, but that later it becomes
    • spiritualised, it has become Spirit-Self, and the whole of it is
    • that the etheric body becomes a counterpart of the astral body. The
    • Through such transmutations man becomes more and more ruler over his
    • who, because they have become rulers of their astral and etheric
    • have become men upon the earth, be enabled some day, perhaps, to
    • relation to the Hierarchies? What will Man become in the succeeding
  • Title: Spiritual Hierarchies: Lecture 10
    Matching lines:
    • earth would become a sort of deserted rubbish-heap when man had left
    • Divinity will become ever more present to us. We say to
    • certainly developed very well; but humanity could have become still
    • threefold Hierarchy, could not have had the power to become evil of
    • become a Michael, a conqueror of the Bull.’ For every symbol of
    • force which then entered into it, it will become ever more and more
    • become better. He was inspired by a better Being. This was the case
    • become one's own possession only through free will, through a
    • possible for man because he has become human upon earth, because he
    • different position. These ought really to have become men on the
    • they to become evil, they could. become so only according to the
  • Title: The East in the Light of the West: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • time it has been with us, working among us, and we may become
    • for the future of humanity. And this is that we must become capable
    • become fewer and fewer. The cross alone gives vital courage and
    • Anthroposophical wisdom, in order to become capable once more of
    • firmly rooted in spiritual life, we may become recipients of the
    • luminous than it is through its own power. A thing becomes luminous
  • Title: The East in the Light of the West: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • requisite for a person who wants to become clairvoyant in order to
    • physical brain. Thus man has to become independent of the activity
    • who wants to become a clairvoyant investigator has to undertake is
    • ego. We need not mention today what becomes of these three principles
    • able to use its elasticity and to become independent of the
    • must, if he wishes to become consciously clairvoyant, reach a stage
    • become the victim of a stupendous delusion. Such a person would wish
    • wish to express it radically, this whole outer sense-world becomes
    • life. He would then become incapable of taking part in the work of
    • become strangers upon earth, for then we should act from egoism and
    • moments in which we become rulers and lords over our etheric body,
    • Now you have become something like two personalities, you are like a
    • exists within the first, gradually becomes capable of really leaving
    • the gods. If we now become free and independent there will be a
    • Ego. It becomes visible the moment we step out of our physical body
    • if at the same moment we become clairvoyant, all the inclinations and
    • the Threshold. That which is real does not become more or less real
    • have become, because we know for certain that we can make it all
    • time. We must become Anthroposophists before aspiring to
    • the Threshold becomes something quite different from what it would
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: The East in the Light of the West: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • become living and permeated with spirit, and it has been said that this
    • life of humanity becomes intelligible only when considered from this
    • human beings — it was too slow. Man would have become hardened
    • would gradually have become a planetary body from which the men would
    • remained he would have become impervious to stimulus, he would have
    • existence. Ancient wisdom at its highest level becomes prophetic; it
  • Title: The East in the Light of the West: Lecture IV
    Matching lines:
    • sacred triad of Saturn, Sun and Moon, which had become the quaternary
    • otherwise, would have hardened and become mummified. It may be said
    • Pherecydes said: ‘Chthon becomes Gea (today called earth),
    • forms, and with the forms of physical men. Chthon becomes Gea;
    • not of course become Jehovah. It is not correct to say that Jehovah
  • Title: The East in the Light of the West: Lecture V
    Matching lines:
    • the union of these two streams in humanity will become more and more
  • Title: The East in the Light of the West: Lecture VI
    Matching lines:
    • as Apollo before the Christ could become visible and intelligible to
    • as the physical plane; they only become visible to the consciousness
    • a physical body and become man in a human physical body that had been
    • them, by the Christ, Who, as an outer being, at the same time becomes
    • the initiates he was a reality. On the other hand it had become more
    • become more and more an inner god. The Christ traverses the world in
    • becomes an inner mystical god, Whom man will gradually be able to
    • deeper descent into the soul, and it will become possible for man to
    • has become possible. Therefore we may, with regard to modern times,
    • Christ, at first a divinity external to the soul, has become a
    • to the mystical Christ. The outer god has gradually become an inner
    • Christ substance, becomes mature enough to penetrate again into the
    • such an extent that men again become able to penetrate into the realm
    • becomes gradually more capable of again beholding the other being,
    • becomes a cosmic god. He will appear in ever-greater radiance in the
    • sense world. Man's vision will become reversed. In the past Lucifer
    • cosmic god, has become an earthly god, who is henceforth the soul of
    • the earth; Lucifer, an erstwhile earthly god, has become a cosmic
  • Title: The East in the Light of the West: Lecture VII
    Matching lines:
    • descended into incarnation in a human body and has now become an
    • Luciferic influences had become so much darkened that man, at the
    • because it had become accustomed to consider true only what could be
    • order again to become clairvoyant and possess the life-forces which
    • sub-terrestrial god, Lucifer becomes a cosmic god. Man must prepare
    • experience, but in such a way that he becomes capable of recognising
    • brain. Think this over a little, and it will become evident that
    • become something quite different, by reason of the change that has
    • human soul, while Lucifer who at first was within man has become a
    • another, in the time of Christ; it becomes the story of Judas. Only
    • life becomes comprehensible only when there is knowledge of the
  • Title: The East in the Light of the West: Lecture VIII
    Matching lines:
    • men until a corresponding evolution of the Ego had become possible.
    • become the seducers of man. And we can also well understand that just
    • we speak of the Luciferic beings, we must become acquainted with the
    • they allowed men to become acquainted with the deeper essence of this
    • soul in the way that it has become today, would have had no meaning
    • only becomes what it ought to be to me when I pierce through into
    • which he becomes aware of a taste or a scent. During the Egyptian
    • himself. He only becomes visible when illuminated from without.
    • becomes apparent in human evolution. The outward an the inward
    • fructify each other; the inward becomes the external and that which
  • Title: The East in the Light of the West: Lecture IX
    Matching lines:
    • now let us conceive that which becomes our earth beginning to be
    • becomes the true number for temporal conditions. For truths, which
    • wisdom itself. The Buddha is the Bodhisattva who has become an earth
    • who then become teachers.
    • Christ comprehensible. If therefore we wish not only to become
    • of West and of East, and we must account it a holy thing to become
    • precious, he was to dwell in perfect happiness, he was not to become
    • it was then thought necessary to curse will become the centre for
    • higher and nobler our feelings become, the more nobly can Christ live
  • Title: Wisdom of Man: I. The Position of Anthroposophy in Relation to Theosophy and Anthropology.
    Matching lines:
    • Steiner becomes a teacher, counselor, and friend through advice
    • on the summit. What becomes of theosophy when it wants to reach the
    • becomes conscious of his corporeality. That is the first sense, and
    • We become aware of a third sense by realizing that the
    • relationship between man and nature has become a more intimate one.
    • We become aware not only of what things are, as matter, but of what
    • this is conditioned by the inner nature of the rose we become
    • sense of secrecy, and others. That is wrong. A sense becomes
    • become active, it must first be able to perceive the concept in
  • Title: Wisdom of Man: II. Supersensible Processes in the Activities of the Human Senses.
    Matching lines:
    • Steiner becomes a teacher, counselor, and friend through advice
    • remain in the expanding etheric body. While the sense of life becomes
    • can be said that the texture of the astral body becomes rarefied,
    • that it only becomes conscious in the consciousness soul. In the
    • eyes. If we are to become conscious of these mental efforts, however,
    • feel each one individually, but if we wish this feeling to become
    • become conscious of it, so contact is here necessary if objects are
    • strongly, until the limit is reached. When the object has become so
    • possible for the sentient body to stream out, the heat becomes
  • Title: Wisdom of Man: III. Higher Senses, Inner Force Currents and Creative Laws in the Human Organism.
    Matching lines:
    • Steiner becomes a teacher, counselor, and friend through advice
    • these facts can be fruitful when they will have become the common
    • speak, to the rear wall is that the brain has become an eye. The eye
    • becomes the retina. That is the way nature's architects work. A
    • general way, anyone can become convinced of the existence of the
    • the group soul rise to become the individual soul. It would be
    • becomes that this middle path to conviction is universally applicable
  • Title: Wisdom of Man: IV. Supersensible Currents in the Human and Animal Organizations.
    Matching lines:
    • Steiner becomes a teacher, counselor, and friend through advice
    • otherwise, that our heart, our eyes, inevitably had to become exactly
    • so they had to become more powerful if they were to fulfill their
    • comprehensible everything perceived by the senses becomes when we
    • the intellectual soul becomes active, and this cannot reach what is
    • not of his nature. He could not have become a human being if he had
    • discard these in order to become what he did. The fact that in the
    • In this way a great deal becomes clear. When we know the
    • that life through which the outer world becomes transparent and
    • currents already functioning. This becomes manifest through the
    • to each other in space. This boring in of the ego becomes perceptible
    • not evolve until after the consciousness soul had become active.
    • in the minds of men, and that the obscure becomes clear.
  • Title: Wisdom of the Soul: I. The Elements of the Soul Life.
    Matching lines:
    • Steiner becomes a teacher, counselor, and friend through advice
    • fruitful a careful study of the two psychic activities can become.
    • conclusions, those guilty of this error become entangled in
    • completely entered your soul life. Something that has become part of
    • and become visualization of the material object.
  • Title: Wisdom of the Soul: II. Action and Interaction of the Human Soul Forces.
    Matching lines:
    • Steiner becomes a teacher, counselor, and friend through advice
    • worked over within us, and become sensations. They start as
    • perceptions, then become sensations within perception, and finally
    • not have become Goethe. There the antithesis becomes patent. It is
    • next, and becomes ever richer as it is driven forward by an inner
    • development boredom again becomes impossible. More of this later.
    • (this becomes outer perception too, as in digestion). That is
    • if we are to become acquainted with this wonder drama of our soul
    • body, soul, and spirit. Everything becomes confused as soon as one
    • people have become; they confuse everything. The result in this case
    • purely spatial to something that moves in time, that becomes,
  • Title: Wisdom of the Soul: III. At the Portals of the Senses.
    Matching lines:
    • Steiner becomes a teacher, counselor, and friend through advice
    • The verdict becomes correct through our being lifted out of our soul,
  • Title: Wisdom of the Soul: IV. Consciousness and the Soul Life.
    Matching lines:
    • Steiner becomes a teacher, counselor, and friend through advice
    • thought. We saw that thought itself become poetically creative, as it
    • realm where poetic form becomes possible. Clearly, not many such
    • abundance of teeming images streamed into his soul life. We become
    • illuminate it in such a way that its content can become visible in
    • removed from them, the paler they become.
    • moment our reasoning becomes equal to the task, amazement ceases.
    • but can become conscious. Let us keep clearly in view that
    • unconscious conceptions passing through the soul life can become
    • which such unconscious visualizations become conscious. You are
    • stream of the soul life and thereby becomes visible again. Let us try
    • to assimilate all visualizations, when it becomes conscious? The ego
    • become conscious as the result of inner reflection. We learned, you
    • reflection, becomes conscious of it as such. This ego consciousness
    • become a mirror. This tallies strikingly with the facts. If the ego
    • body and receives visualizations out of the past, itself becomes a
    • religiously to become absorbed in it with the feeling of that earlier
    • (1910) it has not appeared. He was bound to become mired, and from
  • Title: Wisdom of the Spirit: I. Franz Brentano and Aristotles Doctrine of the Spirit.
    Matching lines:
    • Steiner becomes a teacher, counselor, and friend through advice
    • from our present-day habits of thought becomes intelligible by
  • Title: Wisdom of the Spirit: II. Truth and Error in the Light of the Spiritual World.
    Matching lines:
    • Steiner becomes a teacher, counselor, and friend through advice
    • manner, but to become acquainted with it in a concrete form; hence
    • become such when it is implanted in a good moral frame of mind. Now
    • world we actually become acquainted with the super-sensible world
    • become manifest later in these lectures — that side by side
    • is to become acquainted with these problems that face those who,
  • Title: Wisdom of the Spirit: III. Imagination--Imagination; Inspiration--Self-fulfillment; Intuition--Conscience.
    Matching lines:
    • Steiner becomes a teacher, counselor, and friend through advice
    • soul element, becomes something quite different, something that we
    • visualization itself and transforms it. It becomes something that may
    • that might become the content of our soul by way of the bodily
  • Title: Wisdom of the Spirit: IV. Laws of Nature, Evolution of Consciousness and Repeated Earth Lives.
    Matching lines:
    • Steiner becomes a teacher, counselor, and friend through advice
    • be locked up in it.” That is what becomes evident through
    • the remainder of his being, the part of him not freed, becomes like
    • become, is prone to conclude that he must have been something
    • course of the cultural evolution of the earth man must become,
    • can eventually become what it is possible to be in one incarnation.
    • become, in the next life and in subsequent ones, what he could not
    • become in one incarnation. This longing for ever new earth lives must
    • consistency that, through our errors, has become restless
    • never have achieved self-consciousness. He might have become aware of
    • points of contact for this work. Our communion will become ever
  • Title: Lecture: The Christmas Festival: A Token of the Victory of the Sun
    Matching lines:
    • The Festivals have become abstractions, matters of indifference to
    • higher planetary sphere to our Earth which was now to become the scene
    • children of the great universe and they said: “We have become men
    • the harmony of the universe. Man seems to become more and more akin to
    • become and what it will become.’ The divine cosmic Order was revealed
    • will change their present character and become living realities in our
    • have reached our Ideal, for Spiritual Science will have become common
  • Title: Lecture: Signs and Symbols of the Christmas Festival
    Matching lines:
    • they say to us: the Tree of the Holy Night has not yet become the wood
    • of the Cross but the power to become that wood is beginning to arise
  • Title: Lecture: The Birth of the Sun-Spirit as the Spirit of the Earth
    Matching lines:
    • Thus did the festival of Christ's Nativity become the festival of the
    • become conscious of this reality, the soul is filled with the
    • Lucifer, Christ Himself becomes the Judge of the deeds of men during
    • in Norway during the last ten to fifteen years and has become familiar
    • Thus with the coming of Christ in the Spirit, it will become more and
    • think of man's divine origin and become aware of those forces within
    • thee which are also the forces of supreme Love. Become inwardly
  • Title: Lecture: Christmas at a Time of Grievous Destiny
    Matching lines:
    • many people become a matter of habit. But if, conformably with the
    • entered earth-evolution, had become part of it. That is the
    • chariot. He becomes aware of the presence of the Goddess in her holy
    • symbolism associated with him — but this can become intelligible only
    • one day become a precious treasure, prized at their true worth. Men
    • deeper meaning, will become fully comprehensible when its place in the
    • come when the second part of the Christmas proclamation becomes
  • Title: Lecture: The Proclamations to the Magi and the Shepherds
    Matching lines:
    • old instinctive clairvoyance had already become dim. Although men's
    • universe which to us has become pure abstraction, then revealed
    • experience what finally passes through the gate of death to become the
    • as it were, into our body. We become aware of how our body is
    • becomes aware of the coming of the Being from heaven. It is the same
    • What has the wisdom possessed by the Magi from the East now become? It
    • has become our mathematical astronomy. The Magi possessed
    • The outer has become inward — the inner, outward. In the process,
    • grasped. It must be discovered anew. The Magi-wisdom has become
    • inward; it has become our abstract, mathematical science by which
    • alone the heavens are studied. What has become inward in this way must
    • birth. In our mathematics this has become pure abstraction. But the
    • outer perception. The outer has become inward, has become mathematical
    • It has become a beautiful custom to take the Christmas Tree as the
  • Title: Lecture: On The Three Magi
    Matching lines:
    • for this sacrifice. Not until the Sixth Root Race will it become possible,
  • Title: Lecture: The Revelation of the Cosmic Christ
    Matching lines:
    • the festival of the 25th of December did not become an institution in
    • Christendom by so many hearts has little by little become more or less
    • Nazareth. But for us to-day Christmas must become a call and a summons
    • all the worlds of cosmic space have become little more than a product
    • The world has become empty of the Gods. Out of this world which is
    • pictures only would one day become an actual and single event in
    • both spiritual and material, is to become visible — namely, the sun.
    • becomes visible and is known in its spiritual nature. Such knowledge
    • The Holy Night must become a reality. It is not enough to give each
    • Holy Night of Christmas becomes a reality to man he can experience the
  • Title: Lecture: The Birth of Christ Within Us
    Matching lines:
    • human being in earthly evolution to-day can become conscious of the
    • What this implies will become clear from the lecture to-day.
    • Figure, a living Being, had not become such intense reality that he
    • a corpse in cosmic space — the soul having become the prey of Ahriman
    • sun and has become a child of the sun, so will earth-evolution, imbued
    • becomes the Christmas Tree that will illumine all evolution in ages of
  • Title: Christ Impulse: Lecture 1: The Sphere of the Bodhisattvas
    Matching lines:
    • of civilisation, has it become possible to speak in the form of pure
    • conscience, which will become greater and greater as time goes on. He
    • If this Bodhisattva was really to become the Buddha of the fourth
    • fully developed, man will, by its means, gradually become sufficiently
    • power of vision on the sentient soul, will at a higher stage become
    • spiritual soul, becomes logical thinking. This music came forth from a
    • anyone become the “pupil” of this Being?
    • when they become Buddhas they ascend to the Plane of Nirvana.
    • become Teachers of humanity. There they meet, — coming down to
    • Christ. They then become pupils of Christ. A Being such as He, is
    • qualities instilled into them by the Bodhisattvas, they will become
  • Title: Christ Impulse: Lecture 2: The Law of Karma with Respect to the Details of Life
    Matching lines:
    • those interested or likely to become interested for the purpose of
    • Anthroposophy will only become a life-factor when we can apply this
    • general doctrine to the different experiences of life, when we become
    • something remarkable will become evident, The soul-experiences, the
    • arise which interfere with the law. We do not become acquainted with
    • becomes a law of life; and if we have knowledge of the law, we can
    • become his adviser. But we can only give the right advice if we know
    • regard the law of karma as a law of life it may become an influence in
    • life, we can learn to become counselors.
    • permeates the soul and, as life goes on, it becomes transformed. In
    • I have often mentioned how helpful it is to one who wishes to become
    • the wine have become ‘Fidgety Phils’; their astral bodies
    • — could not have their glass of red wine, have now become stable
    • these things can pass over into and become part of life's daily round;
    • not realised to-day. It has become the custom to look down on these
    • It is of immense importance that Anthroposophy should become aware of
    • can only call forth a moral pain, may become a physical pain in the
    • become conscious in the right way of how it can be strengthened, our
    • life-kernel will become stronger and stronger. In this way we can
    • strengthening life. Then only will it become what it ought to be, the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Christ Impulse: Lecture 3: The Entrance of the Christ-Being into the Evolution of Humanity
    Matching lines:
    • which had to become more and more intensified in the course of their
    • Saturn, Sun and Moon ages, and then only did it become the structure
    • etheric body and physical body) and he has become more entangled in
    • enabled him to become a free being, able to act in accordance with his
    • from the side of the gods: ‘Man has become as one of us!’
    • and true judgment. Illness will become the foundation for more
    • We have said that man has become more entangled in matter, less
    • connection with the spiritual world and become completely one with the
    • Godhead expected from him if he was to become a self-conscious ego.
    • then become; so that out of the spiritual worlds man heard sounding
    • torch, showing man what he had not become. He had to submit himself to
    • that law, with all he had become. Man could not at first have
    • submitted to the Ten Commandments, because he had become lacking in
    • become what it was to be, when that ego takes into itself the great
    • no longer bestowed upon them. They had become poor in spirit.
    • ‘Unhappy were those who had become poor in the dark age, who had
    • become beggars as regard the spirit. They can now become blessed, the
    • Now what had the astral body become through the luciferic influence?
    • It had become less perfect than before. It had been given the
    • he becomes happy or blessed. ‘Blessed will he be who makes his
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Christ Impulse: Lecture 4: The Sermon on the Mount
    Matching lines:
    • time when the perception of man had become limited to the physical
    • as such had to become conscious of its being if evolution was to go
    • might become what he was to be, at that time a body had to be
    • the generations, become the proper ego-vehicle for the high being who
    • become such that when man was now outside himself he did not ascend to
    • had become different at the time when man was to find the way into the
    • condition in which you can become aware of the Spiritual worlds; the
    • become rich in the spirit, for these are the very ones who will
    • come when blessed or God-filled are those who have become beggars in
    • he becomes conscious of this ego, when he tames and balances what was
    • physical body has now become poor as regards the inner possession of
    • As regards the etheric body, through which man becomes conscious of
    • become a real ego, one to whom the earth mission is then allotted as
    • the outpouring of human brotherly love — which becomes universal
    • attain full consciousness in the spiritual soul where it first becomes
    • is pure and unalloyed; only here can it become conscious of itself.
    • Christ-Impulse. And those who take up the Christ-Impulse will become
    • become the sons of God, in that they will bring down the spirit from
    • become possible. For during the important times that will follow after
    • become visible. A certain number of people will develop etheric
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Christ Impulse: Lecture 5: Correspondences Between the Microcosm and the Macrocosm
    Matching lines:
    • will once more become one, that the duality will again become a unity,
    • the Sun and Earth. This polarity will some day become a unity in the
    • in man between head and limbs will also some day become unity,
    • it did not fully descend into the material. It has certainly become
    • more spiritual form. Thus a spiritual stage has become material. The
    • become material, it has not done so as regards its form, for it still
    • are so many men whose brains are so pliant that they have become
    • human being as such might develop. The earth was not to become as
    • dense as it must have become if it had retained the Moon within it.
  • Title: Christ Impulse: Lecture 6: The Birth of Conscience
    Matching lines:
    • to some extent become accustomed to the conceptions of a Spiritual
    • Spiritual world. He must gradually learn to become acquainted with
    • that will become a thing of the past later on, just as have the
    • things into himself from without must disappear, and as he becomes
    • It is a very great thing to become aware of these distinctions for
    • Romans quite familiar with it, it had then become a word in general
    • Christ-Event, in that the soul will become capable of perceiving the
  • Title: Christ Impulse: Lecture 7: The Further Development of Conscience
    Matching lines:
    • lead us to a sort of prevision of what this movement should become in
    • world around him with understanding, become aware of one thing. He
    • God, who did not actually become man, who did not descend so far as
    • regions, but having descended to earth and become man; but it never
    • if it should become an instrument for the understanding of
    • some way they will learn to contemplate their deed; they will become
    • done, and I can never become perfect until I have made that
    • developing, eventually become? How does conscience stand, if we regard
    • — through dwelling on these we shall become good Theosophists. It
  • Title: Life Between ... I: Investigations Into Life Between Death and Rebirth 1
    Matching lines:
    • Reading these descriptions, it becomes clear that excarnated souls need
    • become aware that the preservation of our consciousness depends upon
    • continues to live in man, in him who has not only become flesh in a
    • physical sense, but who has become flesh in a Christian sense, and
    • that means to have become an “I.” The possibility of
  • Title: Life Between ... II: Investigations Into Life Between Death and Rebirth 2
    Matching lines:
    • Reading these descriptions, it becomes clear that excarnated souls need
    • readily recognize him. As time goes on this becomes more difficult,
    • most readily understandable, namely, that after awhile we become
    • interest becomes more and more cosmic. Whereas previously we absorbed
    • becomes exceedingly difficult to establish a connection with the
    • become children in relation to the spiritual life during the second
    • does Goethe make use of the expression, “to become young”
    • that at spiritual birth one becomes young. In fact, the more we look
  • Title: Life Between ... III: Mans Journey Through the Planetary Spheres
    Matching lines:
    • Reading these descriptions, it becomes clear that excarnated souls need
    • passions, no pain or suffering — for if pain becomes so intense
    • ego-consciousness develops and becomes strong in a child. Suppose he
    • after such a thing happens. In other words, the child becomes aware
    • your hand in water you become aware of your hand on all sides. When
    • obtained. Now people are apt to believe that if someone has become
    • position of the Moon then becomes his outermost boundary. When that
    • A difference becomes apparent when different individuals are
    • difference, and it becomes evident when the men in question pass into
    • of kamaloca is over, a man becomes aware of those who were near him
    • other beings. A man with an immoral disposition becomes a hermit
    • whose ideas are the outcome of purified will, becomes a sociable
    • becomes a hermit, an isolated spirit, is working at the destruction
    • utterances have become an integral part of Christianity shows clearly
    • become fit to receive forces from the sphere where Christ came to the
    • etheric body will become less and less capable of drawing from the
    • life that these forces can become active in us when, between death
    • “The more conscious I become that I am born out of the
    • being I can become.” One who knows how to say this prayer from
    • the depths of the soul may also hope that it will become in him a
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Life Between ... IV: Recent Results of Occult Investigation Into Life
    Matching lines:
    • Reading these descriptions, it becomes clear that excarnated souls need
    • becomes acquainted with the beings of that sphere. A man who brings a
    • he brings. He who has something to bring becomes a social being, and
    • disposition of soul we have acquired, the more social we become in
    • and rebirth when we become Sun beings. But now something further is
    • Who came down and through the Mystery of Golgotha has become the
    • there, then in the Sun sphere we become sociable spirits. As soon as
    • something strange. We become aware that we have to recognize yet
    • Without exception all materialistically inclined people become
    • become Francis of Assisi. So Francis of Assisi was in his previous
    • Mars what Christ has become for the earth. He accomplished a kind of
    • become quite meaningless. The Sun still has a limited influence on
    • would change into choral music. It becomes increasingly tone, filled
    • have become a fully expanded spatial sphere, spiritual forces stream
    • consciousness. Our consciousness becomes ever dimmer. We now
    • we have become mature enough to experience what we are in our
    • show how clear and intelligible everything becomes the more we view
  • Title: Life Between ... V: Life Between Death and Rebirth 1
    Matching lines:
    • Reading these descriptions, it becomes clear that excarnated souls need
    • expands and becomes larger and larger. This is not an easy concept
    • occultism we become Moon dwellers. Our being has expanded to such an
    • sphere. That is to say, after the kamaloca period we become Mercury
    • it becomes apparent when we consider the relationship of one person
    • becomes a kind of hermit in the spiritual world. For example, he
    • ourselves to become hermits in the Venus sphere if we have failed to
    • compared with what Christianity has become as a creed, but with the
    • naturally a lofty ideal. This will become more widespread as time
    • enclosed in some creed, we become hermits there. We are social beings
    • evolution, we become beings able to move freely in the Sun sphere.
    • higher hierarchies. But this power gradually vanishes, becomes dimmer
    • and become ever smaller until the time comes when we can again unite
    • obtain through occultism may become impulses in our life of soul and
    • becomes unchangeable, one begins to understand the depth of these
    • pieces, but becomes limp as a result of the withdrawal of the ego and
    • Many secrets are contained in the works of men and much will become
  • Title: Life Between ... VI: Life Between Death and Rebirth 2
    Matching lines:
    • Reading these descriptions, it becomes clear that excarnated souls need
    • not share this enthusiasm. In fact, the more the former becomes
    • would have become an anthroposophist himself at some time if his
    • friend or the person related to him had not become an
    • science is manifest. This is why a practice that has become customary
    • anthroposophy becomes, by way of an understanding of the ideas, more
    • actually becomes reality after death. A whole world of which one is
    • possibilities. This will be the result as anthroposophy becomes the
    • find that, although a consciousness develops, slowly it will become
    • human becomes as a result of his sojourn in the super-sensible world
    • that is to become more and more the substance of spiritual
  • Title: Life Between ... VII: The Working of Karma in Life After Death
    Matching lines:
    • Reading these descriptions, it becomes clear that excarnated souls need
    • light and color, which for us can become a revelation of what lives
    • worlds can only become fully intelligible if we consider them from
    • earth become hermits in the Mercury sphere. The morally inclined
    • person, however, becomes what one might call a sociable being. There
    • same space, but on our soul inclinations. We become hermits when we
    • Moon sphere during kamaloca but by and large whether a man becomes a
    • deserved. The moment we become aware of this we can love him rightly,
    • over a period of fifteen years, we shall become aware of it after
    • importance after death because then, in this respect, man becomes
    • subconscious also plays a part. Thus man becomes truly as he really
    • When spiritual science does not remain mere theory but becomes a life
    • life, will become a true life elixir. To understand in which way the
    • consideration of all the elements involved, we might become aware
    • and the dead is bridged by spiritual science that becomes a true life
    • sphere we become hermits if on earth we have had an irreligious
    • disposition. We become sociable spirits if we bring a religious
    • nature, that he can become like God. You can become God-like, a
    • carry Him up to the Sun period, and then we can become sociable
    • with unless Lucifer is to become a threat to us, and that is the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Life Between ... VIII: Between Death and a New Birth
    Matching lines:
    • Reading these descriptions, it becomes clear that excarnated souls need
    • thoroughly with human existence to realize how people become aware of
    • another may have become antagonistic towards it.
    • his earthly existence rise to the surface and become the content of
    • soul-spiritual nature separated from the cosmos and become the “I”
    • that external beauty has no future. Beauty must become an inner
    • sun and of the moon will become ever more glorious. Those who
    • learn increasingly to become independent of what is bound to the
  • Title: Life Between ... IX: Life After Death
    Matching lines:
    • Reading these descriptions, it becomes clear that excarnated souls need
    • faintly and by a few but which will become more and more audible in
    • they are closely related. We become especially aware of this when we
    • upon, particularly in our age, to become ever more independent in his
    • feeling relationships to other people, becomes our inner world after
    • Those who are subject to love of ease on earth will become agents to
    • death and a new birth. The seer discovers souls who have become the
    • lacked conscience on earth, one finds that they were forced to become
    • Life only becomes comprehensible when one considers the total
    • bring us to the point at which we become this intricate instrument.
    • Then we become aware that we actually come into life with a much
    • individual who has become the servant of an evil spirit of disease
    • loftiest wisdom, he is now so degraded that he has become the servant
    • he becomes. He will live more and more as if on an island and his
  • Title: Life Between ... X: Anthroposophy as the Quickener of Feeling and of Life
    Matching lines:
    • Reading these descriptions, it becomes clear that excarnated souls need
    • to me during the long span of physical existence has become dumb.”
    • The prospect that stands before humanity is that souls will become
    • occur we pay no attention to them. If you become dramatically aware
    • time without being noticed. When one does become aware of them they
    • manifold forms. A beginning will be made when people become attentive
    • reality. They become possible only because a vast quantity of eggs
    • becomes a reality in our sense world!” This is accompanied by
    • develops, one will quite naturally become aware that at such moments
    • become perceptible for the dead. On the other, the dead will be able
    • their lack of conscience they condemn themselves to become servants
    • conscience become servants of these evil beings. That is indeed
    • you but consider how widespread love of ease has become, you will
    • our feelings rather than to our intellect. So anthroposophy becomes
    • increasingly a universal language. It becomes a language that will
    • onwards. This makes a solemn impression as one becomes aware of the
    • between death and a new birth, should become feeling within the soul
    • intellectually, but should become inner experience. Then we shall be
    • Spiritual science should become for us that which quickens feeling
    • and life. The acquisition of spiritual concepts should not become a
  • Title: Life Between ... XI: The Mission of Earthly Life as a Transitional Stage for the Beyond
    Matching lines:
    • Reading these descriptions, it becomes clear that excarnated souls need
    • would become less and less able. For if a person has deliberately
    • he can become familiar with it through the fact that he knew a person
    • may be able to serve the dead and could become their teacher. This,
    • anything about spiritual science, so it becomes again the case in the
    • Spiritual science aims gradually to become a life elixir. Man then
    • will gradually become the common heritage of the whole of humanity.
    • is to refresh one but as an impulse which will become of ever
  • Title: Life Between ... XII: Life Between Death and Rebirth 1
    Matching lines:
    • Reading these descriptions, it becomes clear that excarnated souls need
    • previous life and he will become of necessity duller in the next than
    • forces are even more dimmed, he becomes still more incapable and he
    • nothing fits properly. He becomes, for example, a hypochondriac, a
    • life between death and rebirth the human soul becomes the servant of
    • Whether a human soul is called upon to become the servant of the good
    • Our work will become ever more effective in this sphere as time goes
    • for a certain period between death and rebirth have to become the
    • who are forced to become the servants of evil spirits of disease and
    • strictly adhere to the truth become the servants of disease and
    • decide to do something himself in order to become a servant of human
    • prematurely, he thereby becomes a servant of the beings of the higher
  • Title: Life Between ... XIII: Life Between Death and Rebirth 2
    Matching lines:
    • Reading these descriptions, it becomes clear that excarnated souls need
    • become but had not become when he passed through the gate of death —
    • until he has become minute enough to unite as a spirit-seed with what
    • human being passes through the gate of death he himself becomes an
    • He becomes a gigantic being and then again contracts. What we have
    • has Mars become entirely a planet of peace. That process will still
    • as that of Francis of Assisi will gradually become less and less
    • an incarnation into forces that can then become bodily forces and
    • several spheres he becomes a servant of one or the other of the
    • also becomes significant for the evolution of the earth as a whole.
  • Title: Life Between ... XIV: Further Facts About Life Between Death and Rebirth
    Matching lines:
    • Reading these descriptions, it becomes clear that excarnated souls need
    • becomes visible for him when spiritual thoughts live within the soul
    • spiritual science. He becomes aware of this with his consciousness.
    • more souls will become conscious of a communion with the dead.
    • the earth. Then he has to grow into and become a citizen of the
    • moral feelings on earth becomes a hermit after death. He will be
    • inasmuch as it becomes conscious of its essential kernel, leads to
    • Christ has become the companion of man on earth and the event of
    • Therefore, in order to become acquainted with the Christ one has to
    • One becomes ever smaller until one unites oneself again with the
    • earthy life where it must become moral law.
  • Title: Life Between ... XV: Intercourse With the Dead
    Matching lines:
    • Reading these descriptions, it becomes clear that excarnated souls need
    • who has become acquainted with death through his own experiences. As
    • prepare to expand into the macrocosmos, to become a macrocosmos, to
    • become all we see around us on earth.
    • become the moon, just as on earth we are our brain. We expand into
    • Saturn so that we become Saturn, just as we are now our spleen. Man
    • becomes a macrocosmic being. When the soul has departed from the body
    • and minerals, so then we live in the universe. The universe becomes
    • a particularly enviable prospect. We have then become a world for
    • become essential, and the correct understanding of Christianity is a
    • seed enabling it to become the universal religion.
    • am. He has as yet only had the opportunity to become acquainted with
    • we have also expanded our astral body so far as to become Sun
    • worlds. Things only become clear if they can be viewed in a certain
    • consciousness is not lost; one merely becomes lonely. In the higher
    • connection with him enabled me to become aware of Raphael's
  • Title: Life Between ... XVI: Life After Death
    Matching lines:
    • Reading these descriptions, it becomes clear that excarnated souls need
    • spiritual that belongs to the Moon becomes an organ within him. It
    • becomes after death what the brain is for us on earth as physical
    • human beings. Each planetary body becomes an organ for us after death
    • inasmuch as we have expanded to its orbit. The Sun becomes a heart
  • Title: Lecture I: Human and Cosmic Thought
    Matching lines:
    • specific thought into motion; thus thought in movement becomes the
    • question becomes one of “thinking”, then one must go
  • Title: Lecture II: Human and Cosmic Thought
    Matching lines:
    • materialist one can become a ready-reckoner of the universe, taking
    • one can become rather confused in this field. One can say to oneself:
    • materialism will become a mathematical thinker, and will recognize as
    • a person becomes a Rationalist, and his outlook on the world is that
    • He becomes a Psychist and his world-outlook is that Psychism.
    • of which he can eventually become aware.
    • If he has become in truth a Pneumatist, then he may well grasp what I
    • And he gradually becomes able to form for himself an idea of the
    • Spirits of the different Hierarchies. Then he becomes in the true
  • Title: Lecture III: Human and Cosmic Thought
    Matching lines:
    • Of late it has been thought that one could more easily become
    • and events. But when the soul has become quiet and seeks inwardly for
    • becomes a mystic of matter. This can even become an “awakening”
    • Now the soul may be so attuned that it cannot become aware of what
  • Title: Lecture IV: Human and Cosmic Thought
    Matching lines:
    • the soul-activity and this becomes visible to itself. The brain has
    • certain parts of the brain, deep within it, so that they become the
    • some sort of movement; by this means they become a mirror-apparatus;
    • the thought is reflected, and the soul becomes conscious of the
    • and thereby the brain becomes a reflecting-apparatus. But the brain
    • become Empiricism in the sign of Rationalism!” Opposition! The
    • If one becomes a seeker, if one earnestly sets to work along the path
  • Title: Lecture I: Human and Cosmic Thought
    Matching lines:
    • specific thought into motion; thus thought in movement becomes the
    • question becomes one of “thinking”, then one must go
  • Title: Lecture II: Human and Cosmic Thought
    Matching lines:
    • materialist one can become a ready-reckoner of the universe, taking
    • one can become rather confused in this field. One can say to oneself:
    • materialism will become a mathematical thinker, and will recognize as
    • a person becomes a Rationalist, and his outlook on the world is that
    • He becomes a Psychist and his world-outlook is that Psychism.
    • of which he can eventually become aware.
    • If he has become in truth a Pneumatist, then he may well grasp what I
    • And he gradually becomes able to form for himself an idea of the
    • Spirits of the different Hierarchies. Then he becomes in the true
  • Title: Lecture III: Human and Cosmic Thought
    Matching lines:
    • Of late it has been thought that one could more easily become
    • and events. But when the soul has become quiet and seeks inwardly for
    • becomes a mystic of matter. This can even become an “awakening”
    • Now the soul may be so attuned that it cannot become aware of what
  • Title: Lecture IV: Human and Cosmic Thought
    Matching lines:
    • the soul-activity and this becomes visible to itself. The brain has
    • certain parts of the brain, deep within it, so that they become the
    • some sort of movement; by this means they become a mirror-apparatus;
    • the thought is reflected, and the soul becomes conscious of the
    • and thereby the brain becomes a reflecting-apparatus. But the brain
    • become Empiricism in the sign of Rationalism!” Opposition! The
    • If one becomes a seeker, if one earnestly sets to work along the path
  • Title: Lecture: The Origin of Suffering
    Matching lines:
    • the other personality becomes deeply comprehensible, what appears in
    • nature of man the origin of pain and suffering can also become clear
    • have become open. We look upon the second part of the human being,
    • is matter nothing else than a result of Spirit, and as ice can become
    • something into which Spirit has flowed and become rigid. In every
    • as portions of itself become destroyed: a process through which life
    • an inner world. A substance which can die externally cannot become
    • conscious. A substance can only become conscious that creates death
    • becomes somewhat transformed and a tiny eye appears. What is it
    • place, and when it becomes greater even produces death. Out of pain
    • protect the inner life, when the stimulus becomes too strong, then
    • the food taken in becomes enjoyment because it is the means of
    • level, when what is united in the average man becomes separate and a
    • life becomes richer, more full of content, when we let it extend over
    • is like a poison which becomes remedy when it is changed into
  • Title: Lecture: The Origin of Evil
    Matching lines:
    • becomes free of the senses. Something then takes place similar to the
    • principle. Each being when it has developed to a higher stage becomes
    • still take a long time to become as perfect and wise as the physical
    • body. But it must become so, for that is the course of evolution. The
    • of life would become tainted; for men and animals inhale oxygen and
    • influence, man would have become only good; he would have used love
    • the force of self-love. But self-love must become love of all. Then
  • Title: Lecture: What Do We Understand by Illness and Death
    Matching lines:
    • being has become independent and conscious of self pre-supposes
    • biblical sayings because in the course of centuries they have become
    • understands the world. When he has become old he can no longer
    • body and his senses become free, so that it is then possible for the
    • becomes free, in like manner the moment the astral principle is free
    • hardens, the pulse becomes slow. The astral body finally feeds upon
    • becomes part of the life and work of the ego, it is then necessary
    • becomes a substance inherent in the organism. What is thus taken from
    • being able to have diseases, to become ill. Illness is the condition
    • harmonious mood of soul which will then become the wisdom of life.
    • become dangerous? Haven't we countless opponents who assert that
  • Title: Manifestations/Karma: Lecture: The Nature and Significance of Karma in the Personal and Individual, and in Humanity, the Earth and the Universe
    Matching lines:
    • which we acquire through anthroposophy really become strong enough,
    • often bent, becomes slack in time. So, from what the bow does and from
    • becomes slack, then we really have in the slack bow something quite
    • of eighteen, to become a business man. An impartial observer of such
    • would become evident that something apparently inexplicable had taken
    • arises in the soul and one can then see how this resistance becomes
    • to express thus: ‘The man whom we are now observing has become
    • man who experienced it has become a decent fellow, and a useful member
    • is to become a good and useful man — in this case we would say:
    • to become one through having his best talents brought out, and these I
    • we have sunk and become of less value; we are less perfect, so to
    • in order to compensate for something and to become a better man, this
  • Title: Manifestations/Karma: Lecture: Karma and the Animal Kingdom
    Matching lines:
    • when a man learns, it is soon shown that he can become many-sided, and
    • Because only by acquiring this inner organisation could man become the
    • incarnation to incarnation. No other organisation could have become
    • human organisation had not progressed far enough for it to become the
    • Thus we have a humanity which has only become possible through man's
    • become a basis for our development. These beings have sunk in order
    • to become so set that the exit of the Moon could no longer be of any
    • themselves during this critical time and they could not become the
    • to be refined and to become the vehicles of human individuality there
    • developing, which, by preserving the Moon character had become
    • These organisms are essentially those which have become our present
    • the laws which they had before, and had become so set that when the
    • were to become the vehicles of human individualities could not
    • come down into them, and although we had become more perfect beings,
    • body and yet a life independent of it, so that we might become more
    • I have now become. As the animals have fallen from an individual
  • Title: Manifestations/Karma: Lecture: Karma in Relation to Disease and Health
    Matching lines:
    • it meets with an external injury before it can become diseased. The
    • impression will cause us to become pale, and another causes us to
  • Title: Manifestations/Karma: Lecture: The Curability and Incurability of Diseases in Relation to Karma
    Matching lines:
    • that you will become more perfect in this respect, so that in the
    • dominance of your emotions.’ This thought becomes an integral
    • and it is because of this influence that man has become much more
    • continually fighting in the human individuality which has become their
    • the luciferic influences in the same way become the causes of disease,
    • those who under the guidance of Spiritual Science wish to become
    • self-healing forces become active, and the injurious influences are
  • Title: Manifestations/Karma: Lecture: Natural and Accidental Illness in Relationship to Karma
    Matching lines:
    • and re-birth will become part of the plastic forces, the formative
    • some imperfection in one or another direction, man will tend to become
    • become chronic that we find ourselves in a vicious circle. We should
    • my condition,’ certain soul forces would thereby become
    • life as to become the cause of an organic disease, but that in the
    • medical men, so many doctors become materialists. For most people
    • person has become ill because he entered this particular district. It
    • any world-conception, and as long as we make no attempt to become
    • feeling and desire so to order his life as to become a veritable
    • not aware ourselves that we err. When we become aware of it, there
    • become confused. Here is the window through which the ahrimanic forces
    • here where Ahriman becomes most dangerous to us. Those phenomena which
    • man, and how Ahriman becomes intertwined with external perceptions and
  • Title: Manifestations/Karma: Lecture: The Relationships Between Karma and Accidents
    Matching lines:
    • may gradually become comprehensible. So let us now add some more
    • trying to awaken within us, we become ill. Illness is an abnormal
    • morning. Does any consciousness arise when we become ill?
  • Title: Manifestations/Karma: Lecture: Forces of Nature, Volcanic Eruptions, Earthquakes and Epidemics in Relation to Karma
    Matching lines:
    • must keep before us the fact that pain may become apparent side by
    • have already succumbed. Thus pain becomes our schoolmaster in regard
    • But how can pain become our schoolmaster, if we only feel the pain and
    • become clearer if we ask whence the ahrimanic influence comes.
    • begin to accept instruction, it soon becomes evident that the visions,
    • reappears in a new incarnation. Then it will become manifest that some
    • of this process, become even more enmeshed in what Ahriman can effect,
    • to be found only truth and no illusion. The more he becomes entangled
    • become too greatly entangled in Maya or illusion and may find our way
    • active within them. Because of him the Angeloi had become what they
    • existence, just as we, through the luciferic influence, become
    • other hand, to become conscious of the effect we produce by the use of
  • Title: Manifestations/Karma: Lecture: Karma of the Higher Beings
    Matching lines:
    • possession of the truths of Spiritual Science, that they have become
    • the inner possession of our soul. If they have become such an integral
    • may have become an ‘old professor,’ and yet may not have
    • possess truths and amass such knowledge as may become forces for the
    • has become tranquil. These things will find their way into the
    • plane we still shall become different after ten years, but the change
    • In this way the reciprocal activity of Ahriman and Lucifer has become
    • inner being become considerably less perfect than we were before, and
    • and in the next incarnation, with what have now become formative
    • for that which we have become through the luciferic influence.
    • In this way many events become comprehensible. However, we must beware
    • find a thread by which this connection will become clear. We must
    • become uncharitable. It may well happen that we, following for a time
    • There, for instance, the following becomes manifest, and has been
  • Title: Manifestations/Karma: Lecture: Karmic Effects Of Our Experiences As Men and Women. Death and Birth In Relationship to Karma
    Matching lines:
    • marked. Thus souls become increasingly diseased as external life is
    • through their general karma are so prepared that they become united to
    • strive to become female, and conversely. All repugnance is of no
    • body until, at the moment of death, it has become altogether useless.
    • become tired. We are here dealing with entirely different events. And
  • Title: Manifestations/Karma: Lecture: Free Will and Karma in the Future of Human Evolution
    Matching lines:
    • solid if we raise the temperature sufficiently; it then becomes a
    • light, the luciferic beings enter, and the luciferic influence becomes
    • this way love becomes the essential force of the Ego where that
    • outside in matter. Thus it becomes possible for our inner being which,
    • On the other hand, we may ask, what has become of the substance woven
    • the substance woven out of light becomes less perfect than it was
    • human body has become the bearer of the Ego that lives on through the
    • our earth existence: on the one side with light which has become
    • matter — and on the other side with love which has become soul.
  • Title: Manifestations/Karma: Lecture: Individual and Human Karma. Karma of the Higher Beings.
    Matching lines:
    • has nevertheless become a lasting possession. It is just like a tree
    • of the earth-evolution should flow into him. Man could only become
    • should see in detail in what way we have become imperfect. From that
    • ‘free will’ itself is incorrect, for man only becomes free
    • fills himself with the contents of the spiritual world, and becomes in
    • becomes free, but man who permeates himself with what he can know and
    • Wisdom will become the practical force, the vital impulse which
    • becomes his own karma as soon as he performs some action connected
    • the circle of our members — become life and soul to us, and as
  • Title: Lecture: Secrets/Threshold: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • Philia becomes a living being of the spiritual world, and to
    • they have first fled away, until this soul mood has become a truth:
    • “And fighting serve the gods,” becomes entirely
    • become living in their deepest sense when one looks at them in the
    • and Capesius. If only such people might become more and more
  • Title: Lecture: Secrets/Threshold: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • When a person has become familiar with the spiritual
    • whether already clairvoyant or wishing to become so, it should of
    • wants to become clairvoyant. Then it can perceive and take in the
    • not become a practical occultist, the result for his inner attitude
    • will be that he becomes a rank, coarse-grained materialist who wants
    • reject their former good relationship and in order not to become
    • impulses, passions and desires, and these impulses become perverse.
    • (this can very well happen) had through various circumstances become
    • inducement to so much that is noble and sublime, may become
    • become clairvoyant. This happens in just the opposite situation. We
    • spiritual world means that a person will most easily become the prey
  • Title: Lecture: Secrets/Threshold: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • should become more or less accustomed to the fact that the way of
    • nothing at all in the elemental world unless we become a different
    • person within every other being, indeed unless we become similar to a
    • metamorphosis. We must be able to immerse ourselves in and become the
    • inwardly have “become” the other. When we have crossed
    • from these the life of soul will become stronger and more forceful. It
    • self-strengthened volition. Just as we have become tired in the
    • our thinking must become from what it is here. Imagine sticking your
    • thoughts become so alive that they themselves join each other,
    • away from us; then hurrying after them, we would become a slave to
    • to the soul that has become clairvoyant. Quite definite kinds of
    • become completely changed. There the inner mood or disposition
    • thoughts become — one can say — denser, more alive, more
    • becomes self-willed.
    • What must above all become strong and
    • becomes inner firmness; we can call it an elementary backbone. Both
  • Title: Lecture: Secrets/Threshold: Lecture IV
    Matching lines:
    • soul, as it becomes clairvoyant, will progress further, beyond the
    • has become clairvoyant enters the spiritual world, it will really see
    • If a man on earth, who has become clairvoyant, is to
    • the human being to the spiritual world, his book becomes completely
    • using the thinking habits of today, becomes foolish. I do not mean
    • foolish a well-intentioned person can become when he wishes to look
  • Title: Lecture: Secrets/Threshold: Lecture V
    Matching lines:
    • shown me that a number of well-known modern scholars have become
    • for his present-day soul. Capesius has therefore become a historian,
    • become what one could call his pupil. He had often heard Benedictus
    • this has become differentiated into the various folk and tribal
    • word, has become a middle thing between solitary thought and the
    • his soul capacities had become. In Scene Thirteen of
    • not as a merely abstract element of his soul. The more Philia becomes
    • do in something heard or seen outside. Our thought then becomes as
    • being, living in his thoughts in such a way that they become as alive
  • Title: Lecture: Secrets/Threshold: Lecture VI
    Matching lines:
    • threshold and become familiar with this world already characterized
    • conversation. With our strengthened soul we will become familiar with
    • realm? Let us consider the question carefully. The soul must become
    • being of the past.” Lucifer is the one who has become in the
    • itself only as a point. But then this point becomes a spectator and
    • begins to observe something else. Our human soul, become microscopic,
    • the future, the more we actually become we ourselves become a
    • becomes — through listening to the spirit conversation of the
    • become” ourselves in clairvoyant consciousness.
  • Title: Lecture: Secrets/Threshold: Lecture VII
    Matching lines:
    • only a pale, shadowy presence in the human soul, becomes on meeting
    • thought becomes an individual living thought-being and begins to lead
    • elements to which they are emotionally attached. Ahriman becomes
    • and become independent to be formed by Ahriman and even given human
    • separates off and becomes objective. We look at it and see that it is
    • Johannes Thomasius has to become conscious of an
    • their own benefit; we do not always find them ready to become, the
    • ask ourselves, what would have become of this now almost alien youth,
    • it with the unresolved karma. It becomes a shadow-being under
    • enchanted weaving of his own being becomes more evident and brings
    • spiritual realms. It means also that you become a being of memory, a
    • being of the past, for you become aware that you are not in the
    • become clairvoyant, one comes to realize that a decision, a spiritual
  • Title: Lecture: Secrets/Threshold: Lecture VIII
    Matching lines:
    • unbearable. Before the event can become fully conscious, the soul —
    • body becomes one with the whole cosmic sphere. In doing this, it
    • becomes ever thinner, while being absorbed by the whole surrounding
    • becomes less and less distinct. We watch it gradually drifting away
    • should become: A befitting new life must be constructed according to
    • become carpenters of a new life shaped by karma. In this sense an
    • certainly stagnate and become sclerotic unless it receives
  • Title: Lecture 1: On the Meaning of Life
    Matching lines:
    • have become wiser. Usually, however, it is only when we have
    • mistakes become a part of our life; but it is just through our
    • life, calls forth our joy and delight. We become aware that the whole
    • already become acquainted through the elementary truths of occultism.
    • incarnations, and then has become a Bodhisattva, as did Gautama, the
    • comprehensible to all Christians of the West, and will become so more
    • Thus through his pictures, Raphael becomes for us the forerunner of a
    • the painter becomes the vehicle for the individuality which lived in
    • pictures of Raphael. It is easy to see what will become of them when
  • Title: Lecture 2: On the Meaning of Life
    Matching lines:
    • few of these become fully developed beings. Only think how many germs
    • their object, namely to become ears of corn in their turn. In
    • become realities in the ordinary sense of the word. Let us keep in
    • their goal and become ears of corn. What would be the result? The
    • they are to become truths, the different visions of many persons
    • person who has become clairvoyant has reached a point at which the
    • substance from which its body is built, then it ought to have become
    • lamb for ever so long becomes a lamb. So you will see that the ideas
    • here: “How fortunate it is for those who have not become
    • This actually unites with what lives within man when he becomes
    • answer is contained therein. Man has become a co-worker with
    • spiritual beings. He has become so through his whole nature. What he
    • become conscious that in us lies the point where the North and the
    • unconscious in us, will become more and more conscious through our
    • Here enters freedom for us. With this we become independent beings. We
    • Meaning enters into it. We become co-actors in the world process.
    • empty Ego becomes the stage where the Divine contents which are
    • becomes more and more filled with what was originally in the Divine
    • individual consciousness becomes filled with what in the beginning
    • etheric body and so on. The process is the same, only it becomes more
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Inner Impulses: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • become living for us, who enter willingly into that enthusiastic and
    • powerful stream of Rome as it has become. He wanted college students
    • — have almost become abstract concepts. The same is true of the
    • soil. This is the concept of citizenship; man becomes a citizen, a
  • Title: Inner Impulses: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • have consisted entirely of those subtle imaginations that had become
    • these attacks are. They are now only beginning but they will become
    • understand these attacks will become ever greater. At the beginning of
    • imaginative life was working within him. It must become free; Boehme
    • time to become luciferic and ahrimanic forces. Only the center was
    • West that would make its culture visionary. Then it would have become
    • all of Europe would have become nothing but a political machine.
    • body so that he shall perpetually fall into a state where he becomes
    • the soul becomes instead something that rams the soul down into the
    • becomes a man, and to explain how it was possible for such a man to
    • detailed way so that Jesus becomes a true Palestinian in this Holy
    • Land. Christ Jesus, who should belong to all of mankind, becomes a
    • an abstract mankind. Christ has become an idea, which incarnates in
    • of life in the idea has become the Christ. He is conceived entirely as
  • Title: Inner Impulses: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • that, on the whole, he has become somewhat lacking in courage. If one
    • differently. He has become weak in courage. The modern person much
    • secrets of modern existence that will become clearer in the course of
    • becomes necessary from time to time to indicate with care and caution
    • the things one becomes aware of when one kindles that little piece of
    • destined by birth to become a high initiate of Taotl. This man had in
    • not, as a single human individual, to become so powerful through
    • consciousness did not gradually enter, these forces would become
    • unconsciousness would turn around and become the curse of humanity.
    • appearance have proved a benefit, bear the inherent tendency to become
    • within national boundaries, which would become impassable in the
    • now striving to become general in earthly humanity. Should it succeed,
    • beneficent ways, but it also has a strong tendency to become the
    • do so. Then this Society would have become ripe enough for things to
    • is widely diffused. So we have not yet become the living organic
  • Title: Inner Impulses: Lecture IV
    Matching lines:
    • thinking and the very manner of life, then this difference becomes
    • life; neither would humanity become complete in its way if faculties,
    • become freer. To be sure, this development is still far from complete
    • what is necessary for humanity have gradually become fewer during this
    • Humanity had become accustomed to recognize as true only what had been
    • this, to become an instrument through which what is really around us
    • what it had to become in the last three or four hundred years, had
    • been one sided in its development. Thought had become attenuated and
    • of the thinking that had become powerless in the new age and could no
    • respectively, what they had become after these remnants had been long
    • Europeans refuse to become like the Chinese and if Chinese conditions
    • he says, is for Europeans to become Chinese, that is, become Chinese
    • Europe Chinese. Of course, we should see at once that we cannot become
    • taken. It would definitely be better. It would be better to become
    • to “become Chinese,” but rather to seek by paths of
  • Title: Inner Impulses: Lecture V
    Matching lines:
    • Greeks become intelligible when we regard this fourth post-Atlantean
    • gradually have become weary of the earth, would lose their inclination
    • way that it would have become a great earthly mechanism for ego-less
    • by Ahriman, the squeezing out of the lemons, would have become
    • effective. The earth would gradually have become desolate, having upon
    • have become earth-bound; the initiate himself would have been
    • of the fifth post-Atlantean epoch, would gradually have become so
    • establishment of earthly prosperity becomes an ideal. I do not say
    • and luciferic forces on the other, the strivings of men become
    • problem of the natural urges becomes that of prosperity, so in
    • the animals. Through the evil of which he is capable, he becomes even
    • of the senses, whereby this life would become egoless. For if
  • Title: Inner Impulses: Lecture VI
    Matching lines:
    • evolution back, leading the souls to become estranged from the earth
    • is always at hand that souls may become estranged from the earth,
    • become earth weary, and that earthly humanity may become mechanized.
    • perceive, it is absolutely possible for gold to become an inspirer.
    • become famous in history. When Pope Boniface forbade the French clergy
    • immorality — becomes attached to that greatness and nobleness.
    • become capable of dishonoring the symbol of the Cross and the holy
    • experience a man can suffer, was to become for many others a principle
    • in the Lemurian region the magnetic meridians become sinuous
    • still but little understood; he must first become familiar in the
    • Goetheanism to become spiritual science. Then, much will emerge from
    • the symbol of the Cross becomes a picture of life through the living
  • Title: Inner Impulses: Lecture VII
    Matching lines:
    • ideas living in this book become familiar to the tenderest, earliest
    • is incorporated into our organism. Humanity could only become
    • humanity has even become freer than it was in earlier centuries, and
    • You see from this that our time can become ever more clear to us
    • at any rate, most of us — have become as much asleep and dreaming
    • today, very much has become veiled from humanity. Nor will what was
  • Title: Cosmic New Year: Lecture I: The Three Streams in the Life of Civilization. The Mysteries of Light, of Man, and of the Earth.
    Matching lines:
    • morning and rub them — all this becomes a mere picture. They feel
    • our modern life of education, everything has become devoid of living
    • economic affairs. The wisdom has become watered thin, the divisions
    • into which it made groups of people have become an external
    • civilization of the West had spiritually become utterly sterile, and a
    • conditioned by this fact. What did the religious element become on its
    • juristic-political scene in which the God of the World becomes the
    • sphere of truth. But we must become aware of what really exists.
  • Title: Cosmic New Year: Lecture II: The Michael Path to Christ: A Christmas Lecture
    Matching lines:
    • worked properly in another period becomes, if it remains stationary,
    • Harnack? Adolf Harnack has become the fashionable theologian of the
    • Michael has become the Regent, as it were, of all those who seek to
    • materialistic intellectual power — which by that time had become
    • formerly stood. But it is required of men that they shall become the
    • What I mean by this will become quite clear to you through the
    • and can become active in the soul-life of those who seek the paths to
    • relationship with the souls of men, in order again to become their
    • become the great World-misunderstanding which now fills the hearts and
    • Let us consider what would have become of the Jewish people of the Old
    • sought to approach Him directly. They would have become an intolerant
    • that mankind must become related to him. For now Michael is not the
    • mentality, a mentality which in our time has become Luciferic.
  • Title: Cosmic New Year: Lecture III: The Mystery of the Human Will
    Matching lines:
    • will, but only when the Will becomes idea, when the Will is reflected
    • must become an integral part of the Natural Science of the future, for
    • become completely materialized. Our attention was first drawn to the
  • Title: Cosmic New Year: Lecture IV: The Breaking-in of Spiritual Revelations Since the Last Third of the Nineteenth Century. Thoughts on New Years Eve.
    Matching lines:
    • again become a circle, an age in which the Ego must again receive a
  • Title: Cosmic New Year: Lecture V: The Dogma of Revelation and the Dogma of Experience. The Spiritual Mark of the Present Time. A New Year Contemplation.
    Matching lines:
    • today's misery and want, had that call become a reality in the hearts
    • become the social and material mark. Let us reconsider it to some
    • capacities become Luciferic owing to their entrance into a human body.
    • These facts must become known, and to feel that these facts must
    • become known is indeed the most worthy New Year's thought that could
  • Title: Lecture: Knowledge and Initiation
    Matching lines:
    • thought-life has become as intense and as full of life as is the
    • becomes possible to exercise a healing influence on this or that organ
    • to see the external world? It becomes transparent, and by thus
    • human being, but just as it is not given to every man to become a
    • a man confronting us but do not know him well until we become his
  • Title: Lecture: Cognition of the Christ Through Anthroposophy
    Matching lines:
    • conception; it is something which becomes a living, spiritual force
    • life becomes a factor in the most varied fields of human existence.
    • student can develop his thought-power until it becomes something which
    • way that thought becomes not what it ordinarily is — abstract,
    • becomes so strong that he is not only able to concentrate the full
    • becomes clairvoyant, man has to say to himself: I have become too
    • ego becomes too strong, was St. Paul at Damascus. The passage in the
    • lecture, where the power of thought is deadened and becomes like a
    • thinking power of man would have become more and more dead. We can
    • we able to enter our thinking life again, to enliven what has become
    • our time individuals become scientists and learned men. In that time
    • physical body and become like a corpse. In those ancient cults where
  • Title: Lecture: Michaelmas-Soul: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • that man should become, in a sense, a twofold being. With one part of
    • nature becomes in him.
    • between outer nature and what nature becomes after man has devoured,
    • innocent nature becomes, in the form of guilt in the welling-up of
    • positively have become an automaton. By reason of being transferred to
    • intellect has become the only recognized autocrat of human cognition,
    • the world view has gradually become what it is for mankind in general.
    • wages the real battle through which man can gradually become free; for
    • striving for enlightenment would become inwardly and deeply religious.
  • Title: Lecture: Michaelmas-Soul: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • revitalized and once more become a force in mankind's thinking,
    • former times, we find that at bottom man has become a veritable hermit
    • before such a step is taken. Anthroposophy must become a profound
    • may call it that — becomes actual experience.
    • reason of man's having become cosmically a hermit, this is even more
    • Gemüt and fill it with enthusiasm might become
    • statements will become clear when we delve deeper into them.
    • is that we should become conscious of our true spiritual relations to
    • through what the glutted Dragon has become in him, he is prevented
    • Dragon in such a way as really to become inwardly transformed, to feel
    • it, I become the instrument for its execution. First failure —
    • clairvoyance. We would be in a bad way if everybody had to become
    • when the blossoms wither and fall and become seed. But only as he
  • Title: Lecture: Michaelmas-Soul: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • have become very dim. Human feeling for the traditional festivals has
    • the entire social life and its manifestations, they have become but a
    • difficult climb and becomes ever more so, the higher he goes. Finally
    • become so unfavorable that he cannot proceed: he must come to a halt.
    • be speaking. But now the case becomes still more alarming: the
    • three or four hundred years has today become an axiom. This has come
    • our language, which has become abstract, demands this — well, if
    • the greater becomes our respect for it. A spirit of reverence for the
    • enters in, the heavenly bodies become something very different from
    • experiences is real ecstasy. The world becomes immense; and what he is
    • zodiac and its external display of constellations, becomes something
    • without. As human beings we become interwoven with all the mysteries
    • That is the way to become acquainted with Saturn, for example, in its
  • Title: Lecture: Michaelmas-Soul: Lecture IV
    Matching lines:
    • space. But only in this way does it become possible to feel the outer
    • into the earth itself and become intimately connected with it. Such is
    • with the earth itself becomes related to the cosmic environment in
    • resorted to the cosmic script: man had to become aware that he is an
    • world-alien our civilization has become — this civilization that
    • would be more useful; or read about How to Become a Good Business
    • the term “to develop spirituality” does not mean to become
    • is no longer possible for present-day mankind; but what will become
    • in nature's dying during the fall and winter he will become in the highest
    • herself the inner human force must become the awakening of self-consciousness.
    • become mere shadows. How wonderful it would be if this Michael
    • become attuned to such social impulses only by an inner deepening of
  • Title: Mystery Centres: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • thoughts need not become fantastic.
    • become acquainted with this feeling of living in thoughts.
    • continually into his own being. Man himself becomes the object.
    • what memories may become when they are much more real.
    • spiritual way. The blossoms become transparent. The spiritual part of
    • the plant stirs inwardly, and the blossoming becomes a kind of
    • have undergone in life, and which has inwardly become memory in the
    • colour becomes living, it becomes psychic, spiritual. It forsakes the
    • the Thrones. Then the dawn dissolves away. The colour becomes living,
    • becomes psychic, becomes spiritual, becomes a Being, and speaks to us
    • Being which the dawn has now become, that which constitutes the
  • Title: Mystery Centres: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • through which he becomes outwardly similar, if I may say so, to
    • Thus he did not become eloquent like the Athenian boy,
    • regions on whom the external sun-effects work become rich in gesture;
    • they also become talkative. There develops in them a language which
    • other hand, develop in such a way that they do not become talkative,
    • astral body, this would become a force which Ahriman would send into
    • becomes clear that man is brought under the influence of nature
    • are inclined to become melancholic, for there is something in the
  • Title: Mystery Centres: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • way in which our experiences have become memories has really
    • become a facial expression, shown in the countenance, to take this up
    • Therefore only after the change of teeth do we gradually become ripe
    • become silent also if one does not tell them something of that
    • appears highly fantastic to us may become extremely important. It is
    • This is also the case when we become conscious of our
    • will. When we become conscious of our will, that is what enters into
    • tree may give us particular pleasure; and if the will becomes warm in
    • does not become so severe as to produce a frosty feeling the head
    • becomes warm through its own inner reaction and then develops
  • Title: Mystery Centres: Lecture IV: The Ephesian Mysteries of Artemis
    Matching lines:
    • becomes a truth, a deep truth to the imaginative observer, that what
    • become aware of them, he would be able to lay hold of them. At a
    • become of man if lead did not work upon him from the cosmos, from the
    • necessary in order that he may become a conscious being, and not
    • of growth man becomes powerless.
    • concerning their curative properties when they become poetic, when
    • their language becomes poetry.
    • that relationship which becomes apparent when they are subjected to
    • imagine that when they melt lead it becomes softer and softer, and of
    • course that is quite correct as far as it goes. It does become softer
    • as the temperature grows higher; the lead becomes hotter and hotter.
    • It becomes more fluid until it gives off lead fumes. But all the time
  • Title: Mystery Centres: Lecture V
    Matching lines:
    • become denser, what we now call carbon, hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen
    • cosmos, become dense and then dissolve away, something which grows
    • becomes denser and denser. In certain localities the silica
    • consciousness which becomes an earth consciousness: Whilst thou hast
    • animal nature should become a separate product from thyself. But in
    • possibility for the earthly human being to become a willing being. If
    • will. His will would then have become entirely a physical function.
    • creation he has become prepared for his life on earth as a thinking
    • way they become somewhat denser and develop the first indications of
    • evanescent plant-formation absorbs the albumen and becomes something
    • that man on the earth might become a free being. When freedom has
  • Title: Mystery Centres: Lecture VI
    Matching lines:
    • latter process the word becomes inwardly perceptible, man can feel it
    • else besides. The following becomes actually possible.
    • this case the plants, supply the answer. The whole world becomes
    • as the Goetheanum had become the centre of anthroposophical activity.
  • Title: Mystery Centres: Lecture VII: The Mysteries of Hibernia
    Matching lines:
    • which in the course of human evolution has become known, and that
    • can become knowledge contributes to human happiness, how little
    • a great riddle should in some way or other become solved in his soul,
    • ordinary path of happiness, and on the other side, what had become in
    • I become now in thee Consecration.
    • I become now in thee Consecration.
  • Title: Mystery Centres: Lecture VIII
    Matching lines:
    • have become like the elastic but hollow statue.” And he felt an
    • instead of knowledge. For it had become quite clear to him:
    • concerning himself; he has become closely related to external nature
  • Title: Mystery Centres: Lecture IX
    Matching lines:
    • sun becomes uncomfortable to your inner feeling; but if you expose
    • Saturn-existence had become active in the pupil.
    • For we shall only become Jupiter-men if we unite physical heat with
    • man. The thought begins to resound. The thought becomes Word. That
    • of it, for he shows us that later. He becomes an unctuous pastor. It
    • himself spiritual activity, and has thus become in the right way a
  • Title: Mystery Centres: Lecture X: The Chthonic and the Eleusinian Mysteries
    Matching lines:
    • time, when the earth had not yet become earth, when it existed in a
    • would be divorced from the Cosmos. He would become, as it were, a
    • had now become unusable within the earth as regards man's inner
    • things in the Spirit, then will this statue become for thee in all
    • become the thought-world of humanity for many centuries, try to build
  • Title: Mystery Centres: Lecture XI: The Secret of Plants, of Metals, and of Men
    Matching lines:
    • become the teacher of Alexander.
    • of human life. Man was to become a different being through knowledge,
    • acquired therein, was to become a quite different being from what he
  • Title: Mystery Centres: Lecture XII: The Mysteries of the Samothracian Kabiri
    Matching lines:
    • order to become metal.
    • embraces the earth with his knowledge and heaven becomes for him
    • and their movements and distances, and so on; the heavens become an
    • Not only had the heavens become an abstraction to man in
  • Title: Mystery Centres: Lecture XIII: Transition from the Spirit of the Ancient Mysteries to the Spirit of the Mysteries of the Middle Ages
    Matching lines:
    • offering, who becomes really inwardly glowing through the exercises
    • formic acid. He has somehow become too weak to bring about this
    • become the abstractions which meet us today in our modern physics and
  • Title: Mystery Centres: Lecture XIV: Human Soul-Strivings During the Middle Ages the Rosicrucian Mysteries
    Matching lines:
    • bring about any change in his organism. Man's thinking has become
    • becomes capable of working down into the etheric body. The etheric
    • would there immediately become a piece of silver.
  • Title: Fundamentals of Anthroposophical Medicine: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • become active today, it must work with and not against natural
    • glasses, and by this means the contours of objects become
    • as though a part of this world had become real in a lower
    • the rhythmic system become clear when we know that it yields
    • objective knowledge. Just as in the laboratory I can become
    • pathology and therapy, and to what extent they may become
  • Title: Fundamentals of Anthroposophical Medicine: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • human organism becomes more and more transparent. Everything
    • become as close as possible to the inorganic. The purely
    • point that our way of looking at things first becomes heretical
    • foods that have now become entirely inorganic so to speak, are
    • into organic; into living protein, when dead protein becomes
    • living after the chyle has become as inorganic as possible.
  • Title: Fundamentals of Anthroposophical Medicine: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • indicate only very briefly, many things become terribly
    • knowledge of the human being we become aware of the tremendous
    • aspect of education. We become aware that we may have dealt
    • incorporates itself into this place that wants to become an
    • will become clear to you if you go into the subject deeply.
  • Title: Fundamentals of Anthroposophical Medicine: Lecture IV
    Matching lines:
    • protecting us from our innate tendency to become ill. I will
    • activity becomes too intense, the whole organism is bound to
    • activity of the head. The astral activity becomes congested and
    • off still more completely, which are really striving to become
    • form-building and this state of affairs becomes organic —
    • therapy cannot become a complete science any more than a person
  • Title: Lecture: Lecture I: Physiology and Therapeutics
    Matching lines:
    • times. We have become accustomed to gaining a definite view of natural
    • insightful thinking, it becomes clear that what underlies them could never
    • separation of physiology from pathology and therapy, which has become
    • will become evident that the normal simply passes in transition into the
    • gradually become accustomed to crystallizing a kind of normal picture,
    • This can become clear if one knows and understands rightly the value of
  • Title: Lecture: Lecture II: Physiology and Therapeutics
    Matching lines:
    • child would simply saturate himself with the creating forces, would become
    • take it up appropriately never become geniuses. It is people who carry
    • change of teeth. They have undergone only one stage. They become
    • course of these illnesses becomes comprehensible the moment one really
    • in physical research in order to become a spiritual investigator;
    • has become more and more common today? It has become commonplace for
    • the spirit materialistically. While the proletariat has become
    • materialistic, the aristocracy has become spiritualistic. If you find
  • Title: Lecture: Lecture III: Physiology and Therapeutics
    Matching lines:
    • will become clear that man's feeling is not connected in a primary way
    • the detailed effects, it becomes evident that what I suggested
    • disposition of the potassium salts in the birch bark: we thus become
  • Title: Lecture: Lecture IV: Physiology and Therapeutics
    Matching lines:
    • become too intense in the metabolic-limb system, where it should only
    • the metabolic-limb system with head activity, which thus becomes
    • becomes an activity whose intensity is too great. Then what should
    • way, it could be possible for this force-organization to become
    • already become acquainted with this phosphorus-activity from the other
    • the head can become the carrier of just those soul-spiritual processes
    • however, you could say that what homoeopathy reveals becomes perfectly
    • human being with outer, inorganic nature becomes transparent. What I
    • conscious head but with unconscious limbs. These limbs become
    • empirically; rather it becomes possible to work fully consciously to
    • us assume that this ego-activity becomes too great within the human
    • itself into the human organism through which a person becomes
    • from these examples how medicine can gradually become rational. These
    • through spiritual vision. Through spiritual vision it becomes clear
    • blood-activity, is transmitted through the male organism. It becomes
  • Title: Anthroposophical Approach to Medicine: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • objects become more definite. As the result of modern empiricism, all
    • world had become real in a lower world; in the human brain a world of
    • Imaginative Knowledge; the processes in the rhythmic system become
    • Just as in the laboratory I can become familiar with the nature of
    • far they may become guiding principles in orthodox empirical
  • Title: Anthroposophical Approach to Medicine: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • the intestinal wall, it has become practically inorganic. The purely
    • becomes heretical as regards orthodox science. The system connected
    • transformed into organic, living albumen, when dead albumen becomes
    • has become almost inorganic.
  • Title: Anthroposophical Approach to Medicine: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • this place in the body something that really tends to become an ear —
  • Title: Anthroposophical Approach to Medicine: Lecture IV
    Matching lines:
    • etheric or the astral activity becomes too intense, the whole
    • knows by what divine power, in order that the organism may become
    • these gas-bubbles, which are really striving to become organs, are
    • astral and become as active as the astral organism itself. This means
    • and this state of affairs becomes organic — if, therefore, the
  • Title: Social Future: Lecture I: The Social Question as a Cultural Question, a Question of Equity, and a Question of Economics
    Matching lines:
    • becomes evident that when a man works but a quarter of an hour more
    • that only, which had become a part of modern thought, viz. the
    • over again that political life must become democratic, that power and
    • intellect, so that the educated intelligence in him may become at the
    • modern evolutionary impulses, has become a part of the economic life.
    • the passions of men. And thus it becomes ever more evident that the
    • reality, the cultural and political life of the people. It becomes
    • become apparent between the economic and the cultural, and between
    • become more and more one which does not evolve out of its own inner
  • Title: Social Future: Lecture II: The Organization of a Practical Economic Life on the Associative Basis
    Matching lines:
    • will become practical, so that it may be said: practical and applied
    • evils have been removed, because the state has become the capitalist.
    • be consumed, become in their turn, as consumers, tyrants over
    • finance, and money has become the medium with which one buys and
    • and employed has long since become useless; it is no longer there but
    • still going on with the money which has itself become an economic
    • it becomes itself an economic process. This is extremely significant.
    • human labor has become dependent upon it. The regulating of human
    • needed. When a product shows a tendency to become too dear, that
    • supplied. If a commodity tends to become too cheap, that is to say,
    • financial system in which money itself has become an object of
    • abstraction from the economic life. Money only becomes a reality
    • must, of course, be kept in mind. But money becomes a reality in the
    • process, and becomes productive, it shall be taxed. (See:
  • Title: Social Future: Lecture III: The Task and Limitations of of Democracy, Public and Criminal Law
    Matching lines:
    • which they develop and form their capacities, have become to a great
    • another, have become dependent on economic matters passes quite
    • the course of centuries. And this dogma has become so firmly fixed
    • was quite unobserved. People have become aware of the approach of
    • principle has become the sign and seal of human social endeavor and
    • become dependent on the economic life, but they must regain their
  • Title: Social Future: Lecture IV: Cultural Questions, Spiritual Science, Art, Science, Religion
    Matching lines:
    • everyday surroundings have become. Art has made an illusory progress.
    • and practical life thereby becomes prosaic, uninteresting and dry,
    • being must reflect that man can become something more in the course
    • following way: Can man become a free being through inner development,
    • or can he not? And the answer is: He can become free if he develops
    • can only then become free. Man's freedom is not a gift of nature.
    • may become clear to a larger circle of people, it will be necessary
    • fear I have already described, the fear that we might become too much
    • becomes one with reality. We must not fear to approach reality; our
    • becomes one with reality, but in such wise that, being merged in
    • simple man of Nazareth”, the conception of religion has become
    • that manner of teaching has already become instinctive. If it is
  • Title: Social Future: Lecture V: The Cooperation of the Spiritual, Political and Economic Departments of Life
    Matching lines:
    • administration of economic affairs has become dependent upon the
    • intellectual life which has preserved its independence has become
    • it has become abstract, devoid of reality. Now, because the influence
    • happened unnoticed, but in reality the two have become one. Economic
    • become powerless with regard to external life. The free spiritual
    • precisely what is inseparable in life becomes separated, even what is
    • which the social question has now become acute, people have striven
    • commodity produced by the individual becomes merchandise, which is
    • been banished from practical life can become foreign to life. A
  • Title: Social Future: Lecture VI: National and International Life in the Threefold Social Organism
    Matching lines:
    • internationalism. We become national, because the feeling of
    • reverence, to understanding, because it has become a reality to us,
    • with the world requirements which have become evident. Everywhere we
    • will become simply the manifold expression of that which, to
    • of a spiritual conception of life, has already become a reality, even
    • will thus become the means by which true world-economy will be
    • the consequent increasing similarity of human needs, it becomes ever
    • practicality actually demands these ideals, if it is ever to become
    • finished bridge must first exist ideally and can only become a real
    • only its abstract content, and in doing so he may become estranged
    • statistical reports, perhaps of the Balkan States; for it has become
    • future. Everything depends on the fact that people become true with
  • Title: World Economy: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • economic life of modern peoples had become extraordinarily complicated
    • become impossible. This was the great question of the twentieth
    • But we are also conscious in our whole body. How do we become thus
    • becomes something altogether different from what it is here or there
    • configuration becomes quite different in the lung. In the same way,
  • Title: World Economy: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • becomes, in relation to Nature, “human Labour.” Here we
    • then becomes visible — appearing, as it were, through the
    • irrelevant. But it becomes an economic value-creating factor the
  • Title: World Economy: Lecture III
    Matching lines:
    • does it become practical. We must answer, therefore: The science of
    • — the incorporation of Labour in the social life — become a
    • when the Law becomes distinct from the “Commandment.” In
    • should decrease in value. Now when this “interest” becomes
  • Title: World Economy: Lecture IV
    Matching lines:
    • cheaper in the right way; they become cheaper, through the
    • multiplied; clothes will become cheaper and the result will be that
    • by which the price is forced down will only become evident after a
    • cheapened becomes effective. Nevertheless, sooner or later it will
    • such extreme examples, where the effect, though it does not become
    • becomes the means of expression, the instrument, the medium for the
    • this stage) becomes a lender to another man, who possesses
    • becomes economically active once more as a concrete and specific fact.
    • the Money to begin with becomes the lender, the creditor. The other,
    • the Spirit, becomes the debtor. You have here a relationship between
    • the very fact that it becomes “owed” or
    • hold of by the Spirit. This becomes a value on the other side:
  • Title: World Economy: Lecture V
    Matching lines:
    • from the Spirit which organised the Labour. The Capital becomes
    • yesterday, the man who produces by means of Spirit becomes a debtor.
    • It is only through his having credit that he becomes or can
    • become a debtor. At this point in our diagram credit steps in —
    • the economic process I become a debtor, that is to say, if I demand
    • does not become cheaper but more expensive. “Real credit”
    • Capital, the Capital will become congested the moment it arrives again
    • become congested; it will not be preserved, but will go right on
    • too much Capital. The several owners of Capital will become painfully
    • with us. The process only becomes organic through the fact that things
    • that which ought really to be used up at a certain point becomes
    • become unliving — a petrified deposit, as it were, in the
    • For instance, if at any place a certain kind of commodity becomes too
    • If the price of a commodity becomes too cheap, so that those who
    • of work. If, on the other hand, a commodity becomes too dear, workers
    • the amount of money becomes less; then the commodities will be
  • Title: World Economy: Lecture VI
    Matching lines:
    • land will grow, it will become dearer and dearer. Whereas a man
    • therefore, which depend mainly on manufacture, become cheaper when the
    • without first having to be manufactured, becomes dearer when the rate
    • workers. He has become a classic.
    • good in cases of simple purchase. Nay more, a thing becomes a
    • Capital. I become a debtor; but I also become a producer. In this way,
  • Title: World Economy: Lecture VII
    Matching lines:
    • have often explained, become confused mainly because they try to
    • things become more and more expensive on the one side, on the side of
    • ground-rent, so do they become cheaper and cheaper on the other side,
    • products, the more difficult does it become to bring about their
    • these products; as soon as the differentiation becomes greater, this
    • it would become fixed, but into free spiritual undertakings where it
    • elaborated and sent on in this direction, in which case it becomes
    • becomes means of production.
    • otherwise destroyed. In short, a thing becomes a commodity by the very
    • at this third point in the diagram, the distinction becomes unusually
    • true sense of the word. How does a piece of goods become a
  • Title: World Economy: Lecture VIII
    Matching lines:
    • become a supplier of money, or whether perhaps, at a given time in the
    • whole working of the economic process, he cannot become a supplier of
    • becomes still more complicated when we introduce the concept of
    • things — or two such views, the one and the other — become
    • happen; indeed, such men may even become Cabinet Ministers and then it
    • processes. The “tauschen” has become a
    • process becomes confused and deceptive. We must first get to the root
  • Title: World Economy: Lecture IX
    Matching lines:
    • choosing subjects for dissertations: What becomes of the free gifts in
    • France one could see how Loaned Capital becomes involved in the whole
    • into the economic life. (In a certain community it has recently become
    • like to take straightforwardly, become complicated, so that we may
    • States themselves had become as Politics and Economics coalesced. The
    • of what is decent and proper conduct, it may become very fair, but it
    • gradually become a process taking place — I can find no other
    • become objectified — it has become impersonal. This brings me to
    • further course it becomes economic; for if we have unproductive
  • Title: World Economy: Lecture X
    Matching lines:
    • exchange, the things exchanged on both sides become of greater value.
    • Economically speaking, what have the peas become by this process?
    • would be money. In such a case, peas would have become money in the
    • “money.” A thing does not become money by being
    • process. It becomes money by undergoing — at a particular point
    • quality; we must become aware how such a process works under each new
    • peas may become money. It is simply not true that we in the economic
    • once you human beings are good; you must become good.” Think of
    • preaching: “If men will only become selfless, if they will only
    • will become good.” Such judgments are really of no more worth
    • simple case of exchange, where money becomes more and more important,
  • Title: World Economy: Lecture XI
    Matching lines:
    • tended to become State-economies.†
    • advantage, and the gain of each and all becomes significant for the
    • life tends in the course of time to become weaker and weaker. It is a
    • becomes all the more so when we take the following into account. Think
    • few days ago: The Capital must not be allowed to become congested.
    • would become dammed up. Provision must be made for the elimination of
    • the excess Capital. The Capital must not be allowed to become
    • may become, represents an economic domain more or less self-contained,
    • become dammed up in the land must vanish into spiritual institutions.
  • Title: World Economy: Lecture XII
    Matching lines:
    • purchase-money; for him it becomes working capital.*
    • depends on purchase-money, gift-money simply becomes valueless. It
    • as it becomes loaned money or gift-money. But we mask this fact if we
    • becomes of our science of national economy — that is, Political
    • it becomes dearer again as purchase-money. What would otherwise have
    • money only becomes what it is at the moment when it is actually
    • becomes an expression of the price of something else. To penetrate the
    • place, till I have less of it — or things have become dearer. But
  • Title: World Economy: Lecture XIII
    Matching lines:
    • can become, how many factors converge in the nature of value and how
    • years. Therefore the picture will have to become worth as much as
    • right in a certain sphere. According to them, a thing becomes Capital
    • it becomes possible to grasp the process in terms of numbers, inasmuch
  • Title: World Economy: Lecture XIV
    Matching lines:
    • the other. It becomes still more difficult if you take, say, a
    • in the proper way, such products as become detached from the soil. You
    • Yet if the economic life becomes permeated with a way of thinking such
    • the thing has become as transparent as this, it will be acknowledged
    • because it is transparent. Even today — though they become
    • unsound; they have become so far remote from Nature — the
    • become. The ordinary way of putting it today would be to call it the
    • becomes equivalent to the means of production which we have in Nature
  • Title: Lecture I: Man's Life on Earth
    Matching lines:
    • death on the Earth. For He did not merely become incorporated,
    • become united with the powers of Earth.
    • true. For now he saw that what had been true, had become changed; the
    • upon it until the piece of bread becomes radiant to you. Then eat it,
    • Universe, has entered into you and become alive within you.”
    • wisdom. Through this he has become a free being. In olden times even
    • able to become free. In the near future this will, however, have the
  • Title: Lecture II: Man's Life on Earth
    Matching lines:
    • increasingly becomes our outer world, our Universe, our Cosmos. Our
    • view of the relation between World and Man becomes completely
    • becomes ever more enhanced. Of course, you will not imagine that the
    • Sun and Moon. Yet in reality, what lung and heart there become
    • in their, weaving movement — become what then pulsates and
    • become what forms our life of nerves and senses. All this is
    • shrinking, to become a body — spiritual to begin with, and then
    • eludes our spiritual gaze; now therefore do we look to become Man
    • emerge who could become your mother and your father.
    • only become free when spiritual beings no longer directed him —
    • become a thing of the past. And if men now continue to develop mere
    • a general rule you will only become able to converse with a soul who
    • — then you will gradually become intelligible to him so that he
    • his life of soul becomes altogether different. Then, as the time
    • entity that has become of Sun and Moon, drawing near our mother. And
    • one entity becomes two again, as though two mirror-images were to
    • physical images become of it in the growing embryo. For the physical
    • embryonal eyes are but images, representing what has thus become of
    • do so it becomes the form of the human heart. Not only is the form of
    • become in his next incarnation. Such is man's pathway: out of the
    • Maximum number of matches per file exceeded.
  • Title: Lecture III: Man's Life on Earth
    Matching lines:
    • stars. From the moment we fall asleep, the starry heavens become
    • heart, becomes for you an eye, — becomes, in very fact, what we
    • becomes aware of his relationship, not now merely, as before, with
    • the Christ willed to become for the Earth in that He passed through
    • that Christ becomes our Guide and Leader through the Zodiac during
    • directed in waking life to the Christ, then Christ becomes for him a
    • up till now; and as for what the Christ has yet to become for
    • and becomes our Guide; and then all the confusion resolves itself
    • man in this sphere, None other than the Christ Himself becomes his
    • does the whole Earth become a book of life which interprets for us
    • study of history has, of course, become hopelessly abstract in our
    • the organs of speech. It becomes the kind of language of which I
    • which comes from the flowers. We ourselves become flowers, we blossom
    • in initiation knowledge, the human body becomes for us a world in
    • been trying to explain to you how language has to change and become
    • the Christ becomes our Guide, as I have described to you. It is
  • Title: Lecture IV: Man's Life on Earth
    Matching lines:
    • another angle. Unless we have allowed ourselves to become completely
    • whether it shall become man or woman. Its whole destiny on earth
    • this case, the soul can become a man. Whether it receives the
    • determines whether the soul is to become man or woman, by its passage
    • influence of the Moon, preparation is made for the soul to become man
  • Title: Lecture V: Man's Life on Earth
    Matching lines:
    • never reveal itself to these researches. It will however become
    • they to be successful, man would become extremely clever in the
    • leads a wild and dissolute life. When a man has in this way become a
    • become immoral). The Ahrimanic beings wage war continually on
    • the intention that man, seeing nothing but what is moral, may become
    • the air-fire beings would have man become nothing but force,
    • incomplete. They can only become complete if reinforced by some
    • becomes a liar, he becomes an habitual liar. In that case he is
    • seem, the fact that the person becomes addicted to lying is a weapon
    • ether body, then the person would become possessed — possessed
    • The person in question will in this case tend to become an
    • become an ego-less dreamer, who is, as one says, “not in his
    • the Sun becomes first of all fiery and aflame, and then grows darker
    • behold how the Sun becomes fiery red and then black, — for us,
    • us: Be not dismayed that the Sun has become black; it is black
    • near to Christ, and then the Sun does not, it is true, become bright
    • although still a black disk, becomes a being who enables us to listen
    • of the Mystery of Golgotha we then become able to speak to these
  • Title: Lecture VI: Man's Life on Earth
    Matching lines:
    • physical body, we become able to disregard the latter, using the
    • hater of it. As to his head, he simply cannot bear it. He becomes
    • of the family became [an] anthroposophist have become deeply
    • man becomes very different after his death. For you should also think
    • after death we have passed the sphere of Saturn, we become ripe to
    • on, till through a sequence of such Earth-lives he shall become
    • Knowledge of this sort then becomes a kind of tumour in the soul.
    • cleverness. A kind of cancerous growth becomes established in our
    • becomes filled with the human love which springs from such
  • Title: Lecture: Planetary Spheres: Lecture I
    Matching lines:
    • death on the Earth. For He did not merely become incorporated,
    • become united with the powers of Earth.
    • true. For now he saw that what had been true, had become changed; the
    • upon it until the piece of bread becomes radiant to you. Then eat it,
    • Universe, has entered into you and become alive within you.”
    • wisdom. Through this he has become a free being. In olden times even
    • able to become free. In the near future this will, however, have the
  • Title: Lecture: Planetary Spheres: Lecture II
    Matching lines:
    • increasingly becomes our outer world, our Universe, our Cosmos. Our
    • view of the relation between World and Man becomes completely
    • becomes ever more enhanced. Of course, you will not imagine that the
    • Sun and Moon. Yet in reality, what lung and heart there become
    • in their, weaving movement — become what then pulsates and
    • become what forms our life of nerves and senses. All this is
    • shrinking, to become a body — spiritual to begin with, and then
    • eludes our spiritual gaze; now therefore do we look to become Man
    • emerge who could become your mother and your father.
    • only become free when spiritual beings no longer directed him —
    • become a thing of the past. And if men now continue to develop mere
    • a general rule you will only become able to converse with a soul who
    • — then you will gradually become intelligible to him so that he
    • his life of soul becomes altogether different. Then, as the time
    • entity that has become of Sun and Moon, drawing near our mother. And
    • one entity becomes two again, as though two mirror-images were to
    • physical images become of it in the growing embryo. For the physical
    • embryonal eyes are but images, representing what has thus become of
    • do so it becomes the form of the human heart. Not only is the form of